SlideShare a Scribd company logo
MICROMASTER 420
0.12 kW - 11 kW
Operating Instructions Issue 10/06
User Documentation
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
MICROMASTER 420 Documentation
Getting Started Guide
Is for quick commissioning with SDP and BOP.
Operating Instructions
Gives information about features of the MICROMASTER
420, Installation, Commissioning, Control modes, System
Parameter structure, Troubleshooting, Specifications and
available options of the MICROMASTER 420.
Parameter List
The Parameter List contains the description of all
Parameters structured in functional order and a detailed
description. The Parameter list also includes a series of
function plans.
Catalogues
In the catalogue you will find all the necessary information
to select an appropriate inverter, as well as filters, chokes,
operator panels and communication options.
MICROMASTER 420
0.12 kW - 11 kW
Operating Instructions
User Documentation
Issue 10/06
Valid for Release Issue 10/06
Inverter Type Control Version
MICROMASTER 420 V1.2
0.12 kW - 11 kW
Overview 1
Installation 2
Commissioning 3
Troubleshooting 4
MICROMASTER 420
specifications
5
Options 6
Electro-magnetic
compatibility (EMC)
7
Appendices A
B
C
D
E
F
G
Index
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
4 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Further information is available on the Internet under:
http://www.siemens.de/micromaster
Approved Siemens Quality for Software and Training
is to DIN ISO 9001, Reg. No. 2160-01
The reproduction, transmission or use of this document,
or its contents is not permitted unless authorized in
writing. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights
including rights created by patent grant or registration of a
utility model or design are reserved.
© Siemens AG 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006. All Rights
Reserved.
MICROMASTER® is a registered trademark of Siemens.
Other functions not described in this document may be
available. However, this fact shall not constitute an
obligation to supply such functions with a new control, or
when servicing.
We have checked that the contents of this document
correspond to the hardware and software described.
There may be discrepancies nevertheless, and no
guarantee can be given that they are completely identical.
The information contained in this document is reviewed
regularly and any necessary changes will be included in
the next edition. We welcome suggestions for
improvement.
Siemens handbooks are printed on chlorine-free paper
that has been produced from managed sustainable
forests. No solvents have been used in the printing or
binding process.
Document subject to change without prior notice.
Order Number: 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft
Issue 10/06 Foreword
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 5
Foreword
User Documentation
WARNING
Before installing and commissioning, you must read the safety instructions and
warnings carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make
sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or
damaged labels.
Information is also available from:
Regional Contacts
Please get in touch with your contact for Technical Support in your Region for
questions about services, prices and conditions of Technical Support.
Central Technical Support
The competent consulting service for technical issues with a broad range of
requirements-based services around our products and systems.
Europe / Africa
Tel: +49 (0) 180 5050 222
Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223
Email: adsupport@siemens.com
America
Tel: +1 423 262 2522
Fax: +1 423 262 2589
Email: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com
Asia / Pacific
Tel: +86 1064 757 575
Fax: +86 1064 747 474
Email: adsupport.asia@siemens.com
Online Service & Support
The comprehensive, generally available information system over the Internet, from
product support to service & support to the support tools in the shop.
http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support
Contact address
Should any questions or problems arise while reading this manual, please contact
the Siemens office concerned using the form provided at the back this manual.
Definitions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Definitions and Warnings
DANGER
indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION
used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which,
if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury.
CAUTION
used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if
not avoided, may result in a property damage.
NOTICE
indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable
result or state.
NOTES
For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important information
relating to the product or highlights part of the documentation for special attention.
Qualified personnel
For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified person"
is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation
of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following
qualifications:
1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag
circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures.
2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with
established safety procedures.
3. Trained in rendering first aid.
PE
= Ground
♦ PE – Protective Earth uses circuit protective conductors sized for short circuits
where the voltage will not rise in excess of 50 Volts. This connection is normally
used to ground the inverter.
♦ - Is the ground connection where the reference voltage can be the same as
the Earth voltage. This connection is normally used to ground the motor.
Use for intended purpose only
The equipment may be used only for the application stated in the manual and only
in conjunction with devices and components recommended and authorized by
Siemens.
Issue 10/06 Safety Instructions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 7
Safety Instructions
The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are provided for your safety and as a
means of preventing damage to the product or components in the machines
connected. This section lists Warnings, Cautions and Notes, which apply generally
when handling MICROMASTER 420 Inverters, classified as General, Transport &
Storage, Commissioning, Operation, Repair and Dismantling & Disposal.
Specific Warnings, Cautions and Notes that apply to particular activities are
listed at the beginning of the relevant chapters and are repeated or supplemented
at critical points throughout these chapters.
Please read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal
safety and will also help prolong the service life of your MICROMASTER 420
Inverter and the equipment you connect to it.
General
WARNING
♦ This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially
dangerous rotating mechanical parts. Non-compliance with Warnings or
failure to follow the instructions contained in this manual can result in loss of
life, severe personal injury or serious damage to property.
♦ Only suitable qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only
after becoming familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and
maintenance procedures contained in this manual. The successful and safe
operation of this equipment is dependent upon its proper handling,
installation, operation and maintenance.
♦ Risk of electric shock. The DC link capacitors remain charged for five minutes
after power has been removed. It is not permissible to open the
equipment until 5 minutes after the power has been removed.
♦ HP ratings are based on the Siemens 1LA motors and are given for
guidance only, they do not necessarily comply with UL or NEMA HP
ratings.
CAUTION
♦ Children and the general public must be prevented from accessing or
approaching the equipment!
♦ This equipment may only be used for the purpose specified by the
manufacturer. Unauthorized modifications and the use of spare parts and
accessories that are not sold or recommended by the manufacturer of the
equipment can cause fires, electric shocks and injuries.
Safety Instructions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
8 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
NOTICE
♦ Keep these operating instructions within easy reach of the equipment and
make them available to all users
♦ Whenever measuring or testing has to be performed on live equipment, the
regulations of Safety Code VBG 4.0 must be observed, in particular § 8
"Permissible Deviations when Working on Live Parts”. Suitable electronic tools
should be used.
♦ Before installing and commissioning, please read these safety instructions and
warnings carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make
sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing
or damaged labels.
Transport & Storage
WARNING
♦ Correct transport, storage, erection and mounting, as well as careful
operation and maintenance are essential for proper and safe operation of the
equipment.
CAUTION
♦ Protect the inverter against physical shocks and vibration during transport and
storage. Also be sure to protect it against water (rainfall) and excessive
temperatures (see Table 5-1 on page 184).
Commissioning
WARNING
♦ Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with
warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material.
Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation,
commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the
device/system.
♦ Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment
must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards).
♦ If a Residual Current-operated protective Device (RCD) is to be used, it must
be an RCD type B. Machines with a three phase power supply, fitted with
EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage
Circuit-Breaker - see DIN VDE 0160, section 5.5.2 and EN50178 section
5.2.11.1).
♦ The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is
inoperative:
- the power supply terminals L/L1, N/L2, L3.
- the motor terminals U, V, W, DC+, DC-
♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see
EN 60204, 9.2.5.4)
CAUTION
The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried
out as shown in Fig. 2-8 on page 33, to prevent inductive and capacitive
interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
Issue 10/06 Safety Instructions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 9
Operation
WARNING
♦ Motor parameters must be accurately configured for the motor overload
protection to operate correctly.
♦ MICROMASTERS operate at high voltages.
♦ When operating electrical devices, it is impossible to avoid applying
hazardous voltages to certain parts of the equipment.
♦ Emergency Stop facilities according to EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must
remain operative in all operating modes of the control equipment. Any
disengagement of the Emergency Stop facility must not lead to uncontrolled
or undefined restart.
♦ Wherever faults occurring in the control equipment can lead to substantial
material damage or even grievous bodily injury (i.e. potentially dangerous
faults), additional external precautions must be taken or facilities provided to
ensure or enforce safe operation, even when a fault occurs (e.g. independent
limit switches, mechanical interlocks, etc.).
♦ Certain parameter settings may cause the inverter to restart automatically
after an input power failure.
♦ This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection in
accordance with UL508C section 42. Refer to P0610 and P0335, i
2
t is ON by
default. Motor overload protection can also be provided using an external
PTC via a digital input.
♦ This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V /
460 V when protected by an H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self-
protected combination motor controller (for more details see Appendix F).
♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see
EN 60204, 9.2.5.4).
Safety Instructions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
10 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Repair
WARNING
♦ Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by
repair centers authorized by Siemens or by qualified personnel who are
thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures
contained in this manual.
♦ Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in
the relevant spare parts list.
♦ Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access
Dismantling & Disposal
NOTES
♦ The inverter’s packaging is re-usable. Retain the packaging for future use or
return it to the manufacturer.
♦ Easy-to-release screw and snap connectors allow you to break the unit down
into its component parts. You can then re-cycle these component parts,
dispose of them in accordance with local requirements or return them to
the manufacturer.
Issue 10/06 Table of Contents
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 11
Table of Contents
1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 17
1.1 The MICROMASTER 420....................................................................................... 18
1.2 Features.................................................................................................................. 19
2 Installation............................................................................................................. 21
2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 23
2.3 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 25
2.4 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 27
3 Functions............................................................................................................... 35
3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 38
3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 52
3.3 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 56
3.4 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 57
3.5 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 59
3.6 Inputs / outputs ....................................................................................................... 89
3.7 Communications ..................................................................................................... 98
3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 121
3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 124
3.10 JOG....................................................................................................................... 126
3.11 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 128
3.12 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 132
3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 141
3.14 Electronic brakes .................................................................................................. 147
3.15 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 152
3.16 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 154
3.17 Closed-loop Vdc control........................................................................................ 156
3.18 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 158
3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses.............................................. 160
3.20 Power module protection...................................................................................... 164
3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 168
Table of Contents Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
12 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 177
4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 178
4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP.............................................................................. 179
4.3 Fault messages and alarm messages.................................................................. 180
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications................................................................... 183
6 Options ................................................................................................................ 191
6.1 Device-independent options ................................................................................. 191
6.2 Device-dependent options.................................................................................... 191
7 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC).............................................................. 193
7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)................................................................... 194
Appendices .............................................................................................................................. 199
A Changing the Operator Panel............................................................................ 199
B Removing Covers ............................................................................................... 200
B.1 Removing Covers Frame Size A .......................................................................... 200
B.2 Removing Covers Frame Size B and C................................................................ 201
C Removing ‘Y’ Cap ............................................................................................... 202
C.1 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A .......................................................................... 202
C.2 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C................................................................ 203
D Removing fan ...................................................................................................... 204
D.1 Removing fan, Frame Size A................................................................................ 204
D.2 Removing fan, Frame Sizes B and C ................................................................... 205
E Applicable Standards ......................................................................................... 206
F Short circuit current rating (SCCR)................................................................... 207
G List of Abbreviations .......................................................................................... 208
Index .............................................................................................................................. 211
Issue 10/06 Table of Contents
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 13
List of Illustrations
Fig. 2-1 Forming ................................................................................................................................ 23
Fig. 2-2 Ambient operating temperature............................................................................................ 23
Fig. 2-3 Installation altitude................................................................................................................ 24
Fig. 2-4 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420 ................................................................................... 25
Fig. 2-5 MICROMASTER 420 connection terminals.......................................................................... 30
Fig. 2-6 Motor and Power Connections ............................................................................................. 30
Fig. 2-7 Control terminals of MICROMASTER 420............................................................................ 31
Fig. 2-8 Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI................................................................. 33
Fig. 3-1 Parameter types ................................................................................................................... 38
Fig. 3-2 Header line for parameter P0305 ......................................................................................... 42
Fig. 3-3 Parameter grouping / access................................................................................................ 43
Fig. 3-4 Binectors .............................................................................................................................. 47
Fig. 3-5 Connectors........................................................................................................................... 48
Fig. 3-6 BICO connections (examples).............................................................................................. 49
Fig. 3-7 Normalization / de-normalization .......................................................................................... 51
Fig. 3-8 Operator panels.................................................................................................................... 52
Fig. 3-9 Operator panel keys ............................................................................................................. 54
Fig. 3-10 Changing parameters using the BOP................................................................................... 55
Fig. 3-11 MICROMASTER 420 – block diagram ................................................................................. 56
Fig. 3-12 Status Display Panel (SDP).................................................................................................. 57
Fig. 3-13 Recommended wiring for the factory setting ........................................................................ 58
Fig. 3-14 Procedure when commissioning........................................................................................... 59
Fig. 3-15 DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz...................................................................... 61
Fig. 3-16 Mode of operation of the 50/60 Hz DIP switch in conjunction with P0100............................ 61
Fig. 3-17 Example of a typical motor rating plate ................................................................................ 65
Fig. 3-18 Motor terminal box................................................................................................................ 66
Fig. 3-19 Star / delta circuit configurations .......................................................................................... 67
Fig. 3-20 V/f characteristic................................................................................................................... 67
Fig. 3-21 Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools....................................................................... 86
Fig. 3-22 Digital inputs......................................................................................................................... 89
Fig. 3-23 Digital output ........................................................................................................................ 92
Fig. 3-24 Connection example for ADC voltage input.......................................................................... 94
Fig. 3-25 ADC channel ........................................................................................................................ 94
Fig. 3-26 Wire breakage monitoring .................................................................................................... 95
Fig. 3-27 Signal output through the DAC channel ............................................................................... 96
Fig. 3-28 DAC channel ........................................................................................................................ 96
Fig. 3-29 Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link................................................... 98
Fig. 3-30 Cycle times......................................................................................................................... 101
Table of Contents Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
14 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Fig. 3-31 Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer (master).............. 102
Fig. 3-32 Telegram structure .............................................................................................................103
Fig. 3-33 Assignment of the address byte (ADR) .............................................................................. 104
Fig. 3-34 Circulating list (Example of configuration) .......................................................................... 105
Fig. 3-35 Cycle time........................................................................................................................... 105
Fig. 3-36 Transmit sequence............................................................................................................. 106
Fig. 3-37 USS bus topology...............................................................................................................107
Fig. 3-38 Telegram structure .............................................................................................................109
Fig. 3-39 Structure of the PKW and PZD areas................................................................................. 109
Fig. 3-40 Connecting the USS bus cable........................................................................................... 118
Fig. 3-41 Connecting the RS485 terminator ...................................................................................... 119
Fig. 3-42 Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2.......................................... 122
Fig. 3-43 Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded method .... 123
Fig. 3-44 Motorized potentiometer..................................................................................................... 124
Fig. 3-45 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise....................................................................... 126
Fig. 3-46 Structure of the technological controller (PID controller) .................................................... 128
Fig. 3-47 PID controller...................................................................................................................... 129
Fig. 3-48 Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via DIN1.............. 131
Fig. 3-49 Setpoint channel................................................................................................................. 132
Fig. 3-50 Summation ......................................................................................................................... 133
Fig. 3-51 Modifying the frequency setpoint........................................................................................ 133
Fig. 3-52 Ramp-function generator.................................................................................................... 134
Fig. 3-53 Rounding off after an OFF1 command ............................................................................... 135
Fig. 3-54 OFF1 .................................................................................................................................. 137
Fig. 3-55 OFF2 .................................................................................................................................. 138
Fig. 3-56 OFF3 .................................................................................................................................. 138
Fig. 3-57 Changing-over using the BICO parameter P0810.............................................................. 139
Fig. 3-58 Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1 ................................................................................. 141
Fig. 3-59 Motor holding brake after OFF2 ......................................................................................... 142
Fig. 3-60 Direct motor holding brake connection ............................................................................... 145
Fig. 3-61 Indirect motor holding brake connection............................................................................. 146
Fig. 3-62 Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes.......................................................................... 147
Fig. 3-63 DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3........................................................................................... 148
Fig. 3-64 DC braking after external selection .................................................................................... 149
Fig. 3-65 Compound braking ............................................................................................................. 150
Fig. 3-66 Flying restart....................................................................................................................... 155
Fig. 3-67 Vdc_max controller.............................................................................................................156
Fig. 3-68 Drive inverter response ...................................................................................................... 161
Fig. 3-69 PTC characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors........................................................................... 162
Issue 10/06 Table of Contents
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 15
Fig. 3-70 Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER 420................................................ 163
Fig. 3-71 Drive inverter response to an overload condition ............................................................... 165
Fig. 3-72 Overload response of the drive inverter (P0290)................................................................ 166
Fig. 3-73 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor
when fed from a drive inverter............................................................................................ 169
Fig. 3-74 Slip compensation ..............................................................................................................173
Fig. 3-75 Effect of V/f resonance damping ........................................................................................ 174
Fig. 3-76 Imax controller.................................................................................................................... 175
List of Tables
Table 2-1 Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 420............................................................... 25
Table 3-1 Parameter attributes............................................................................................................. 40
Table 3-2 Parameter P0700 ................................................................................................................. 44
Table 3-3 Parameter P1000 ................................................................................................................. 45
Table 3-4 Parameter P0719 ................................................................................................................. 46
Table 3-5 Normalized interfaces........................................................................................................... 50
Table 3-6 Normalization functions ........................................................................................................50
Table 3-7 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 57
Table 3-8 Example 1LA7060-4AB10 .................................................................................................... 68
Table 3-9 Parameter for motor/control data.......................................................................................... 69
Table 3-10 Parameters P0701 – P0706 ................................................................................................. 90
Table 3-11 Parameter P0731 (frequently used functions / states).......................................................... 93
Table 3-12 BOP link ............................................................................................................................... 99
Table 3-13 COM link............................................................................................................................... 99
Table 3-14 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates................................................................... 106
Table 3-15 Structural data .................................................................................................................... 107
Table 3-16 Thermal and electrical characteristics ................................................................................ 108
Table 3-17 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate....................... 108
Table 3-18 Task IDs (master -> drive converter).................................................................................. 112
Table 3-19 Response ID (converter -> master) .................................................................................... 113
Table 3-20 Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed" .................................... 114
Table 3-21 Example for direct coding via digital inputs......................................................................... 121
Table 3-22 Example for binary coding via digital inputs........................................................................ 123
Table 3-23 Mode of operation of the MOP ........................................................................................... 125
Table 3-24 Selecting the motorized potentiometer ............................................................................... 125
Table 3-25 Correspondence between the parameters ......................................................................... 130
Table 3-26 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator ................................................................... 136
Table 3-27 Examples for the parameter settings of P0810................................................................... 139
Table 3-28 Possible parameter settings for P0719............................................................................... 140
Table of Contents Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
16 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-29 Automatic restarts .............................................................................................................. 152
Table 3-30 Settings for parameter P1200............................................................................................. 154
Table 3-31 Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 159
Table 3-32 Thermal classes ................................................................................................................. 162
Table 3-33 General protection of the power components..................................................................... 164
Table 3-34 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300).................................................................................. 169
Table 3-35 Voltage boost ..................................................................................................................... 170
Table 4-1 Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP ....................................................... 178
Table 5-1 MICROMASTER Performance Ratings.............................................................................. 184
Table 5-2 Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals ............. 185
Table 5-3 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency............................................................... 185
Table 5-4 MICROMASTER 420 Specifications .................................................................................. 186
Table 7-1 Permissible harmonic current emissions ............................................................................ 195
Table 7-2 Class 1 - General Industrial................................................................................................ 196
Table 7-3 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial................................................................................................. 196
Table 7-4 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential, Commercial and trade applications ............................... 197
Table 7-5 Compliance Table .............................................................................................................. 198
Issue 10/06 1 Overview
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 17
1 Overview
This Chapter contains:
A summary of the major features of the MICROMASTER 420 range.
1.1 The MICROMASTER 420....................................................................................... 18
1.2 Features.................................................................................................................. 19
1 Overview Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
18 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
1.1 The MICROMASTER 420
The MICROMASTER 420s are a range of frequency inverters for controlling the
speed of three phase AC motors. The various models available range from the
120 W single-phase input to the 11 kW three-phase input.
The inverters are microprocessor-controlled and use state-of-the-art Insulated Gate
BipoIar Transistor (IGBT) technology. This makes them reliable and versatile. A
special pulse-width modulation method with selectable Pulse frequency permits
quiet motor operation. Comprehensive protective functions provide excellent
inverter and motor protection.
The MICROMASTER 420 with its default factory settings, is ideal for a large range
of simple motor control applications. The MICROMASTER 420 can also be used
for more advanced motor control applications via its comprehensive parameter
lists.
The MICROMASTER 420 can be used in both 'stand-alone' applications as well as
being integrated into 'Automation Systems'.
Issue 10/06 1 Overview
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 19
1.2 Features
Main Characteristics
Easy installation
Easy commissioning
Rugged EMC design
Can be operated on IT line supplies
Fast repeatable response time to control signals
Comprehensive range of parameters enabling configuration for a wide range of
applications
Simple cable connection
1 Output relay
1 Analog output (0 – 20 mA)
3 Isolated and switchable NPN/PNP digital inputs
1 Analog input, ADC: 0 – 10 V
The analog input can be used as the 4th
digital input
BICO technology
Modular design for extremely flexible configuration
High switching frequencies for low-noise motor operation
Detailed status information and integrated message functions
Performance Characteristics
V/f Control
♦ Flux Current Control (FCC) for improved dynamic response and motor
control
♦ Multi-point V/f characteristic
Automatic restart
Flying restart
Slip compensation
Fast Current Limitation (FCL) for trip-free operation
Motor holding brake
Built-in DC injection brake
Compound braking to improve braking performance
Setpoint input via:
♦ Analog input
♦ Communication interface
♦ JOG function
♦ Motorized potentiometer
♦ Fixed frequencies
Ramp function generator
♦ With smoothing
♦ Without smoothing
Closed-loop control with proportional-integral controller function (PI)
1 Overview Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
20 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Protection characteristics
Overvoltage/undervoltage protection
Overtemperature protection for the inverter
Ground fault protection
Short-circuit protection
i2
t thermal motor protection
PTC for motor protection
Options
Refer to Chapter 6
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 21
2 Installation
This Chapter contains:
General data relating to installation
Dimensions of Inverter
Wiring guidelines to minimize the effects of EMI
Details concerning electrical installation
2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 23
2.2 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 23
2.3 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 24
2.4 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 27
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
22 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
WARNING
♦ Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with
warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material.
Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation,
commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the
device/system.
♦ Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment
must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards).
♦ If a Residual Current-operated protective Device (RCD) is to be used, it must
be an RCD type B. Machines with a three-phase power supply, fitted with
EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage
Circuit-Breaker EN50178 Section 5.2.11.1).
♦ The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is
inoperative:
- the power supply terminals L/L1, N/L2, L3.
- the motor terminals U, V, W, DC+, DC-
♦ Always wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before
carrying out any installation work.
♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see
EN 60204, 9.2.5.4)
♦ The minimum size of the earth bonding conductor must be equal to or greater
than the cross-section of the power supply cables.
CAUTION
The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried
out as shown in Fig. 2-8 on page 33, to prevent inductive and capacitive
interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 23
2.1 General
Installation after a Period of Storage
Following a prolonged period of storage, you must reform the capacitors in the
inverter. The requirements are listed below.
Storage period less than 1 year: No action necessary
Storage period 1 to 2 years Prior to energizing, connect to
voltage for one hour
Storage period 2 to 3 years Prior to energizing, form
according to the curve
Storage period 3 and more years Prior to energizing, form
according to the curve
100
50
75
0,5 1
Voltage
[%]
Time t [h]
2 4 6 8
Fig. 2-1 Forming
2.2 Ambient operating conditions
Temperature
0
20 3010 40
[°C]
Operating temperature
-10 50 60
75
50
25
100
[%]
Permissible output current
Fig. 2-2 Ambient operating temperature
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
24 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Humidity
Relative air humidity ≤ 95% Non-condensing
Altitude
If the inverter is to be installed at an altitude > 1000 m or > 2000 m above sea
level, derating will be required:
80
100
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
Permissible output current
%
Installation altitude in m above sea level
Permissible input voltage
80
100
0 1000 2000 3000 4000
%
Installation altitude in m above sea level
77
Fig. 2-3 Installation altitude
Shock and Vibration
Do not drop the inverter or expose to sudden shock. Do not install the inverter in an
area where it is likely to be exposed to constant vibration.
Mechanical strength to EN 60721-3-3
Deflection: 0.075 mm (10 ... 58 Hz)
Acceleration: 9.8 m/s2
(> 58 ... 200 Hz)
Electromagnetic Radiation
Do not install the inverter near sources of electromagnetic radiation.
Atmospheric Pollution
Do not install the inverter in an environment, which contains atmospheric pollutants
such as dust, corrosive gases, etc.
Water
Take care to site the inverter away from potential water hazards, e.g. do not install
the inverter beneath pipes that are subject to condensation. Avoid installing the
inverter where excessive humidity and condensation may occur.
Installation and cooling
CAUTION
The inverters MUST NOT be mounted horizontally.
The inverters can be mounted without any clearance at either side.
Allow 100 mm clearance above and below the inverter. Make sure that the cooling
vents in the inverter are positioned correctly to allow free movement of air.
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 25
2.3 Mechanical installation
WARNING
♦ To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and
commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid
down in these operating instructions.
♦ Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety
regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN
50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools
and personal protective gear.
♦ The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even
if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after
switching off before carrying out any installation work.
♦ The inverters can be mounted adjacent to each other. If they are mounted on
top of each other, however, a clearance of 100 mm has to be observed.
♦ IP20 protection is only against direct contact, always use these products
within a protective cabinet.
4
160 mm
6.30"
55 mm
2.2"
Ø 4.5 mm
0.17"
Ø 4.8 mm
0.19"
174 mm
6.85"
138 mm
5.43"
Ø 5.5 mm
0.22"
204 mm
8.03"
174 mm
6.85"
Frame Size A Frame Size B Frame Size C
Fig. 2-4 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420
Table 2-1 Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 420
Frame-Size Overall Dimensions Fixing Method Tightening Torque
mm 73 x 173 x 149
A
Width x
Height x
Depth inch 2.87 x 6.81 x 5.87
2 x M4 Bolts
2 x M4 Nuts
2 x M4 Washers for mounting on
standard rail
2.5 Nm
with washers fitted
mm 149 x 202 x 172
B
Width x
Height x
Depth inch 5.87 x 7.95 x 6.77
4 x M4 Bolts
4 x M4 Nuts
4 x M4 Washers
2.5 Nm
with washers fitted
mm 185 x 245 x 195
C
Width x
Height x
Depth inch 7.28 x 9.65 x 7.68
4 x M5 Bolts
4 x M5 Nuts
4 x M5 Washers
2.5 Nm
with washers fitted
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
26 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Upper
rail latch
Lower
rail latch
Release Mechanism
2.3.1 Mounting on standard rail, Frame Size A
Fitting the Inverter to a 35 mm standard rail (EN 50022)
1. Fit the inverter to the rail using the upper rail
latch.
2. Push the
inverter
against the
rail and the
lower rail
latch should
click into
place.
Removing the Inverter from the rail
1. To disengaged the release mechanism of the inverter, insert a screwdriver into
the release mechanism.
2. Apply a downward pressure and the lower rail latch will disengage.
3. Pull the inverter from the rail.
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 27
2.4 Electrical installation
WARNING
The inverter must always be grounded.
♦ To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and
commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid
down in these operating instructions.
♦ Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety
regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN
50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools
and personal protective gear.
♦ Never use high voltage insulation test equipment on cables connected to the
inverter.
♦ The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even
if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge
after switching off before carrying out any installation work.
CAUTION
The control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately. Do not feed
them through the same cable conduit/trunking.
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
28 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
2.4.1 General
WARNING
The inverter must always be grounded. If the inverter is not grounded correctly,
extremely dangerous conditions may arise within the inverter, which could prove
potentially fatal.
Operation with ungrounded (IT) supplies
Filtered
It is not permissible to connect MICROMASTER 4 drive converters equipped with
integrated filter to non-grounded line supplies.
Unfiltered
If connected to non-grounded line supplies, the 'Y' capacitor must be disabled in
the device. The procedure is described in Attachment B.2.
If the MICROMASTER is to remain in operation in non-grounded networks when a
ground fault occurs during the input or output phase, an output reactor must be
installed.
Operation with Residual Current Device
If an RCD (also referred to as ELCB or RCCB) is fitted, the MICROMASTER
inverters will operate without nuisance tripping, provided that:
A type B RCD is used.
The trip limit of the RCD is 300mA.
The neutral of the supply is grounded.
Only one inverter is supplied from each RCD.
The output cables are less than 50m (screened) or 100m (unscreened).
NOTE
The residual current operated circuit-breakers used must provide protection against
direct-current components in the fault current and must be suitable for briefly
suppressing power pulse current peaks. It is recommended to protect the
frequency inverter by fuse separately.
The regulations of the individual country (e.g. VDE regulations in Germany)
and the regional power suppliers must be observed!
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 29
2.4.2 Power and motor connections
WARNING
The inverter must always be grounded.
♦ Isolate the mains electrical supply before making or changing connections to
the unit.
♦ Ensure that the motor is configured for the correct supply voltage: single /
three-phase 230 V MICROMASTERS must not be connected to a 400 V
three-phase supply.
♦ When synchronous motors are connected or when coupling several motors in
parallel, the inverter must be operated with voltage/frequency control
characteristic (P1300 = 0, 2 or 3).
CAUTION
After connecting the power and motor cables to the proper terminals, make sure
that the covers have been replaced properly before supplying power to the unit!
NOTICE
♦ Ensure that the appropriate circuit-breakers/fuses with the specified current
rating are connected between the power supply and inverter (see chapter 5,
Tables starting on page 186).
♦ Use Class 1 60/75o
C copper wire only (for UL compliance). For tightening
torque see Table 5-2, page 185.
Operation with long cables
All inverters will operate at full specification with cable lengths up to 50 m screened
or 100 m unscreened.
When using output reactors as shown in Catalog DA 51.2, the following cable
lengths are possible:
Supply Voltage 200 V … 240 V ± 10 % 380 V … 400 V ± 10 % 401 V … 480 V ± 10 %
Frame Sizes A … C A … B C A … C
Shielded 200 m 150 m 200 m 100 m
Non-shielded 300 m 225 m 300 m 150 m
CAUTION
When using output reactors and LC filters, operation up to a pulse frequency of 4
kHz only is permitted. Please ensure that the automatic pulse frequency reductions
are also deactivated. Mandatory parameter settings when using an output reactor:
P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1.
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
30 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Access to the power and motor terminals
You can gain access to the mains and motor terminals by removing the covers
(see also Appendices A and B).
The mains and motor connections must be made as shown in Fig. 2-6.
L2/N
L3
L1/L
U V W
Fig. 2-5 MICROMASTER 420 connection terminals
L2
L1
N
Fuse
Contactor
Optional
Filter
PE
Optional
line choke MICROMASTER 1)
PE
L/L1
N/L2
U
V
W
Motor
L3 Single Phase
PE
L3
L2
L1
Fuse
Contactor
Optional
Filter
PE
Optional
line choke MICROMASTER 1)
PE
L3
L2
L1
U
V
W
Motor
Three Phase
PE
1) with and without filter
Fig. 2-6 Motor and Power Connections
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 31
2.4.3 Control terminals
Permitted cable diameters: 0.08 … 2.5 mm2
(AWG: 28 … 12)
Terminal Designation Function
1 - Output +10 V
2 - Output 0 V
3 ADC+ Analog input 1 (+)
4 ADC- Analog input 1 (-)
5 DIN1 Digital input 1
6 DIN2 Digital input 2
7 DIN3 Digital input 3
8 - Isolated output +24 V / max. 100 mA
9 - Isolated output 0 V / max. 100 mA
10 RL1-B Digital output / NO contact
11 RL1-C Digital output / Changeover contact
12 DAC+ Analog output (+)
13 DAC- Analog output (-)
14 P+ RS485 port
15 P- RS485 port
Fig. 2-7 Control terminals of MICROMASTER 420
A detailed description of the inputs and outputs is provided in Section 3.6.
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
32 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
2.4.4 Avoiding Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI)
The inverters are designed to operate in an industrial environment where a high
level of EMI can be expected. Usually, good installation practices will ensure safe
and trouble-free operation. If you encounter problems, follow the guidelines stated
below.
Action to Take
Ensure that all equipment in the cubicle is well grounded using short, thick
grounding cable connected to a common star point or busbar
Make sure that any control equipment (such as a PLC) connected to the
inverter is connected to the same ground or star point as the inverter via a
short thick link.
Connect the return ground from the motors controlled by the inverters directly
to the ground connection (PE) on the associated inverter
Flat conductors are preferred as they have lower impedance at higher
frequencies
Terminate the ends of the cable neatly, ensuring that unscreened wires are as
short as possible
Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible,
using separate trunking, if necessary at 90º to each other.
Whenever possible, use screened leads for the connections to the control
circuitry
Ensure that the contactors in the cubicle are suppressed, either with R-C
suppressors for AC contactors or 'flywheel' diodes for DC contactors fitted to
the coils. Varistor suppressors are also effective. This is important when the
contactors are controlled from the inverter relay
Use screened or armored cables for the motor connections and ground the
screen at both ends using the cable clamps
WARNING
Safety regulations must not be compromised when installing inverters!
Issue 10/06 2 Installation
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 33
2.4.5 Screening Methods
Gland Plate
The Gland Plate Kit is supplied as an option. It allows easy and efficient connection
of the necessary screening. See the Gland Plate Installation Instructions contained
on the Docu-CD.
Screening without a Gland Plate
Should a Gland Plate not be available, then the inverter can be screened using the
methodology shown in Fig. 2-8.
1 Mains power input
2 Control cable
3 Motor cable
4 Footprint filter
5 Metal back plate
6 Use suitable clips to fix motor and control cable screens securely to metal back plate
7 Screening cables
Fig. 2-8 Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI
2 Installation Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
34 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 35
3 Functions
This Section includes the following:
Explanation of the MICROMASTER 420 parameters
An overview of the parameter structure of MICROMASTER 420
A description of the display and operator control elements and communications
A block diagram of MICROMASTER 420
An overview of the various ways of commissioning the MICROMASTER 420
A description of the inputs and outputs
Possibilities of controlling the MICROMASTER 420
A description of the various functions of the MICROMASTER 420 and their
implementation
Explanation and information on the protective functions
3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 38
3.1.1 Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes ..................................... 38
3.1.2 Interconnecting signals (BICO technology) ............................................................ 44
3.1.2.1 Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source P1000....... 44
3.1.2.2 Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719 .................................................. 46
3.1.2.3 BICO technology..................................................................................................... 47
3.1.3 Reference quantities............................................................................................... 50
3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 52
3.2.1 Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel) ..................................................... 52
3.2.2 Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) .............................................. 53
3.2.3 Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP) ................................ 54
3.2.4 Changing parameters using the operator panel ..................................................... 55
3.3 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 56
3.4 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 57
3.5 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 59
3.5.1 50/60 Hz setting...................................................................................................... 61
3.5.2 Quick commissioning.............................................................................................. 62
3.5.3 Calculating the motor / control data........................................................................ 69
3.5.4 Motor data identification (stator resistance)............................................................ 70
3.5.5 Commissioning the application............................................................................... 72
3.5.5.1 Serial Interface (USS)............................................................................................. 72
3.5.5.2 Selection of command source ................................................................................ 73
3.5.5.3 Digital input (DIN).................................................................................................... 73
3.5.5.4 Digital output (DOUT) ............................................................................................. 74
3.5.5.5 Selection of frequency setpoint............................................................................... 74
3.5.5.6 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 75
3.5.5.7 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 76
3.5.5.8 Motor potentiometer (MOP).................................................................................... 77
3.5.5.9 Fixed frequency (FF)............................................................................................... 78
3.5.5.10 JOG......................................................................................................................... 78
3.5.5.11 Ramp-function generator (HLG) ............................................................................. 79
3.5.5.12 Reference/limit frequencies .................................................................................... 80
3.5.5.13 Motor control........................................................................................................... 80
3.5.5.14 Inverter/motor protection......................................................................................... 82
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
36 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.15 Inverter-specific Functions...................................................................................... 83
3.5.6 Series commissioning............................................................................................. 86
3.5.7 Parameter reset to the factory setting..................................................................... 88
3.6 Inputs / outputs ....................................................................................................... 89
3.6.1 Digital inputs (DIN).................................................................................................. 89
3.6.2 Digital output (DOUT) ............................................................................................. 92
3.6.3 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 94
3.6.4 Analog output (DAC)............................................................................................... 96
3.7 Communication....................................................................................................... 98
3.7.1 Universal serial interface (USS)............................................................................ 100
3.7.1.1 Protocol specification and bus structure............................................................... 102
3.7.1.2 The structure of net data....................................................................................... 109
3.7.1.3 USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485)...................................................... 118
3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 121
3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 124
3.10 JOG....................................................................................................................... 126
3.11 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 128
3.11.1 PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) ............................................................. 130
3.11.2 PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF)................................................................................... 131
3.12 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 132
3.12.1 Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM)............................. 132
3.12.2 Ramp-function generator (RFG)........................................................................... 134
3.12.3 OFF/braking functions .......................................................................................... 137
3.12.4 Manual / automatic operation ............................................................................... 139
3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 141
3.14.1 DC braking............................................................................................................ 147
3.14.2 Compound braking................................................................................................ 150
3.15 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 152
3.16 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 154
3.17.1 Vdc_max controller ............................................................................................... 156
3.18 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 158
3.18.1 General monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 158
3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses ............................................. 160
3.19.1 Thermal motor model............................................................................................ 160
3.19.2 PTC temperature sensor ...................................................................................... 162
3.20 Power module protection...................................................................................... 164
3.20.1 General overload monitoring ................................................................................ 164
3.20.2 Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses........................................ 165
3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 168
3.21.1 V/f control.............................................................................................................. 168
3.21.1.1 Voltage boost........................................................................................................ 170
3.21.1.2 V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC)............................................ 172
3.21.1.3 Slip compensation................................................................................................. 172
3.21.1.4 V/f resonance damping......................................................................................... 174
3.21.1.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)........................................................................... 175
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 37
WARNING
MICROMASTER drive inverters operate with high voltages.
When electrical equipment is operated, then specific parts of this equipment are
at hazardous voltage levels.
Emergency switching-off devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE
0113) must remain functional in all operating modes of the control device. When
the Emergency switching-off device is reset, then it is not permissible that the
equipment runs-up again in an uncontrolled or undefined way.
In cases and situations where short-circuits in the control device can result in
significant material damage or even severe bodily injury (i.e. potentially
hazardous short-circuits), then additional external measures or
devices/equipment must be provided in order to ensure or force operation
without any potential hazards, even if a short-circuit occurs (e.g. independent
limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.).
Certain parameter settings can mean that the drive inverter automatically
restarts after the power supply voltage fails and then returns.
The motor parameters must be precisely configured in order to ensure perfect
motor overload protection.
The drive inverter provides internal motor overload protection according to
UL508C, Section 42. Also refer to P0610, P0611 and P0335 - I2
t is enabled in
the default setting.
This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more
than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V /
460 V when protected by an H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self-
protected combination motor controller (for more details see Appendix F).
The drive unit may not be used as 'Emergency switching-off device' (refer to EN
60204, 9.2.5.4).
CAUTION
Only qualified personnel may commission (start-up) the equipment. Safety
measures and warnings must be always extremely carefully observed and fulfilled.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
38 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.1 Parameters
3.1.1 Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes
The drive inverter is adapted to the particular application using the appropriate
parameters. This means that each parameter is identified by a parameter number,
parameter text and specific attributes (e.g. readable, can be written into, BICO
attribute, group attribute etc.). Within any one particular drive system, the
parameter number is unique. On the other hand, an attribute can be assigned a
multiple number of times so that several parameters can have the same attribute.
For MICROMASTER, parameters can be accessed using the following operator
units:
BOP (option)
AOP (option)
PC-based commissioning (start-up) tool "Drive Monitor" or "STARTER". These
PC-based tools are supplied on the CD-ROM.
The parameter types are the main differentiating feature of the parameters.
Parameter
"normal"
Write-/Read parameters
Read (r....) Write/Read (P....)
BICO output BICO input"normal"
Read parameters
Fig. 3-1 Parameter types
Setting parameters
Parameters which can be written into and read – "P" parameters
These parameters are activated/de-activated in the individual functions and directly
influence the behavior of a function. The value of this parameter is saved in a non-
volatile memory (EEPROM) as long as the appropriate option was selected (non-
volatile data save). Otherwise, these values are saved in the non-volatile memory
(RAM) of the processor, which are lost after power failure or power-off/power-on
operations.
Notation:
P0927 setting parameter 927
P0748.1 setting parameter 748, bit 01
P0719[1] setting parameter 719 index 1
P0013[0...19] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
Abbreviated notation
P0013[20] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 39
Monitoring parameters
These can only be read – "r" parameters
These parameters are used to display internal quantities, for example states and
actual values. These parameters are indispensable, especially for diagnostics.
Notation:
r0002 monitoring parameter 2
r0052.3 monitoring parameter 52, bit 03
r0947[2] monitoring parameter 947 index 2
r0964[0...4] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4)
Abbreviated notation
r0964[5] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4)
NOTE
A parameter (e.g. P0013[20]) with x consecutive
elements (in this case: 20) is defined using an index. x is
defined by the numerical index value. When transferred to
a parameter this means that an indexed parameter can
assume several values. The values are addressed via the
parameter number including the index value (e.g.
P0013[0], P0013[1], P0013[2], P0013[3], P0013[4], ...).
Index parameters, for example, are used for:
Table functions
Sub-functions
In addition to the parameter number and parameter text, every setting and
monitoring parameter has different attributes which are used to individually define
the properties/characteristics of the parameter. The attributes are listed in the
following Table (refer to Table 3-1) which are used for MICROMASTER.
P0013[0]
P0013[1]
P0013[2]
P0013[18]
P0013[19]
...
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
40 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-1 Parameter attributes
Attribute
group
Attribute Description
The data type of a parameter defines the maximum possible value range. 3 data
types are used for MICROMASTER. They either represent an unsigned integer value
(U16, U32) or a floating-point value (float). The value range is frequently restricted by
a minimum, maximum value (min, max) or using drive inverter/motor quantities.
U16 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 16 bits,
max. value range: 0 .... 65535
U32 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 32 bits
max. value range: 0 .... 4294967295
Data types
Float A simple precise floating point value according to the IEEE standard format
max. value range: -3.39e
+38
– +3.39e
+38
The value range, which is specified as a result of the data type, is restricted/limited by
the minimum, maximum value (min, max) and using drive inverter/motor quantities.
Straightforward commissioning (start-up) is guaranteed in so much that the
parameters have a default value. These values (min, def, max) are permanently
saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user.
- No value entered (e.g.: "r parameter")
Min Minimum value
Def Default value
Value range
Max Maximum value
For MICROMASTER, the units of a particular parameter involve the physical quantity
(e.g. m, s, A). Quantities are measurable properties/characteristics of physical
objects, operations, states and are represented using characters of a formula (e.g. V
= 9 V).
- No dimension
% Percentage
A Ampere
V Volt
Ohm Ohm
us Microseconds
ms Milliseconds
s Seconds
Hz Hertz
kHz Kilohertz
1/min Revolutions per minute [RPM]
m/s Meters per second
Nm Newton meter
W Watt
kW Kilowatt
Hp Horse power
kWh Kilowatt hours
°C Degrees Celsius
m Meter
kg Kilograms
Unit
° Degrees (angular degrees)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 41
Attribute
group
Attribute Description
The access level is controlled using parameter P0003. In this case, only those
parameters are visible at the BOP or AOP, where the access level is less than or
equal to the value assigned in parameter P0003. On the other hand, for DriveMonitor
and STARTER, only access levels 0 and 4 are relevant. For example, parameters
with access level 4 cannot be changed if the appropriate access level has not been
set.
The following access levels are implemented in the family of MICROMASTER drive
units:
0 User-defined parameter list (refer to P0013)
1 Standard access to the most frequently used parameters
2 Extended access, e.g. to drive inverter I/O functions
3 Expert access only for experienced users
Access level
As far as the ability to visualize the parameters is concerned, the group assignment of
the individual parameters must be taken into account. Parameter P0004 is used for
the control (refer to the Grouping).
The parameters are sub-divided into groups according to their functionality. This
increases the transparency and allows a parameter to be quickly searched for.
Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be used to control the ability to be visualized for
the BOP / AOP.
Main parameter area:
ALWAYS 0 all parameters
INVERTER 2 drive inverter parameters 0200 .... 0299
TECH_APL 5 technical applications / units 0500 .... 0599
COMMANDS 7 control commands, digital I/O 0700 .... 0749 and
0800 .... 0899
TERMINAL 8 Analog inputs/outputs 0750 .... 0799
SETPOINT 10 Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 1000 .... 1199
FUNC 12 Drive inverter functions 1200 .... 1299
CONTROL 13 Motor open-loop/closed-loop control 1300 .... 1799
COMM 20 Communications 2000 .... 2099
ALARMS 21 Faults, warnings, monitoring functions" 2100 .... 2199
Grouping
TECH 22 Technological controller (PID controller) 2200 .... 2399
Description for Binector Input (BI), Binector Output (BO), Connector Input (CI),
Connector Output (CO) and Connector Output / Binector Output (CO/BO), refer to
Section 3.1.2.3
BI Binector Input
BO Binector Output
CI Connector Input
CO Connector Output
BICO
CO/BO Connector Output / Binector Output
"P" parameters can only be changed depending on the drive state. The parameter
value is not accepted if the instantaneous state is not listed in the parameter attribute
"Change state". For instance, the commissioning (start-up) parameter P0010 with the
attribute "CT" can only be changed in quick start-up "C" or ready "T" but not in run
"U".
C Quick commissioning (start-up)
U Operation (run)
Change state
T Ready
This parameter attribute identifies as to whether the parameter is included in the quick
commissioning (start-up) (P0010 = 1).
No The parameter is not included in the quick commissioning (start-up)
QC.
Yes The parameter is included in the quick commissioning (start-up)
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
42 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Attribute
group
Attribute Description
This attribute is only of importance in conjunction with a BOP. The "Immediate"
attribute indicates that this value is already accepted when scrolling (when changing
the value with or ). Especially parameters which are used for optimization
functions have this property (e.g. constant voltage boost P1310 or filter time
constants). On the other hand, for parameters with the attribute "After actuation", the
value is only accepted after first actuating the key . These include, for example,
parameters where the parameter value can have different settings/meanings (e.g.
selecting the frequency setpoint source P1000).
Immediately The value becomes valid by either scrolling with or
Active
After
actuation
The value is only accepted by pressing
The attributes and groups are shown, in the parameter list, in the header line of the
parameter. This is shown as an example in Fig. 3-2 using parameter P0305.
Rated motor current 0.01
C Float A 3.25
10000.00
1
P0305[3]
CStat:
P-Group:
Datatype:
Active:
Unit Def:
Max:
Min:
Group Wertebereich
BICO (if exist)
Access level
Index
MOTOR first confirm
Level:
QuickComm. Yes
CStat
Active
Datatype
QuickComm.
Unit
Parameter number
Parameter text
Fig. 3-2 Header line for parameter P0305
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 43
The interrelationship between access level P0003 and the grouping P0004 is
schematically shown in Fig. 3-3.
P0004 = 2
P0004 = 3
P0004 = 7
P0004 = 8P0004 = 10
P0004 = 12
P0004 = 13
P0004 = 20
P0004 = 21
P0004 = 22
P0004 = 0
P0004 = 2
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 1
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 2
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 4
P0004 = 2, P0003 = 3(no filter function)
allows direct access
to the parameters.
For BOP and AOP
depending on the
selected access level
Parameters level 1
concerning the inverter unit
Parameters level 1, 2 and 3
concerning the inverter unit
Inverter Unit
Parameters level 1 and 2
concerning the inverter unit
Parameters level 1, 2, 3 and 4
concerning the inverter unit
Inverter Unit
Motor Data
PID Controller
Alarms, Warnings &
Monitoring
Motor Control
P1300 ... P1799
Drive Features
P1200 ... P1299
Setpoint Channel &
Ramp Generator
P1000 ... P1199
Commands and
Digital I/O
P0700 ... P0749
P0800 ... P0899
Communication
P2000 ... P2099
Analogue I/O
P0750 ... P0799
P0200 ... P0299
P0300 ... P0399
P0600 ... P0699
P0003 = 1
P0003 = 2
P0003 = 3
P0003 = 4
P0003 = 1
2
3
4
Standard
Extended
Expert
Service
User access level
Fig. 3-3 Parameter grouping / access
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
44 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.1.2 Interconnecting signals (BICO technology)
A state-of-the-art drive unit must be able to interconnect internal and external
signals (setpoint / actual values and control / status signal). This interconnection
functionality must have a high degree of flexibility in order to be able to adapt the
drive to new applications. Further, a high degree of usability is required, which also
fulfills standard applications. This is the reason that within the MICROMASTER
series of drive units, BICO technology (→ flexibility) and fast parameterization
using parameters P0700 / P1000 (→ usability) or P0719 (→ combination
P0700/P1000) have been introduced to be able to fulfill both of these requirements.
3.1.2.1 Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source
P1000
The following parameters can be used to quickly interconnect setpoints and control
signals:
P0700 "Selection of command source"
P1000 "Selection of setpoint source"
These parameters are used to define via which interface the drive inverter receives
the setpoint or the power-on/power-off command. The interfaces, listed in Table
3-2 can be selected for the command source P0700.
Table 3-2 Parameter P0700
Parameter values Significance / command source
0 Factory default
1 BOP (operator panel, refer to Section 3.2.1)
2 Terminal strip
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
The following internal or external sources / interfaces can be selected for the
frequency setpoint source P1000. In addition to the main setpoint (1st
position), a
supplementary setpoint (2nd
position) can be selected (refer to Table 3-3).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 45
Table 3-3 Parameter P1000
Significance
Parameter values
Main setpoint source Supplementary setpoint source
0 No main setpoint -
1
MOP setpoint (motorized
potentiometer)
-
2 Analog setpoint -
3 Fixed frequency -
4 USS on BOP link -
5 USS on COM link -
6 CB on COM link -
10 No main setpoint MOP setpoint
11 MOP setpoint MOP setpoint
12 Analog setpoint MOP setpoint
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
66 CB on COM link CB on COM link
NOTE
Communications between the AOP and MICROMASTER are established using
the USS protocol. The AOP can be connected to both the BOP link (RS 232) as
well as at the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter. If the AOP is to
be used as command source or setpoint source then for parameter P0700 or
P1000, either "USS on BOP link" or "USS on COM link" should be selected.
The complete list of all of the setting possibilities can be taken from the
parameter list (refer to parameter list P1000).
Parameters P0700 and P1000 have the following default settings:
a) P0700 = 2 (terminal strip)
b) P1000 = 2 (analog setpoint)
In this case, the selection of the command source is made independently of the
selection of the frequency setpoint source. This means that the source to enter the
setpoint does not have to match the source to enter the power-on/power-off
command (command source). This means, for example, that the setpoint (P1000 =
4) can be connected via an external device which is connected to the BOP link
interface via USS and the control ON/OFF command, etc. is entered via digital
inputs (terminals, P0700 = 2).
CAUTION
When modifying P0700 or P1000, then the drive inverter also changes the
subordinate BICO parameters (refer to the parameter list for P0700 or P1000
and the appropriate tables)
No priority has assigned between the direct BICO parameterization and
P0700/P1000. The last modification is valid.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
46 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.1.2.2 Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719
Parameter P0719 represents a combination of the functionalities of the two
parameters P0700 and P1000. Here, it is possible to changeover the command
source as well as also the frequency setpoint source via a parameter change.
Contrary to P0700 and P1000, for parameter P0719, the subordinate (lower-level)
BICO parameters are not changed. This characteristic/feature is especially used by
PC tools in order to briefly retrieve the control authority for the drive without having
to change the existing BICO parameterization. Parameter P0719 "Selection of
command/frequency setpoint" comprises the command source (Cmd) and the
frequency setpoint (setpoint).
Table 3-4 Parameter P0719
Significance
Parameter values
Command source Setpoint source (frequency source)
0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS BOP link
5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS COM link
6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB COM link
10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
.. .. ..
.. .. ..
64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
NOTE
The complete list of all of the possible settings can be taken from the parameter
list (refer to the parameter list, P0719).
Contrary to parameter P0700 and P1000, subordinate BICO parameters are not
changed for parameter P0719. This characteristic/feature can be used during
service if the control authority must be briefly and quickly re-assigned (e.g.
selecting and executing the motor data identification routine using a PC-based
tool).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 47
3.1.2.3 BICO technology
Using BICO technology (English: Binector Connector Technology), process data
can be freely interconnected using the "standard" drive parameterization. In this
case, all values which can be freely interconnected (e.g. frequency setpoint,
frequency actual value, current actual value, etc.) can be defined as "Connectors"
and all digital signals which can be freely interconnected (e.g. status of a digital
input, ON/OFF, message function when a limit is violated etc.) can be defined as
"Binectors".
There are many input and output quantities as well as quantities within the control
which can be interconnected in a drive unit. It is possible to adapt the drive to the
various requirements using BICO technology.
A binector is a digital (binary) signal without any units and which can either have
the value 0 or 1. Binectors always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided
into binector inputs and binector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-4). In this case, the
binector input is always designated using a "P" parameter plus attribute "BI" (e.g.:
P1035 BI: Enable MOP (UP-command)), while the binector output is always
represented using an "r" parameter plus attribute "BO" (e.g.: r2032 BO: CtrlWrd1
from BOP link (USS)).
As can be seen from the examples above, the binector parameters have the
following abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
BI Binector Input, signal receiver ("P" parameters)
→ The BI parameter can be interconnected with a binector output as source, by
entering the parameter number of the binector output (BO parameter) as
value in the BI parameter.
BO Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters)
→ The BO parameter can be used as source for BI parameters. For the
particular interconnection the BO parameter number must be entered into
the BI parameter.
Example:
Wiring BO parameter r2032 to BI parameter P1035
→ P1035 = 2032.
If the BO parameter contains several bits, the bit number must be entered in the
BI parameter in addition to the parameter number when wiring a single digital
signal (here for example: P1035 = 2032.13).
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function
BI Binector input
(signal receiver)
Data flow
Pxxxx
BI: ...
Function
BO Binector output
(signal source)
Data flow
Function
rxxxx
BO: ...
Fig. 3-4 Binectors
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
48 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
A connector is a value (16 or 32 bit), which can include a normalized quantity
(without dimension) as well as also a quantity with associated units. Connectors
always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided into connector inputs and
connector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-5). Essentially the same as the binectors, the
connector inputs are characterized by a "P" parameter plus attribute "CI" (e.g.:
P0771 CI: DAC); while the connector outputs are always represented using an "r"
parameter plus attribute "CO" (e.g.: r0021 CO: Smoothed output frequency).
As can be seen from the examples above, connector parameters have the
following abbreviations in front of the parameter names:
CI Connector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters)
→ The CI parameter can be interconnected with a connector output as source,
by entering the parameter number of the connector output (CO parameter)
as value in the CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21).
CO Connector Output, signal source ("r" parameters)
→ The CO parameter can be used as source for CI parameters. For the
particular interconnection, the CO parameter number must be entered in the
CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21).
Further, MICROMASTER has "r" parameters where several binector outputs are
combined in a word (e.g.: r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1). This feature reduces, on
one hand, the number of parameters and simplifies parameterization via the serial
interface (data transfer). This parameter is further characterized by the fact that it
does not have any units and each bit represents a digital (binary) signal.
As can be seen from the examples of parameters, these combined parameters
have the following abbreviation in front of the parameter names:
CO/BO Connector Output / Binector Output, signal source ("r"
parameters)
→ CO/BO parameters can be used as source for CI parameters and BI
parameters:
a) In order to interconnect all of the CO/BO parameters, the parameter
number must be entered into the appropriate CI parameter (e.g.:
P2016[0] = 52).
b) When interconnecting a single digital signal, in addition to the CO/BO
parameter number, the bit number must also be entered into the BI
parameter (e.g.: P0731 = 52.3)
Abbreviation and symbol Name Function
CI Connector input
(signal receiver)
Data flow
Pxxxx
CI: ...
Function
CO Connector output
(signal source)
Data flow
Function
rxxxx
CO: ...
CO
BO
Binector/connector
output
(signal source)
Data flow
Functions
rxxxx
CO/BO: ...
Fig. 3-5 Connectors
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 49
In order to interconnect two signals, a BICO setting parameter (signal receiver)
must be assigned the required BICO monitoring parameter (signal source). A
typical BICO interconnection is shown using the following examples (refer to Fig.
3-6).
Connector output (CO) ===> Connector input (CI)
CO/BO: Act. status word 1
FB
r0755
P1070 = 755
(755)
P1070
FB
P0840 = 2032.0
r2032
FB
(2032.0)
P0840
P0731 = 52.3
P2051 = 52
FB
(52:3)
P0731
FBP2051
(52)
r0052
r0052
Binector output (BO) ===> Binector input (BI)
Connector output / Binector output (CO/BO)
BO: CtrlWrd1 from BOP link (USS)
CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h]
CI: Main setpoint
BI: ON/OFF1
CI: PZD to CB
BI: Function of digital output 1
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Function
Fig. 3-6 BICO connections (examples)
NOTE
BICO parameters with the CO, BO or CO/BO attributes can be used a multiple
number of times.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
50 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.1.3 Reference quantities
Parameter range: P2000 - P2002
When being output or read-in by the drive inverter, physical quantities are
normalized or de-normalized. This conversion is made directly by the particular
interface using the reference quantities. The normalization / de-normalization is
carried-out for the following interfaces:
Table 3-5 Normalized interfaces
Interface 100 %
Analog input (voltage input) 10 V
Analog output (current output) 20 mA
USS 4000 h
CB 4000 h
Further, a normalization is carried-out for a BICO connection if the connector
output (CO) represents a physical quantity and the connector input (CI) a
normalized (percentage) quantity (e.g. PID controller). A de-normalization is
carried-out if the inverse applies.
Reference quantities (normalization quantities) are intended to allow setpoints and
actual signals to be represented in a uniform, standard way (normalization / de-
normalization of physical quantities such as setpoint and actual frequency). This
also applies to permanently set parameters that are assigned the "percentage"
units. A value of 100 % corresponds in this case to a process data value PZD of
4000 h (USS or CB) or a current value of 20 mA (analog output) or a voltage value
of 10 V (analog input). The following reference parameters and permanently saved
reference values are available:
Table 3-6 Normalization functions
Parameter Designation Value (100 % / 4000
h)
Units
P2000 Reference frequency P2000 Hz
P2001 Reference voltage P2001 V
P2002 Reference current P2002 A
- Reference speed P2000 * 60 / r0313 RPM
- Reference temperature 100 °C °C
- Reference energy 100 kWh kWh
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 51
Example
The normalization / de-normalization via the "USS to BOP link" serial interface is
shown using the reference frequency P2000.
If the connection between two BICO parameters is closed (directly using BICO
parameters or indirectly using P0719 or P1000), that have a different
representation/notation (normalized representation (hex) or physical representation
(Hz)), then the following normalization is made in the drive inverter to the target
value:
P1070
y[Hz]
2000P
4000[Hex]
r2015[1]
y[Hz] ⋅=
r2015
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
P2016
[0]
[1]
[2]
[3]
r0021
x[Hz] y[Hex]
x[Hex]
]Hex[4000
P2000[Hz]
r0021[Hz]
y[Hex] ⋅=
USS-PZD
BOP-Link
USS-PZD
BOP-Link
Fig. 3-7 Normalization / de-normalization
Note
Analog values are limited to 10 V or 20 mA. A maximum of 100 % can be output
/ read-in referred to the appropriate reference values as long as no DAC/ADC
scaling (factory setting) was made.
Setpoints and actual value signals via the serial interface:
♦ When transferring this data via the PZD part, it is limited to the value 7FFF h.
This is the reason that the max. value 200 % is referred to the reference
value.
♦ When transferring this data via the PKW part, it is transferred as a function of
the data type and units.
Parameter P1082 (max. frequency) limits, in the drive inverter, the frequency
independently of the reference frequency. This is the reason that when P1082 is
changed (factory setting: 50 Hz), then the P2000 (factory setting: 50 Hz) should
always be adapted. For instance, if for a NEMA motor the parameter is set to 60
Hz and P2000 is not changed, then the analog setpoint / actual value at 100 %
or a setpoint/actual value signal at 4000 h is limited to 50 Hz!
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
52 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER
MICROMASTER drive units can be optionally equipped with a BOP (Basic
Operator Panel) or AOP (Advanced Operator Panel). The AOP distinguishes itself
as a result of a plain text display which simplifies operator control, diagnostics as
well as also commissioning (start-up).
BOP AOP
Fig. 3-8 Operator panels
3.2.1 Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel)
The BOP, available as option, allows drive inverter parameters to be accessed. In
this case, the Status Display Panel (SDP) must be removed and the BOP either
inserted or connected in the door of a cabinet using a special mounting kit
(operator panel - door mounting kit) (refer to the Attachment A).
Parameter values can be changed using the BOP. This allows the
MICROMASTER drive unit to be set-up for a particular application. In addition to
the keys (refer to Section 3.2.3), it includes a 5-digit LCD display on which the
parameter numbers rxxxx and Pxxxx, parameter values, parameter units (e.g. [A],
[V], [Hz], [s]), alarm Axxxx or fault messages Fxxxx as well as setpoints and actual
values.
NOTE
Contrary to the AOP, for the BOP, parameters do not have to be set or taken
into consideration when establishing the communications between the BOP and
drive inverter.
A BOP does not have a local memory. This means that it is not possible to save
a parameter set on the BOP.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 53
3.2.2 Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel)
An AOP (this is available as option) has the following additional functions with
respect to a BOP:
Multi-language and multi-line plain text display
Units are additionally displayed, such as [Nm], [°C], etc.
Active parameters, fault messages, etc. are explained
Diagnostics menu to support troubleshooting
The main menu is directly called by simultaneously pressing keys Fn and P
Timer with 3 switching operations per entry
Up to 10 parameter sets can be downloaded / saved
Communications between an AOP and MICROMASTER are realized using the
USS protocol. An AOP can be connected to the BOP link (RS 232) as well as to
the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter.
Multi-point capable coupling to control (open-loop) and visualize up to 31
MICROMASTER drive inverters. The USS bus must, in this case, be configured
and parameterized via the drive inverter terminals of the COM link interface.
Please refer to Sections 3.2.3, 3.2.4 and the AOP Manual for additional details.
NOTE
Contrary to the BOP, for the AOP, the communications parameters of the
particular interface must be taken into account.
When inserting / connecting to the drive inverter, the AOP automatically
changes the parameter P2012 (USS-PZD length) to 4 corresponding to the
interface.
COM link: P2012[0]
BOP link: P2012[1]
For DriveMonitor, the default value for the USS-PZD length is set to 2. This
results in a conflict if the AOP and the DriveMonitor are operated, alternating, at
the same interface.
Remedy: Increase the USS-PZD length to 4.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
54 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.2.3 Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP)
Operator
panel/key
Function Effects
Indicates
Status
The LCD displays the settings currently used by the converter.
Start
converter
Pressing the button starts the converter. This button is disabled by default.
Activate the button:
BOP: P0700 = 1 or P0719 = 10 ... 16
AOP: P0700 = 4 or P0719 = 40 ... 46 on BOP link
P0700 = 5 or P0719 = 50 ... 56 on COM link
Stop
converter
OFF1 Pressing the button causes the motor to come to a standstill at the
selected ramp down rate.
Activate the button: see button "Start converter"
OFF2 Pressing the button twice (or once long) causes the motor to coast to a
standstill.
BOP: This function is always enabled
(independent of P0700 or P0719).
Change
direction
Press this button to change the direction of rotation of the motor. Reverse is
indicated by a minus (-) sign or a flashing decimal point. Disabled by default.
Activate the button: see button "Start converter".
Jog motor
In the "Ready to power-on" state, when this key is pressed, the motor starts and
rotates with the pre-set jog frequency. The motor stops when the button is
released. Pressing this button when the motor is running has no effect.
Functions
This button can be used to view additional information.
It works by pressing and holding the button. It shows the following, starting from
any parameter during operation:
1. DC link voltage (indicated by d – units V).
2. output current. (A)
3. output frequency (Hz)
4. output voltage (indicated by o – units V).
5. The value selected in P0005 (If P0005 is set to show any of the above (1 - 4)
then this will not be shown again).
Additional presses will toggle around the above displays.
Jump Function
From any parameter (rxxxx or Pxxxx) a short press of the Fn button will
immediately jump to r0000, you can then change another parameter, if required.
Upon returning to r0000, pressing the Fn button will return you to your starting
point.
Acknowledgement
If alarm and fault messages are present, then these can be acknowledged by
pressing key Fn.
Access
parameters
Pressing this button allows access to the parameters.
Increase
value
Pressing this button increases the displayed value.
Decrease
value
Pressing this button decreases the displayed value.
+ AOP menu Calls the AOP menu prompting (this is only available for AOP).
Fig. 3-9 Operator panel keys
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 55
3.2.4 Changing parameters using the operator panel
The way that parameter P0719 can be changed will now be described; please use
this description as a basis when setting all of the other parameters using the BOP.
Changing P0004 – parameter filter function
Step Result on the display
1 Press in order to access the parameter
2 Press until P0004 is displayed
3 Press in order to reach the parameter value level
4 Press or in order to obtain the required value
5 Press to acknowledge the value and to save the value
6 The user can only see the command parameters.
Changing an indexed parameter P0719 – selecting the command/frequency
setpoint
Step Result on the display
1 Press in order to access the parameter
2 Press until P0719 is displayed
3 Press in order to reach the parameter value
4 Press in order to display the currently set value
5 Press or in order to obtain the required value
6 Press to acknowledge the value and to save the value
7 Press until r0000 is displayed
8
Press in order to return to the operating display
(the display which the customer has defined)
Fig. 3-10 Changing parameters using the BOP
NOTE
The BOP sometimes display when changing parameter values. This
means that the drive inverter is presently handling another higher-priority task.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
56 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.3 Block diagram
PE
1/3 AC 200 - 240 V
3 AC 380 - 480 V SI
PE L/L1, N/L2
L/L1, N/L2, L3
L1, L2, L3
=
3 ~
PE U,V,W
M
A/D
+10 V
0 V
0 - 20 mA
max. 500 Ω
CPU
RS485
D/A
~
=
ADC+
ADC-
DIN1
DIN2
DIN3
DAC+
DAC-
P+
N-
RL1-B
RL1-C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
10
11
≥ 4.7 kΩ
Output 0 V
max. 100 mA
(isolated)
30 V DC / 5 A (resistive)
250 V AC / 2 A (inductive) Relay
Output +24 V
max. 100 mA
(isolated)
DC-linkconnection
or
or
CB
Option
automatic
DC+
DC−
DIN4
2
3
4
9
24 V
-+
The analog input circuit can be
alternatively configured to
provide an additional digital
input (DIN4):
1 2
60 Hz
50 Hz
DIP switch
Not
used
BOP link
COM link
Jog0
I
P
Fn
Hz
150.00
BOP/AOP
RS232
DIN1
DIN2
DIN3
5
6
7
9
External 24 V
NPN
PNP
or
24 V
+
_
Fig. 3-11 MICROMASTER 420 – block diagram
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 57
3.4 Factory setting
The MICROMASTER drive unit is shipped from the
plant with a Status Display Panel (SDP, refer to Fig.
3-12). The SDP has two LEDs on the front panel
which display the operating state of the drive inverter
(refer to Section 4.1).
When MICROMASTER is shipped from the plant with
the SDP functioning, it can be operated without any
additional parameterization. In this case, the drive
inverter default settings (which depend on the drive
inverter type / size) match the following data of a 4-
pole motor:
Rated motor power P0307
Rated motor voltage P0304
Rated motor current P0305
Rated motor frequency P0310
(We recommend a Siemens standard motor.)
Further, the following conditions must be fulfilled:
Control (ON/OFF command) via digital inputs (refer to Table 3-7)
Setpoint input via analog input 1 P1000 = 2
Induction motor P0300 = 1
Self-cooled motor P0335 = 0
Motor overload factor P0640 = 150 %
Min. frequency P1080 = 0 Hz
Max. frequency P1082 = 50 Hz
Ramp-up time P1120 = 10 s
Ramp-down time P1121 = 10 s
Linear V/f characteristic P1300 = 0
Table 3-7 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs
Digital inputs Terminals Parameter Function Active
Command source - P0700 = 2 Terminal strip Yes
Digital input 1 5 P0701 = 1 ON / OFF1 Yes
Digital input 2 6 P0702 = 12 Reversing Yes
Digital input 3 7 P0703 = 9 Fault acknowledge Yes
Digital input 4 Via ADC P0704 = 0 Digital input disabled No
Fig. 3-12 Status Display
Panel (SDP)
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
58 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
If the various prerequisites are fulfilled and the appropriate conditions present, then
after the motor has been connected and the power connected, then the following is
possible with the factory setting:
The motor can be started and stopped (via DIN1 with external switch)
The direction of rotation can be reversed (via DIN2 with external switch)
Faults reset (via DIN3 with external switch)
A frequency setpoint can be entered (via ADC with external
potentiometer, default setting of
the ADC: unipolar voltage input)
The frequency actual value can be output (via DAC,
DAC output: current output)
The potentiometer and the external switches can be connected through the drive
inverter internal power supply, as shown in Fig. 3-13.
Digital Inputs
I/O
Ack
< 4.7 k Ω
Analog input
Pre-assignment of the digital inputs DIN1 to DIN3, refer to Table 3-7.
Fig. 3-13 Recommended wiring for the factory setting
If settings have to be made which go beyond the factory setting, then depending on
the complexity of the application, when commissioning the drive system, the
particular function description as well as the parameter list including function charts
must be carefully taken into consideration.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 59
3.5 Commissioning
A differentiation is made between the following scenarios when commissioning
MICROMASTER:
50/60-Hz changeover Quick commissioning
Motor data identification Calculating the motor / control data
Series commissioning Commissioning the application
Carry-out checklist
NEMA motor
60 Hz / Hp
Commissioning
Is there a
complete parameter list
of a commissioning
available?
End of commissioning
50/60 Hz setting
Section 3.5.1
Quick commissioning
Section 3.5.2
Motor weight
?
Series commissioning
Section 3.5.6
Stator resistance
known?
A0541
Application commissioning
Section 3.5.5
P0344 = ?
P0340 = 1
P0350 = ?
P0340 = 1
P1910 = 1
ON
yesno
yesno
yesno
yesno
Fig. 3-14 Procedure when commissioning
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
60 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
When commissioning, initially, a quick commissioning should be carried-out. The
actual application should only be commissioned if the drive inverter – motor
combination provides a satisfactory result.
If the drive is to be commissioned from a defined state, then the drive inverter can
be reset to the initial state when it left the plant. This is done as follows:
Reset parameters to the factory setting (refer to Section 3.5.7)
Check list
The following check list is intended to help you to simply commission
MICROMASTER and to guarantee a high degree of availability:
For all activities relating to ESDS measures
All of the screws must have been tightened to their specified torque.
All connectors / option modules have been correctly inserted and interlocked /
screwed into place.
The DC link pre-charging must have been completed.
All of the components are grounded at the locations provided and all of the
shields have been connected.
MICROMASTER has been designed for defined mechanical, climatic and
electrical ambient conditions. The limit values may neither be exceeded in
operation nor during transport. The following must always be carefully
observed:
♦ Line supply conditions
♦ Level of pollutants and contaminants
♦ Gases and vapors that can have a negative impact on the function of the
drive inverter
♦ Climatic ambient conditions
♦ Storage / transport
♦ Shock stressing
♦ Vibration stressing
♦ Ambient temperature
♦ Installation altitude
In order to ensure that the drive inverter is successfully commissioned, in addition
to completely carrying-out all of the installation work, it is important to note that the
drive inverter may not be disconnected from the line supply while parameterizing
the drive unit. If commissioning is interrupted due to a power failure, then
parameters could be lost. In this case, commissioning must always be re-started (it
may be necessary to restore the parameters to the factory setting (refer to Section
3.5.7).
NOTE
When using output reactors, the pulse frequency may not be set higher than 4 kHz.
The following parameter setting is mandatory when using an output reactor:
P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 61
3.5.1 50/60 Hz setting
The frequency setting made in the factory can be adapted to the North American
market, without requiring any parameterization using an operator panel or PC tool
using the 50/60 Hz DIP switch (refer to Fig. 3-15).
50/60 Hz DIP switch
for frequency setting
60 Hz
50 Hz
Fig. 3-15 DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz
The switch determines the value of parameter P0100 corresponding to the
following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-16). Besides P0100 = 2, after the power supply
voltage has been switched-in, the 50/60 Hz DIP switch determines the 50/60 Hz
setting (value of parameter P0100).
P0100 = 2
?
P0100 = 0 P0100 = 2 P0100 = 1
P0100 = 2
?
P0100 = 1
?
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
nono
Quick
commissioning
P0010 = 1
Power
cycle
DIP2 = OFF
?
Power in kW
Frequency 50 Hz
Power in kW
Frequency 60 Hz
Power in hp
Frequency 60 Hz
Fig. 3-16 Mode of operation of the 50/60 Hz DIP switch in conjunction with P0100
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
62 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
By changing the setting of 50/60 Hz DIP switch, after the drive inverter has been
powered-down/powered-up, the parameters for the rated motor frequency P0310,
max. frequency P1082 and reference frequency P2000 are automatically pre-set.
In addition, the rated motor parameters as well as all of the other parameters which
depend on the rated motor parameters, are reset. The units of the power
parameters are, depending on P0100, are either interpreted as kW value or hp
value.
3.5.2 Quick commissioning
If there is still no appropriate parameter set for the drive, then a quick
commissioning must be carried-out including a motor data identification routine.
The following operator units can be used to carry-out quick commissioning:
BOP (option)
AOP (option)
PC Tools (with commissioning software STARTER, DriveMonitor)
When the quick commissioning is carried-out, the motor – drive inverter is basically
commissioned; the following data must be obtained, modified or entered before
quick commissioning is started:
Enter the line supply frequency
Enter the rating plate data
Command / setpoint sources
Min. / max. frequency or ramp-up / ramp-down time
Control mode
Motor data identification
Parameterizing the drive with BOP or AOP
The frequency inverter is adapted to the motor using the quick commissioning
function and important technological parameters are set. The quick commissioning
shouldn't be carried-out if the rated motor data saved in the frequency inverter
(4-pole 1LA Siemens motor, star circuit configuration frequency inverter (FU)-
specific) match the rating plate data.
Parameters, designated with a * offer more setting possibilities than are actually
listed here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities.
START
Factory setting
P0003 = 2 User access level *
1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters
2 Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions
3 Expert (For expert use only)
P0010 = 1 Commissioning parameter *
0 Ready
1 Quick commissioning
30 Factory setting
NOTE
P0010 should be set to 1 in order to parameterize the data of the motor rating
plate.
0
1
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 63
P0100 =...
P0100 = 1, 2
P0100 = 0
Europe/ North America
(enters the line supply frequency)
0 Europe [kW], frequency default 50 Hz
1 North America [hp], frequency default 60 Hz
2 North America [kW], frequency default 60 Hz
NOTE
For P0100 = 0 or 1, the setting of switch DIP2(2)
determines the value of P0100 (refer to the
parameter list).
50/60 Hz DIP switch
for frequency setting
60 Hz
50 Hz
P0304 =... P0304 =... Rated motor voltage
(Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating
plate)
The rated motor voltage on the rating
plate must be checked, regarding the
star/delta circuit configuration to ensure
that it matches with the circuit
connection configured at the motor
terminal board
P0305 =... P0305 =... Rated motor current
(Nominal motor current [A] from rating
plate)
P0307 =... P0307 =... Rated motor power
(Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from
rating plate)
If P0100 = 0 or 2, value will be in kW. If
P0100 = 1, value will be in in hp.
P0304
P0305P0307
P0308 P0311
P0310
P0308 =...P0308 =... Rated motor cosPhi
(Nominal motor power factor (cos ϕ) from rating plate)
If the setting is 0, the value is automatically calculated
P0100 = 1,2: P0308 no significance, no entry required.
P0309 =... P0309 =... Rated motor efficiency
(Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate)
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
P0100 = 0: P0309 no significance, no entry required.
P0310 =... Rated motor frequency
(Nominal motor frequency in [Hz] from rating plate)
Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed.
P0311 =... Rated motor speed
(Nominal motor speed in [rpm] from rating plate)
Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value.
NOTE
For slip compensation, the input is absolutely necessary.
P0335 =... Motor cooling
(Selects motor cooling system used)
0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor
1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan
P0640 =... Motor overload factor
(Motor overload factor in [%] relative to P0305)
This defines the limit of the maximum output current as a % of the rated motor
current (P0305).
0
FU-spec.
FU-spec.
FU-spec.
FU-spec.
FU-spec.
50.00 Hz
FU-spec.
0
150 %
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
64 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
P0700 =... Selection of command source
0 Factory default setting
1 BOP (keypad)
2 Terminal
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
P1000 =... Selection of frequency setpoint
1 MOP setpoint
2 Analog setpoint
3 Fixed frequency
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
P1080 =... Min. frequency
(enters the minimum motor frequency in Hz)
Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency
setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation.
P1082 =... Max. frequency
(enters the maximum motor frequency in Hz)
Sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the
frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and
anticlockwise rotation.
P1120 =... Ramp-up time
(enters the ramp-up time in s)
Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor
frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used.
P1121 =... Ramp-down time
(enters the deceleration time in s)
Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down
to standstill when no rounding is used
P1135 =... OFF3 ramp-down time
(enters the fast stop ramp-down time in s)
Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3
command.
P1300 =... Control mode
(enters the required control mode)
0 V/f with linear characteristic
1 V/f with FCC
2 V/f with parabolic characteristic
3 V/f with programmable characteristic
2
0.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
10.00 s
10.00 s
5.00 s
0
2
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 65
P3900 = 1 End of quick commissioning
(start of the motor calculation)
0 No quick commissioning (no motor calculations)
1 Start quick commissioning with factory reset
2 Start quick commissioning
3 Start quick commissioning only for motor data
NOTE
For P3900 = 1,2,3 → P0340 is internally set to 1 and the appropriate data
calculated (refer to the parameter list P0340).
ENDE End of quick commissioning/ drive setting
If additional functions must be implemented at the drive inverter, please use the
instructions in Section 3.5.5 "Commissioning the application". We recommend this
procedure for drives with a high dynamic response..
WARNING
The motor data identification routine (refer to Section 3.5.4) may not be used for
loads which are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane
applications). Before the motor data identification run is started, the potentially
hazardous load must be carefully secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or
by clamping the load using the motor holding brake).
NOTE
The precise equivalent circuit diagram data are extremely important for the
voltage boost of the V/f characteristic. The equivalent diagram data can only be
estimated from the rating plate data. This is the reason that the equivalent
circuit diagram data are, either
- determined using the motor data identification routine (refer to Section 3.5.4),
or
- entered from the motor data sheet (refer to Section 3.5.3).
Parameter P0308 or P0309 are only visible using the BOP or AOP if P0003 ≥ 2.
Depending on the setting of parameter P0100, either P0308 or P0309 is
displayed.
The input value of P0307 and all other power data are either interpreted as kW
or hp value depending on P0100.
The possible rating plate / power plate data is shown in Fig. 3-17. The precise
definition and explanation of this data is defined in DIN EN 60 034-1.
Fig. 3-17 Example of a typical motor rating plate
0
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
66 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
In order to ensure a straightforward, successful commissioning, it is important that
the circuit connection in the motor terminal box (refer to Fig. 3-18) matches the
rated motor voltage entered in P0304 or the rated motor current P0305.
IEC Motor
e.g.: Volts 230 V (Delta connection) / 400 V (Star connection)
U1
V1
W1
Star connection
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
W1
Delta connection
U1
V1
W1
W2
U1
U2
V1
V2
W1
NEMA Motor T1
T4
T7
T3
T6
T9
T8
T5
T2
Volts U V W
T1
-T7
T2
-T8
T3
-T9low T4
-T5
-T6
T1 T2 T3high
Connected
together
Connection
T1-T7 T2-T8 T3-T9
Y Y
Y
U V W
T1
-T6
-T7
T2
-T4
-T8
T3
-T5
-T9
-
T1
T2
T3
T4
-T7
T5
-T8
T6
-T9
∆ ∆
∆
T1
T4
T7
T2T5T8
T3
T9
T6
Volts
low
high
Connected
together
Connection
e.g.: Volts 230 V YY (low) / 460 V Y (high)
Fig. 3-18 Motor terminal box
The following must be noted when entering the rating plate data or the ESB data:
The rated motor voltage P0304, the rated motor current P0305 and the stator
resistance P0350 must always be entered in accordance with the motor circuit
configuration (either delta or star).
If the rated motor data that is available (P0304, P0305, P0350) does not match
the motor circuit configuration, then the appropriate conversion (refer to Fig.
3-19) must be made and then entered.
NOTE
The outer conductor voltage/phase-to-phase voltage (voltage U12 between outer
conductors L1, L2) and the outer conductor current (phase current) I1 are always
specified on the rating plate.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 67
I11
2
U12
3
U1N
I1N
Z
N
Z Z
III 321 ==
U3UUU 1Ν312312 ⋅===
Z2
I
U
1
12
⋅=
3
Z
Z
Y12,
∆12, =
U
3
U Y12,
1
∆12, =
I11
2
U12
3
I12
Z Z
Z
I
3
1
III 1312312 ⋅===
UUU 312312 ==
I
3
1
I Y1,∆1, =
Z
3
2
I
U
1
12
⋅=
Fig. 3-19 Star / delta circuit configurations
87 Hz characteristic
When a motor with a delta circuit configuration (e. g. VN∆, motor = 230 V) is fed from a
frequency inverter, where the rated voltage corresponds to the star circuit
configuration (e.g. 400 V frequency inverter), then it is important to proceed as
follows and observe the following:
The motor must have the appropriate voltage strength.
Above the rated motor frequency, the iron losses in the motor increase over-
proportionally. This is the reason that above this frequency, the thermal motor
torque should be reduced.
For the quick commissioning, the rating plate data for the delta circuit
configuration should be entered or the rating plate must be appropriately
converted.
The drive inverter must be designed for the higher current (delta circuit
configuration).
The 87 Hz characteristic is independent of the control type.
When using the 87 Hz characteristic, the mechanical motor limits must be
taken into account (refer to Catalog M11).
For the 87 Hz characteristic, the ratio between the voltage and frequency (V/f
characteristic) remain constant. This is the reason that the following relationships
apply:
P = powerP
U
U
P N∆
N∆
N1
N1 ⋅=
f
U
U
f N∆
N∆
N1
N1 ⋅=
( ) nffn ∆N∆N1N1
p
min
s
60
+−
⎥
⎦
⎤
⎢
⎣
⎡
=
f
fN1fN∆
U
UN∆
UN1 f = frequency
n = speed
p = pole pair No.
(400 V)
(230 V)
(50 Hz) (87 Hz)
Fig. 3-20 V/f characteristic
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
68 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-8 Example 1LA7060-4AB10
Delta circuit
configuration
87 Hz
characteristic
Star circuit
configuration
P0304 Rated motor voltage 230 V 400 V 400 V
P0305 Rated motor current 0.73 A 0.73 A 0.42 A
P0307 Rated motor power 120 W 207 W 120 W
P0308 Cos ϕ 0.75 0.75 0.75
P0310 Rated motor frequency 50 Hz 87 Hz 50 Hz
P0311 Rated motor speed 1350 RPM 2460 RPM 1350 RPM
P0314 Motor pole pairs 2 2 2
Contrary to the BOP, AOP operator panels or commissioning tool program
DriveMonitor, the STARTER commissioning (start-up) program offers a mask-
orientated quick commissioning, which is especially advantageous for users who
are using MICROMASTER for the first time. On the other hand, BOP, AOP and
DriveMonitor offer, in conjunction with the drive inverter, parameter-orientated
quick commissioning where the user is navigated through the menu tree mentioned
above.
NOTE
The MICROMASTER series of drive units is not available for 3-ph. 690 V AC.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 69
3.5.3 Calculating the motor / control data
Internal motor / control data is calculated using parameter P0340 or, indirectly
using parameter P3900 (refer to Section 3.5.2) or P1910 (refer to Section 3.5.4).
The functionality of parameter P0340 can, for example, if the motor weight or the
stator resistance is known. The following settings are possible for P0340:
0 No calculation
1 Complete parameterization
For the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1), in addition to the motor / control
parameters, parameters are also pre-assigned which refer to the motor rated data
(e.g. torque limits and reference quantities for interface signals).
Table 3-9 Parameter for motor/control data
P0344 Motor weight
P2002 Reference current
P2000 Reference frequency
P0350 Stator resistance (line-to-line)
P0611 Motor I2t time constant
P0346 Magnetization time
P1253 Vdc-controller output limitation
P0347 Demagnetization time
P1316 Boost end frequency
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
P0340 = 1
NOTE
When exiting the quick commissioning with P3900 > 0 (refer to Section 3.5.2),
internally P0340 is set to 1 (complete parameterization).
For the motor data identification (refer to Section 3.5.4), after the measurement
has been completed, internally P0340 is set to 3.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
70 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.4 Motor data identification (stator resistance)
MICROMASTER has a measuring technique which is used to determine the stator
resistance:
We urgently recommend that the identification routine is carried-out for control-
related reasons. For example, the stator resistance is extremely important for the
voltage boost for the V/f characteristic. The motor data identification routine should
be executed, especially if long feeder cables or if third-party motors are being used.
After selecting the motor data identification using parameter P1910, alarm A0541 is
immediately generated. The motor identification routine is started by the ON
command and different excitation signals are impressed in the motor (DC and AC
voltages). This measurement is carried-out with the motor at a standstill and it
takes, including the data calculation per selection (P1910 = 1) between 20 s ... 4
min. The identification time depends on the motor and increases with its size.
The motor data identification routine must be carried-out with the motor in the cold
condition so that the motor resistance values saved can be assigned to the
parameter of the ambient temperature. Only then is correct temperature adaptation
of the resistances possible during operation.
The motor data identification routine operates with the results of the "Complete
parameterization" P0340 = 1 or the motor equivalent diagram data which was last
saved. The results become increasingly better the more times that the identification
routine is executed (up to 3 times).
WARNING
It is not permissible to carry-out the motor identification routine for loads which
are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before
starting the motor data identification routine, the potentially hazardous load
must be secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or clamping the load
using the motor holding brake).
When starting the motor data identification routine, the rotor can move into a
preferred position. This is more significant for larger motors.
NOTE
It is not necessary to lock the motor rotor for the motor data identification
routine. However, if it is possible to lock the motor rotor during the identification
routine (e.g. by closing the motor holding brake), then this should be used to
determine the equivalent circuit diagram data.
The following formula can be applied to check the correctness of the motor
rating plate data:
PN = √3 ∗ VN Υ∗ INΥ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η ≈ √3 ∗ VN ∆∗ IN∆ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η
with PN rated motor power
VN Υ, VN ∆ rated motor voltage (star / delta)
IN Υ, IN ∆ rated motor current (star / delta)
cosϕ power factor
η efficiency
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 71
Motor data identification routine
START
Factory setting: Bold
Motortemp. - P0625
@€ ± 5 °C ?
yes no
⏐Ambient Motor temp.⏐
≤ 5 °C
?
Allow the motor
to cool down
Ambient motor temperature (entered in °C)
The motor ambient temperature is entered at the instant that motor data is
being determined (factory setting: 20 °C).
The difference between the motor temperature and the motor ambient
temperature must lie in the tolerance range of approx. ± 5 °C. If this is not
the case, then the motor data identification routine can only be carried-out
after the motor has cooled down.
P1910 = 1 Select motor data identification
0 Disabled
1 Identification of all parameters with parameter change
NOTE:
For P1910 = 1 → P0340 is internally set to P0340 = 1 and the
appropriate data calculated (refer to parameter list P0340)
ON Power-up the motor
The ON command initiates the measuring operation. In so doing the motor aligns
itself and conducts current. Alarm message A0541 (motor data identification
routine active) is output.
A0541
After the motor data identification routine has been completed:
1. P1910 is reset (P1910 = 0)
2. A0541 is withdrawn
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
72 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5 Commissioning the application
After the motor – drive inverter combination was commissioned using the quick or
series commissioning, in the following step parameters should be adapted and set
according to the technological requirements. As an example, the following points
should be considered:
Functional requirements of the drive inverter (e.g. process control with PID
controller)
Limit values
Dynamic requirements
Starting torques
Load surge requirement
Overload
Diagnostics
If the application includes a function, which is not covered by the quick or series
commissioning, then the following sections of the function description or the
parameter list should be considered.
Adapting the drive inverter to the application
The parameters designated with * offer more setting possibilities than are listed
here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities.
START
Factory setting
P0003 = 3 User access level *
1 Standard (Allows access into most frequently used parameters)
2 Extended (Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions)
3 Expert (for expert use only)
3.5.5.1 Serial Interface (USS)
P2010 =... USS baud rate
Sets baud rate for USS communication.
P2011 =... USS address
Sets unique address for inverter.
P2012 =... USS PZD length
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram.
P2013 =... USS PKW length
Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram.
Possible
Settings:
3 1200 baud
4 2400 baud
5 4800 baud
6 9600 baud
7 19200 baud
8 38400 baud
9 57600 baud
1
6
0
2
127
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 73
3.5.5.2 Selection of command source
P0700 =... Selection of
command source
Selects digital command source.
0 Factory fault setting
1 BOP (keypad)
2 Terminal
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
P0700 = 2
Sequence control
Setpoint
channel
Motor
control
BOP
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
Terminals
CB
COM link
3.5.5.3 Digital input (DIN)
P0701=... Function of digital input 1
Terminal 5
1 ON / OFF1
P0702 =... Function digital input 2
Terminal 6
12 Reverse
P0703 =... Function digital input 3
Terminal 7
9 Fault acknowledge
P0704 = 0 Function digital input 4
Via analog input
Terminals 3, 4
0 Digital input disabled
P0724 =... Debounce time for
digital inputs
Defines debounce time (filtering
time) used for digital inputs.
0 No debounce time
1 2.5 ms debounce time
2 8.2 ms debounce time
3 12.3 ms debounce time
Possible Settings:
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON / OFF1
2 ON + Reverse / OFF1
3 OFF2 – coast to standstill
4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection)
16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON)
17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON)
21 Local/remote
25 DC brake enable
29 External trip
33 Disable additional freq setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
24 V T 0
&
0 V
Debounce time: DIN
0 ... 3
P0724 (3)
CO/BO: Bin.inp.val
r0722
r0722
Kl.8 P24
Kl.9 0 V
DIN channel
Function of DIN 1
0 ... 99
P0701 (1)
0
99
...
Function
2
1
12
9
0
3
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
74 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.4 Digital output (DOUT)
P0731 =... BI: Function of digital output 1*
Defines source of digital output 1.
P0748 = 0 Invert digital output
Defines high and low states of relay for a
given function.
Common Settings:
52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed
52.1 Drive ready to run 0 Closed
52.2 Drive running 0 Closed
52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed
52.4 OFF2 active 1 Closed
52.5 OFF3 active 1 Closed
52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed
52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed
-1
0
1
Invert DOUTs
0 ... 1
P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs
r0747
r0747
Kl.10
Kl.11
.0
DOUT channel
NO
COM(52:3)
BI: Fct. of DOUT 1
P0731
3.5.5.5 Selection of frequency setpoint
P1000 =... Selection of frequency setpoint
0 No main setpoint
1 MOP setpoint
2 Analog setpoint
3 Fixed frequency
4 USS on BOP link
5 USS on COM link
6 CB on COM link
MOP
ADC
FF
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB
COM link
P1000 = 12
P1000 = 12
Sequence control
Additonal
setpoint
Main
setpoint
Setpoint
channel
Motor
control
52.3
0
2
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 75
3.5.5.6 Analog input (ADC)
P0757 =... Value x1 of ADC scaling
P0758 =... Value y1 of ADC scaling
This parameter represents the
value of x1 as a % of P2000
(reference frequency).
P0759 =... Value x2 of ADC scaling
P0760 =... Value y2 of ADC scaling
This parameter represents the
value of x2 as a % of P2000
(reference frequency).
P0761 =... Width of ADC deadband
Defines width of deadband on
analog input.
max
100 %
10 V
V
x100%
%
P0760
P0758
P0759
P0761 > 0
0 < P0758 < P0760 || 0 > P0758 > P0760
min
P0757
P0761
P0757 = P0761
4000 h
KL
KL
A
D
ADC
type
ADC
scaling
ADC
dead
zone
r0755 Pxxxx
r0752
P1000
ADC
ADC+
r0754
P0761P0753P0756
Setpoint
r0722
r0722.3
0
1
1.7 V
3.9 V
F0080
P0704
Pxxxx
Function
Wire
breakage
sensing
P0756 P0761
T 0
P0762
r0751
r0751
0 V
0.0 %
10 V
100.0 %
0 V
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
76 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.7 Analog output (DAC)
P0771 =... CI: DAC
Defines function of the 0 - 20 mA analog output.
P0773 =... Smooth time DAC
Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing
for DAC using a PT1 filter.
P0777 =... Value x1 of DAC scaling
P0778 =... Value y1 of DAC scaling
P0779 =... Value x2 of DAC scaling
P0780 =... Value y2 of DAC scaling
P0781 =... Width of DAC deadband
Sets width of deadband in [mA]
for analog output.
20
P0780
y2
P0778
y1
P0777
x1
P0779
x2
100 %
mA
P0781
%
21
2 ms
0.0 %
0
100.0 %
20
0
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 77
3.5.5.8 Motor potentiometer (MOP)
P1031 =... Setpoint memory of the MOP
Saves last motor potentiometer setpoint (MOP) that was active before OFF command or
power down.
0 MOP setpoint will not be stored
1 MOP setpoint will be stored (P1040 is updated)
P1032 =... Inhibit negative MOP setpoints
0 Neg. MOP setpoint is allowed
1 Neg. MOP setpoint inhibited
P1040 =... Setpoint of the MOP
Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control.
MOP ramp-up and ramp-down times are defined by the parameters P1120 and P1121.
Selection
DIN
BOP UP button
USS control word
r2032 Bit13
USS control word
r2032 Bit14
or
P0702 = 13
(DIN2)
P0703 = 14
(DIN3)
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 1, P1000 = 1
MOP up MOP down
P0719 = 1, P0700 = 2
or
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 2, P1000 = 1
P0719 = 11
or
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 4, P1000 = 1
P0719 = 41
DOWN button
Possible parameter settings for the selection of MOP:
USS on
BOP link
USS control word
r2036 Bit13
USS control word
r2036 Bit14
or
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 5, P1000 = 1
P0719 = 51
USS on
COM link
CB control word
r2090 Bit13 r2090 Bit14
or
P0719 = 0, P0700 = 6, P1000 = 1
P0719 = 61
CB CB control word
0
1
5.00 Hz
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
78 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.9 Fixed frequency (FF)
P1001 =... Fixed frequency 1
Can be directly selected via DIN1
(P0701 = 15, 16)
P1002 =... Fixed frequency 2
Can be directly selected via DIN2
(P0702 = 15, 16)
P1003 =... Fixed frequency 3
Can be directly selected via DIN3
(P0703 = 15, 16)
P1004 =... Fixed frequency 4
P1005 =... Fixed frequency 5
P1006 =... Fixed frequency 6
P1007 =... Fixed frequency 7
When defining the function of the digital inputs
(P0701 to P0703), three different types can be
selected for fixed frequencies:
15 = Direct selection (binary-coded)
In this particular mode, the appropriate
digital input always selects the associated
fixed frequency, e.g.:
Digital input 3 = selects fixed frequency 3.
If several inputs are simultaneously active,
then these are summed. An ON command is
additionally required.
16 = Direct selection + ON command
(binary-coded + On / Off1)
In this mode, the fixed frequencies are
selected as for 15, however these are
combined with an ON command.
17 = Binary coded selection + ON command
(BCD-coded + On/ Off1)
The BCD-coded operating mode is effective
for digital inputs 1 to 3.
P1016 =... Fixed frequency code –
Bit 0
Defines the selection method for fixed
frequencies.
P1017 =... Fixed frequency code –
Bit 1
P1018 =... Fixed frequency code –
Bit 2
1 Direct selection
2 Direct selection + ON command
3 Binary coded selection + ON command
NOTE
For settings 2 and 3, all parameters P1016 to
P1019 must be set to the selected value so that
the drive inverter accepts the ON command.
3.5.5.10 JOG
P1058 =... JOG frequency right
Frequency in Hz when the motor is being
jogged in the clockwise direction of rotation.
P1059 =... JOG frequency left
Frequency in Hz when the motor is being
jogged in the counter-clockwise direction of
rotation.
P1060 =... JOG ramp-up time
Ramp-up time in s from 0 to the maximum
frequency (P1082). The JOG ramp-up is
limited by P1058 or P1059.
P1061 =... JOG ramp-down time
Ramp-down time in s from the maximum
frequency (P1082) to 0.
P1082
(fmax
)
P1058
t
P1060 P1061
f
JOG
5.00 Hz
10.00 Hz
15.00 Hz
20.00 Hz
25.00 Hz
30.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
1
1
1
10.00 s
10.00 s
5.00 Hz
5.00 Hz
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 79
3.5.5.11 Ramp-function generator (HLG)
P1091 =... Skip frequency 1 (entered in Hz)
Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids
effects of mechanical resonance and
suppresses frequencies within +/- P1101
(skip frequency bandwidth).
P1091 =... Skip frequency 2
P1091 =... Skip frequency 3
P1091 =... Skip frequency 4
P1101 =... Skip frequency bandwidth
(entered in Hz)
P1101
P1091
fin
fout
Skip frequency
bandwidth
Skip frequency
P1120 =... Ramp-up time
(enters the accelerating time in s)
P1121 =... Ramp-down time
(enters the deceleration time in s)
f
P1082
(fmax
)
f1
t
P1120 P1121
P1130 =... Rump-up initial rounding time
(entered in s)
P1131 =... Ramp-up final rounding time
(entered in s)
P1132 =... Rump-down initial rounding time
(entered in s)
P1133 =... Ramp-down final rounding time
(entered in s)
P1134 =... Rounding type
0 Continuous smoothing
1 Discontinuous smoothing
The rounding times are recommended as
abrupt responses can be avoided therefore
reducing stress and damage to the mechanical
system.
The ramp-up and ramp-down times are
extended by the component of the rounding
ramps.
P1135 =... OFF3 ramp-down time
Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command.
2.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
0.00 Hz
10.00 s
10.00 s
5.00 s
0.00 s
0
0.00 s
0.00 s
0.00 s
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
80 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.12 Reference/limit frequencies
P1080 =... Min. frequency (entered in Hz)
Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency
setpoint. If the setpoint falls below the value of P1080, then the output frequency is set to
P1080 taking into account the sign.
P1082 =... Max. frequency (entered in Hz)
Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency
setpoint. If the setpoint exceeds the value P1082, then the output frequency is limited. The
value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation.
P2000 =... Reference frequency (entered in Hz)
The reference frequency in Hertz corresponds to a value of 100 %. This setting should be
changed if a maximum frequency of higher than 50 Hz is required. It is automatically
changed to 60 Hz if the standard 60 Hz frequency was selected using the DIP50/60 switch
or P0100.
NOTE
This reference frequency effects the setpoint frequency as both the analog setpoints
(100 % P2000) as well as the frequency setpoints via USS (4000H P2000) refer to this
value.
3.5.5.13 Motor control
P1300 =... Control mode
The control type is selected using this parameter. For the "V/f characteristic" control type,
the ratio between the frequency inverter output voltage and the frequency inverter output
frequency is defined.
0 V/f with linear
1 V/f with FCC
2 V/f with parabolic characteristic
3 V/f with programmable characteristic (→ P1320 – P1325)
P1310 =... Continuous boost (entered in %)
Voltage boost as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) and P0350 (stator resistance).
P1310 is valid for all V/f versions (refer to P1300). At low output frequencies, the effective
resistance values of the winding can no longer be neglected in order to maintain the motor
flux.
f
Linear V/f
OFF
ON
t
t
⏐f⏐
P1310 active
t0
1
Validity range
Vmax
Vn
(P0304)
VConBoost,100
0 fn
(P0310)
f max
(P1082)
V
fBoost,end
(P1316)
Boost
Output voltage
actual V
N
orm
al V/f
(P1300
=
0)
VConBoost,50
Boost voltage
0.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
50.00 Hz
0
50.00 %
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 81
P1311 =... Acceleration boost (entered in %)
Voltage boost for accelerating/braking as a % relative to P0305 and P0350. P1311 only
results in a voltage boost when ramping-up/ramp-down and generates an additional torque
for accelerating/braking. Contrary to parameter P1312, that is only active for the 1st
acceleration operation after the ON command, P1311 is effective each time that the drive
accelerates or brakes.
P1312 =... Starting boost (entered in %)
Voltage boost when starting (after an ON command) when using the linear or square-law
V/f characteristic as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) or P0350 (stator
resistance). The voltage boost remains active until
1) the setpoint is reached for the first time and
2) the setpoint is reduced to a value that is less than the instantaneous ramp-function
generator output.
P1320 =... Programmable V/f freq.
coord. 1
Sets V/f coordinates
(P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to
define V/f characteristic.
P1321 =... Programmable. V/f volt.
coord. 1
P1322 =... Programmable V/f freq.
coord. 2
P1323 =... Programmable V/f volt.
coord. 2
P1324 =... Programmable U/f Freq.
coord. 3
P1325 =... Programmable V/f volt.
coord. 3
]P0304[V
100[%]
r0395[%]
100[%]
P1310[%]
P1310[V] ⋅⋅=
V
P1325
f1
P1320
fmax
P1082
Vmax
r0071
Vn
P0304
P1323
P1321
P1310
f0
0 Hz
f2
P1322
f3
P1324
fn
P0310
f
Vmax
= f(Vdc
, Mmax
)
P1335 =... Slip compensation (entered in %)
Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant
independent of motor load.
P1338 =... Resonance damping gain V/f
Defines resonance damping gain for V/f.
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 %
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.0 Hz
0.00
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
82 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.5.14 Inverter/motor protection
P0290 =... Inverter overload reaction
Selects reaction of inverter to an internal over-temperature.
0 Reduce output frequency
1 Trip (F0004)
2 Reduce pulse frequency and output frequency
3 Reduce pulse frequency then trip (F0004)
P0292 =... Inverter temperature warning
Defines the temperature difference (in ºC) between the Overtemperature trip threshold and
the warning threshold of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter
and cannot be changed by the user.
P0335 =... Motor cooling (enters the motor cooling system)
0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor
1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan
P0610 =... Motor I
2
t reaction
Defines reaction when motor I2
t reaches warning threshold.
0 Warning, no reaction, no trip
1 Warning, Imax reduction, trip F0011
2 Warning, no reaction, trip (F0011)
P0611 =... Motor I
2
t time constant (entered in s)
The time until the thermal limit of a motor is reached, is calculated via the thermal time
constant. A higher value increases the time at which the motor thermal limit is reached. The
value of P0611 is estimated according to the motor data during quick commissioning or is
calculated using P0340 (Calculating of the motor parameters). When the calculation of
motor parameters during quick commission is complete the stored value can be replaced by
the value given by the motor manufacturer
Motor I
2
t warning level (entered in %)
Defines the value at which alarm A0511 (motor overtemperature) is generated.
P0614 =...
⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜
⎝
⎛
P0305
r0027
2
P0310
r0021
Motor
i2t
temp.
reaction
P0610
P0611
P0335
P0614
P06141.1⋅
Trip threshold
Warning threshold
I_max reduction
A0511
F0011
t
r0034
)ti( 2
P0640 =... Motor overload factor [%]
Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current). Limited
to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the
lower.
0
15 °C
0
2
100 s
100.0 %
150.0 %
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 83
3.5.5.15 Inverter-specific Functions
Flying start
P1200 =... Flying start
Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the
inverter until the actual motor speed has been found.
0 Flying start disabled
1 Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint
2 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
3 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint
4 Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint
5 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint
6 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint
P1202 =... Motor-current: Flying start (entered in %)
Defines search current used for flying start.
P1203 =... Search rate: Flying start (entered in %)
Sets factor by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with
turning motor.
Automatic restart
P1210 =... Automatic restart
Configures automatic restart function.
0 Disabled
1 Trip reset after power on
2 Restart after mains blackout
3 Restart after mains brownout or fault
4 Restart after mains brownout
5 Restart after mains blackout and fault
6 Restart after mains brown/blackout or fault
Holding brake
P1215 =... Holding brake enable
Enables/disables holding brake function (MHB).
0 Motor holding brake disabled
1 Motor holding brake enabled
NOTE
The following must apply when controlling the brake relay via a digital output: P0731 = 14
(refer to Section 3.5.5.4 "Digital ").
P1216 =... Holding brake release delay (entered in s)
Defines the time interval during which the frequency inverter runs with the min. frequency
P1080 after magnetizing, before the ramp-up starts.
P1217 =... Holding time after ramp-down (entered in s)
Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down.
0
100 %
100 %
0
1.0 s
1.0 s
0
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
84 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
DC braking
P1232 =... DC braking current (entered in %)
Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
P1233 =... Duration of DC braking (entered in s)
Defines duration for which DC injection braking is to be active following an OFF1 or OFF3
command.
Compound braking
P1236 =... Compound braking current (entered in %)
Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold
of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305).
(see also "Vdc controller").
Compound braking switch-on level P0210213.1V21.13U mains
DC_Comp
⋅⋅=⋅⋅=
If P1254 = 0 :
1242r0.98U
DC_Comp
⋅=Compound braking switch-on level
otherwise :
Vdc controller
P1240 =... Configuration of Vdc controller
Enables / disables Vdc controller.
0 Vdc controller disabled
1 Vdc-max controller enabled
P1254 =... Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels
Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on
levels for Vdc control functionalities.
0 Disabled
1 Enabled t
t
⏐f⏐
1
-controller activeVDC_max
t
VDC
0
r0056 Bit14
r1242
A0911
f
fact
set
PID controller
P2200 =... BI: Enable PID controller
PID mode Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID
controller. Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and
the normal frequency setpoints.
P2253 =... CI: PID setpoint
Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input.
P2254 =... CI: PID trim source
Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to
the PID setpoint.
P2257 =... Ramp-up time for PID setpoint
Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint.
P2258 =... Ramp-down time for PID setpoint
Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint.
P2264 =... CI: PID feedback
Selects the source of the PID feedback signal.
100 %
0 s
0 %
1
1
0.0
0.0
0.0
1.00 s
1.00 s
755.0
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 85
P2267 =... Max. value for PID feedback
Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%]..
P2268 =... Min. value for PID feedback
Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%]..
P2280 =... PID proportional gain
Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller.
P2285 =... PID integral time
Sets integral time constant for PID controller.
P2291 =... PID output upper limit
Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%].
P2292 =... PID output lower limit
Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%].
PID
MOP
ADC
PID
SUM
PID
PID
FF
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB
COM link
P2254
P2253
PID
RFG
PID
PT1
−
∆PID
P2200
P2264
PID
PT1
PID
SCL
OutputPID
0
1
Motor
control
P2257
P2258
P2261
P2271
P2269
P2270
P2265
P2280
P2285P2268
P2267
P2292
P2291
r2273
r2294
Example:
Parameter Parameter text Example
P2200 BI: Enable PID controller P2200 = 1.0 PID controller active
P2253 CI: PID setpoint P2253 = 2224 PID-FF1
P2264 CI: PID feedback P2264 = 755 ADC
P2267 Max. PID feedback P2267 Adapt to the application
P2268 Min. PID feedback P2268 Adapt to the application
P2280 PID proportional gain P2280 Determined by optimizing
P2285 PID integral time P2285 Determined by optimizing
P2291 PID output upper limit P2291 Adapt to the application
P2292 PID output lower limit P2292 Adapt to the application
NOTE
If P0971 is used to start data save from the RAM to EEPROM, then after the data
has been transferred, the communications memory is re-initialized. This means that
communications via USS as well as also via the CB board are interrupted for the
time it takes to reset:
The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop
The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure
For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is
displayed.
The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel
After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and
DriveMonitor and the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically re-
established.
100.00 %
0.00 %
3.000
0.000 s
100.00 %
0.00 %
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
86 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.6 Series commissioning
The parameter set can be read-out (upread) from the drive converter via the serial
interface and saved on the hard disk / floppy disk or in a non-volatile memory (e.g.
EEPROM) using the following
PC Tools (e.g. STARTER, DriveMonitor) or the
Operator panel AOP
(please refer to Fig. 3-21).
The interfaces of the drive inverter with USS protocol and the fieldbus interfaces
(e.g. PROFIBUS) which can be used to transfer parameters, can be used as serial
interface.
DriveMonitor
AOP
STARTER CB on COM link
USS on COM link
USS on BOP link
(PROFIBUS)
(RS485)
(RS232)
Parameter transmission from different
sources via download
MM4
* Option is absolutely required for the
connection
1)
1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit
for single inverter control
5)*
2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit
3) Option: AOP door mounting kit
for multiple inverter control (USS)
4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter
3)*
2)*
2)*
4)*
4)*
CB
5) With PROFIBUS:
SIMATIC NET
With CANopen or DeviceNet:
see user organisation
Fig. 3-21 Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools
If there is already an appropriate parameter set for the drive, which, for example,
was created by either upreading or by programming offline, then this can be
downloaded into the drive inverter. This means that it is possible to transfer the
parameter set from drive inverter A to drive inverter B which, for identical
applications (e.g. series machines, group drives) allows data to be copied and
therefore in turn fast commissioning.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 87
WARNING
For series commissioning, all of the communication interfaces as well as also
the digital and analog interfaces are re-initialized. This results in a brief
communications failure or causes the digital output to switch.
Potentially hazardous loads must be carefully secured before starting a series
commissioning.
Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows before starting series
commissioning:
♦ Lower the load to the floor, or
♦ Clamp the load using the motor holding brake
(Caution: During series commissioning, MICROMASTER must be prevented
from controlling the motor holding brake).
If the motor holding brake (refer to Section 3.13) is controlled by the
MICROMASTER, then series commissioning may not be carried-out for
potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications).
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
88 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.5.7 Parameter reset to the factory setting
The factory setting is a defined initial state of all of the drive inverter parameters.
The drive inverters are shipped from the factory in this state. The drive inverters
have the following default settings:
Control via the digital inputs
a) ON/OFF via DIN1
b) Direction of rotation reversal via DIN2
c) Fault acknowledgement via DIN3
Setpoint input via analog input
Signal output via the digital output
a) Fault active via DOUT 1
Actual frequency via the analog output
The basic V/f characteristic is the control mode (P1300 = 0)
Induction motor (P0300 = 1)
When appropriately connected-up and with the appropriate motor – drive inverter
combination, MICROMASTER drive inverters are ready to run when shipped from
the factory without requiring any additional parameterization.
You can re-establish the initial state at any time by carrying-out a parameter reset
to the factory setting. This undoes all of the parameter changes which were made
since the drive inverter was supplied. This value is designated as "Def" in the
parameter list.
Reset to the factory setting
START
P0010=30 Commissioning parameter
30 Factory setting
P0970 = 1 Factory reset
0 disabled
1 Parameter reset
END
The drive inverter carries-out a parameter reset (duration, approx. 10 s) and then
automatically exits the reset menu and sets:
P0970 = 0 : disabled
P0010 = 0 : ready
NOTE
When resetting the parameters to the factory setting, the communications memory
is re-initialized. This means that communications via USS as well as also via the
CB board are interrupted for the time it takes to make the reset:
The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop
The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure
For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is
displayed.
The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel
After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and
DriveMonitor or the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically re-
established.
0
0
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 89
3.6 Inputs / outputs
3.6.1 Digital inputs (DIN)
Number: 3 + 1
Parameter range: r0722 – P0725
Function chart number: FP2000, FP2200
Features:
- cycle time: 2 ms
- switch-on threshold: 10.6 V
- switch-out threshold: 10.6 V
- electrical features: electrically isolated, short-circuit proof
External control signals are required for a drive converter to be able to operate
autonomously. These signals can be entered via a serial interface as well as also
via digital inputs (refer to Fig. 3-22). MICROMASTER has 3 digital inputs which can
be expanded to a total of 4 by using the 2 analog inputs. The digital inputs, as far
as their assignment, can be freely programmed to create a function. Whereby,
regarding the program, it is possible to directly assign the function via parameters
P0701 - P0704 or to freely program the function using BICO technology.
DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - PNP (P0725 = 1))
24 V T 0
&
0
1
PNP/NPN DIN
0 ... 1
P0725 (1)
0 V
24 V
Debounce time: DIN
0 ... 3
P0724 (3)
CO/BO: Bin.inp.val
r0722
r0722
.0
Kl.8
P24 (PNP)
Kl.9
0 V (NPN)
Pxxxx BI: ...
P0701
Function
0
1
DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - NPN (P0725 = 0))
24 V T 0
&
0
1
PNP/NPN DIN
0 ... 1
P0725 (1)
0 V
24 V
Debounce time: DIN
0 ... 3
P0724 (3)
CO/BO: Bin.inp.val
r0722
r0722
.0
Kl.8
P24 (PNP)
Kl.9
0 V (NPN)
Pxxxx BI: ...
P0701
Function
0
1
Fig. 3-22 Digital inputs
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
90 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Parameter P0725 is used to define as to whether digital inputs DIN1 – DIN3 are
logical "1" when appropriately connected to 0 V or 24 V. The logical states of the
digital inputs can be de-bounced using P0724 and read-out using parameter r0722
(BICO monitoring parameter). Further, this parameter is used to parameterize
BICO for the digital inputs (refer to BICO parameterization in the following Section).
P0701 – P0703 (digital inputs 1–3) or P0707 – P0703 (analog input)
The possible settings of the individual inputs are listed in Table 3-10.
Table 3-10 Parameters P0701 – P0706
Parameter value Significance
0 Digital input disabled
1 ON / OFF1
2 ON+reverse / OFF1
3 OFF2 – coast to standstill
4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down
9 Fault acknowledge
10 JOG right
11 JOG left
12 Reverse
13 MOP up (increase frequency)
14 MOP down (decrease frequency)
15 Fixed setpoint (direct selection)
16 Fixed setpoint (direct selection + ON)
17 Fixed setpoint (binary-coded selection + ON)
25 Enable DC braking
29 External trip
33 Disable additional frequency setpoint
99 Enable BICO parameterization
Example:
An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1.
P0700 = 2 Control enabled via terminal strip (digital inputs)
P0701 = 1 ON/OFF1 via digital input 1 (DIN1)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 91
BICO parameterization
If the setting 99 (BICO) is entered into parameters P0701 – P0704, then the BICO
wiring is enabled for the appropriate digital input. The output parameter number of
the function (parameter, included in the parameter text BO) should be entered into
the command source (parameter which contains the code BI in the parameter text).
Example:
An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1.
P0700 = 2 Control enabled via digital inputs
P0701 = 99 BICO enabled for DIN1
P0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1 via DIN1
NOTE
Only experienced users should use the BICO parameterization and for applications
where the possibilities provided by P0701 – P0704 are no longer adequate.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
92 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.6.2 Digital output (DOUT)
Number: 1
Parameter range: r0730 – P0748
Function chart number: FP2100
Features:
- cycle time: 1 ms
Binary states in the drive can be output via the digital output. As result of the fast
cycle time, it is possible to control external devices and to display the state in real
time. In order that higher powers can also be output, the internal signal (TTL level)
is amplified using a relay (refer to Fig. 3-23).
Relay:
- max. opening / closing time: 5 / 10 ms
- voltage / current 30 V DC / 5 A
250 V AC / 2 A
(52:3)
BI: Fct. of DOUT 1
P0731
-1
0
1
Invert DOUTs
0 ... 1
P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs
r0747
r0747
NO
Kl.11
Kl.10
.0
Fig. 3-23 Digital output
The states, which are to be output, are defined using the "BI" parameter P0731
(digital output). For the definition, the "BO" parameter number or "CO/BO"
parameter number and the bit number of the particular state should be entered into
P0731. Frequently used states including the parameter number and bit are shown
in the following Table (refer to Table 3-11).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 93
Table 3-11 Parameter P0731 (frequently used functions / states)
Parameter value Significance
52.0 Drive ready
52.1 Drive ready to run
52.2 Drive running
52.3 Drive fault active
52.4 OFF2 active
52.5 OFF3 active
52.6 Switch-on inhibit active
52.7 Drive warning active
52.8 Deviation, setpoint / actual value
52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control)
52.A Maximum frequency reached
52.B Warning: Motor current limit
52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active
52.D Motor overload
52.E Motor running direction right
52.F Inverter overload
53.0 DC brake active
53.1 Act. frequency f_act >= P2167 (f_off)
53.2 Act. frequency f_act > P1080 (f_min)
53.3 Act. current r0027 >= P2170
53.6 Act. frequency f_act >= setpoint
NOTE
A complete list of all of the binary status parameters (refer to "CO/BO" parameters)
can be taken from the parameter list.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
94 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.6.3 Analog input (ADC)
Number: 1
Parameter range: P0750 – P0762
Function chart number: FP2200
Features:
- cycle time: 4 ms
- resolution: 10 bits
- accuracy: 1 % referred to 10 V / 20 mA
- electrical features: incorrect polarity protection, short-circuit proof
Analog setpoints, actual values and control signals are read-into the drive inverter
using the appropriate analog input and are converted into digital signals / values
using the ADC converter.
The analog input represents a voltage input that can be additionally configured via
parameter P0756.
Depending on the source, the appropriate connection must be made. Using, as an
example, the internal 10 V voltage source, a connection is shown as an example in
the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-24).
Voltage input
A
D
KL1 10 V
KL2 0 V
KL4 ADC−
KL3 ADC+
> 4.7 kΩ
Fig. 3-24 Connection example for ADC voltage input
The ADC channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone) (refer to
Fig. 3-25).
KL
KL
A
D
ADC
type
ADC
scaling
ADC
dead
zone
r0755 Pxxxx
r0752
P1000
ADC
ADC+
r0754
P0761P0753P0756
Setpoint
r0722
r0722.3
0
1
1.7 V
3.9 V
F0080
P0704
Pxxxx
Function
Wire
breakage
sensing
P0756 P0761
T 0
P0762
r0751
r0751
Fig. 3-25 ADC channel
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 95
NOTE
When the filter time constant P0753 (ADC-PT1) is increased, this smoothes the
ADC input signal therefore reducing the ripple. When this function is used within a
control loop, this smoothing has a negative impact on the control behavior and
immunity to noise (the dynamic performance deteriorates).
Wire breakage monitoring
The wire breakage monitoring (refer to Fig. 3-25) is set using parameters P0756
and P0761. If the input signal of the analog input falls below the wire breakage
threshold (0.5 * P0761), then after the time in P0762 expires, fault F0080 is output
and the status bit is set in parameter r0751.
t0
Signal loss
t0
P0761
V
1
P07610,5 ⋅
10
P0762
r0751
t0
1
F0080
Fault acknowl.
Analog input
t0
Act. ADC after scaling
r0755
Fig. 3-26 Wire breakage monitoring
The following secondary conditions/limitations apply to the wire breakage
monitoring:
The monitoring function must be activated using parameter P0756
Width of the ADC dead zone P0761 > 0
Wire breakage monitoring if the ADC input quantity ≤ 0.5 * P0761
Note
The wire-breakage monitoring function is only possible for unipolar analog
inputs.
Input range 0 to 0.5 * P0761 of the analog input must be excluded when
activating the wire breakage monitoring for normal operation.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
96 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.6.4 Analog output (DAC)
Number: 1
Parameter range: r0770 – P0785
Function chart number: FP2300
Features:
- cycle time: 4 ms
- resolution: 10 bit
- accuracy: 1 % referred to 20 mA
Setpoints, actual values and control signals inside the drive inverter are read-out
via the D/A converter using these analog input. The digital signal is converted into
an analog signal. All of the signals can be output via the D/A which contain the
"CO" abbreviation in the parameter text (refer to list of all of the BICO parameters
in the parameter list). Parameter P0771 defines, by assigning the parameter
number, the quantity which is output as analog signal through the DAC channel
(refer to Fig. 3-27). The smoothed output frequency is output, e.g. via the analog
output, if P0771 = 21.
D/A conv.
channel
D
A
KL
KL
D/A conv.−
D/A conv.+r0755 Pxxxxrxxxx P0771
...
Function
r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG
r0021 CO: Act. filtered frequency
r0024 CO: Act. filtered output freq.
r0025 CO: Act. filtered output voltage
r0026 CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt.
r0027 CO: Act. filtered output current
r0052 CO/BO: Act. status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Act. status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Act. control word 1
...
0...20mA
Fig. 3-27 Signal output through the DAC channel
In order to adapt the signal, the DAC channel has several function units (filter,
scaling, dead zone) which can be used to modify the digital signal before
conversion (refer to Fig. 3-28).
P0777
P0778
P0779
P0780
Fig. 3-28 DAC channel
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 97
NOTE
The analog output only provides the current output (0 ... 20 mA). A 0 ... 10 V
voltage signal can be generated by connecting a 500 Ohm resistor across the
output.
With parameter P0775 = 1, negative values can be avoided on the input side of the
DAC channel. If this parameter is activated, the absolute value is always entered in
the input of the DAC scaling (the DAC characteristic is mirrored on the Y axis).
If the value was originally a negative one, the corresponding bit in r0785 is set for
detection.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
98 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.7 Communications
Parameter range: P2009 – r2091
Function chart number:
CB at COM link FP2700, FP2710
USS at COM link FP2600, FP2610
USS at BOP link FP2500, FP2510
MICROMASTER 420 has 2 serial communication interfaces which can be
simultaneously used. These interfaces are designated as follows in the following
text:
BOP link
COM link
Different units, such as the BOP and AOP operator panels, PCs with the start-up
software DriveMonitor and STARTER, interface modules for PROFIBUS DP,
DeviceNet and CAN as well as programmable controls with communication
processors can be connected at this interface (refer to Fig. 3-21).
1) Option: BOP/AOP door mounting kit
for single inverter control
BOP USS
RS232
USS
RS232
BOP
DriveMonitor/
STARTER
AOP
CB
BOP link
PROFIBUS
board
DeviceNet
board
CAN
board
COM link
CB CB
USS
RS485
AOP
USS
RS485
DriveMonitor/
STARTER
14
15
1) 1)
3)*
1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit
for single inverter control
2)*
2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit
3) Option: AOP door mounting kit
for multiple inverter control (USS)
4)*
4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter
Fig. 3-29 Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 99
The BOP, a programming / operator unit (e.g. AOP, PC with DriveMonitor /
STARTER) or a programmable control with communications processor can be
connected via this BOP link. Data transfer between MICROMASTER and the
programming / operator units is realized using the USS protocol via the RS232
interface (point-to-point data coupling). Communications between the BOP and
MICROMASTER uses an optimized interface which takes into consideration the
somewhat limited resources of the BOP. If the BOP is replaced by an USS unit
(PC, AOP), then MICROMASTER automatically identifies the interface of the new
unit. This is also true for the inverse replacement sequence. The BOP link interface
can be adapted to the particular unit using the following parameters (refer to Table
3-12).
Table 3-12 BOP link
BOP link – interface
BOP on BOP link USS on BOP link
No parameter P2009[1]
P2010[1]
P2011[1]
P2012[1]
P2013[1]
P2014[1]
r2015
P2016
r2024[1]
r2025[1]
r2026[1]
r2027[1]
r2028[1]
r2029[1]
r2030[1]
r2031[1]
r2032
r2033
Communication modules (CB) such as PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, CANopen and also
programming / operator units (e.g. PCs with the DriveMonitor / STARTER start-up
software and AOP) as well as programmable controls with communication
processor can be connected to the COM link. The plug connector allows the
communication modules to be connected to MICROMASTER. On the other hand,
the programming / operator units must be connected to the MICROMASTER
through terminals 14/15. As for the BOP link, data is transferred between
MICROMASTER and the programming / operator unit using the USS protocol. In
so doing, for the COM link, the USS protocol is transferred via the bus-capable
RS485 interface. Essentially the same as the BOP link, the COM link also
automatically defines if a communications module is replaced with a USS unit (PC,
AOP). The COM link can be adapted to the particular unit using the following
parameters (refer to Table 3-13).
Table 3-13 COM link
COM link – interface
CB on COM link USS on COM link
P2040
P2041
r2050
P2051
r2053
r2054
r2090
r2091
P2009[0]
P2010[0]
P2011[0]
P2012[0]
P2013[0]
P2014[0]
r2018
P2019
r2024[0]
r2025[0]
r2026[0]
r2027[0]
r2028[0]
r2029[0]
r2030[0]
r2031[0]
r2036
r2037
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
100 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
NOTE
A communications (CB) module as well as a programming / operator unit can
be simultaneously connected to the COM link interface via terminals 14/15
(USS). This is the reason that the communications module has priority over
USS. In this case, the USS node (USS station) via the COM link is de-activated.
Contrary to PROFIBUS, the RS485 port (terminals 14/15) is not optically
isolated (not floating). When installing the system, it must be ensured that EMC
faults do not result in communication failures or damage to the RS485 drivers.
3.7.1 Universal serial interface (USS)
Parameter range: P2009 – r2037
Significance COM link BOP link
USS basic setting
USS baud rate P2010[0] P2010[1]
USS address P2011[0] P2011[1]
USS-PZD length P2012[0] P2012[1]
USS-PKW length P2013[0] P2013[1]
PZD data
Received data r2018[8] r2015[8]
Received control word 1 r2036 r2032
Received control word 2 r2037 r2033
Sent data P2019[8] P2016[8]
Sent status word 1 r0052 r0052
Sent status word 2 r0053 r0053
Alarms: ---
Faults: F0071, F0072
Function chart number: FP2500, FP2510, FP2600, FP2610
Features:
- electrical features: Not electrically isolated USS at the BOP link with PC-
converter connecting set
Not electrically isolated USS at COM link
(terminals 14 / 15)
- cycle time (MM420): 8 ms (process data PZD)
Background (parameter ID value PKW)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 101
Baud rate + interval time
Telegram length
Number of nodes (slave)
Master
cycle,masterT
Slave
(MICROMASTER)
cycle,USST cycle,slave(MM4)T
NOTE
From the user’s perspective, the total cycle time between the master and slave is of significance. As
shown in the diagram above, this time depends on several factors.
Fig. 3-30 Cycle times
Using the USS protocol, a user can establish a serial point-to-point data link and a
serial bus data link between a higher-level master system and several slave
systems. Master systems can be, for example, PLCs (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200) or
PCs. MICROMASTER drive converters are always the slaves on the bus system.
The USS protocol allows the user to implement both automation tasks with cyclical
telegram traffic (→ a fixed telegram length is necessary) as well as visualization
tasks. In this case, the protocol with variable telegram length is advantageous, as
texts and parameter descriptions can be transferred in one telegram without
chopping up the information.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
102 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.7.1.1 Protocol specification and bus structure
The USS protocol has the following significant features:
Supports
a multi-point-capable link, e.g. EIA RS 485 hardware or
a point-to-point link, e.g. EIA RS 232
Master-slave access technique
Single-master system
Maximum 32 nodes (max. 31 slaves)
Operation with variable or fixed telegram length
Simple, reliable telegram frames
The same bus mode of operation as with the PROFIBUS (DIN 19245 Part 1)
Data interface to the basic unit according to PROFILE variable-speed drives.
This means that, when the USS is being used, information is transferred to the
drive in the same way as with the PROFIBUS-DP.
Can be used for start-up, service and automation
PC-based service tools (e.g. STARTER and DriveMonitor)
Can be easily implemented in customized systems
Protocol specification
The USS protocol defines an access technique according to the master-slave
principle for communications via a serial bus. The point-to-point link is included as
a sub-quantity.
One master and a maximum of 31 slaves can be connected to the bus. The
individual slaves are selected by the master using an address character in the
telegram. A slave can never transmit without first being initiated by the master so
that direct information transfer between individual slaves is not possible. The
master function cannot be transferred (single-master system). The following
illustration shows a bus configuration using drive technology as an example.
MICROMASTER
Higher-level computer
"Master"
MICROMASTER MICROMASTER MICROMASTER
"Slave""Slave""Slave""Slave"
Fig. 3-31 Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer
(master)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 103
The telegram has the following structure:
Each telegram begins with the start character STX (= 02 hex), followed by the
length information (LGE) and the address byte (ADR). The net characters then
follow. The telegram is terminated by the BCC (Block Check Character).
For single-word data (16 bit) in the net data block (= net character block), the
high byte (first character) is always sent and then the low byte (second
character).
The same applies to double-word data: the high word is sent first followed by
the low word.
The necessary settings / parameter assignments must be made both at the
master as well as at the slave and can no longer be changed in bus operation.
The protocol does not identify tasks in the net characters. The contents of the
net characters/data for the MICROMASTER drives is discussed in Section
3.7.1.2 "Structure of the net data".
n net characters
STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC
Fig. 3-32 Telegram structure
Information is coded as follows:
Abbreviation Significance Size Explanation
STX Start of text ASCII characters 02 hex
LGE Telegram length 1 byte Contains the telegram length
ADR Address 1 byte Contains the slave address and the
telegram type (binary coded)
--- Net characters Each one byte Net data, contents are dependent on
the request
BCC Block check
character
1 byte Data security characters
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
104 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
In the address byte, information other than the node number is coded:
The individual bits in the address byte are assigned as follows:
= 1: Broadcast, address bits (No. 0 to 4) are not evaluated
= 0: No broadcast
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC
n net characters
Bit No.
Slave nodes No. 0 to 31
= 1: Mirror telegram
= 0: No mirror telegram
= 1: Special telegram (for an explanation, see below)
= 0: Standard; bits 0 to 6 are valid and must be evaluated
Fig. 3-33 Assignment of the address byte (ADR)
The master ensures cyclical telegram data transfer. The master addresses all of
the slave nodes one after the other with a task telegram. The addressed nodes
respond with a reply telegram. In accordance with the master-slave procedure, the
slave, after receiving the task telegram, must send the reply telegram to the master
before the master can address the next slave node.
The sequence of the addressed slave nodes can be specified, for example, by
entering the node numbers (ADR) in a circulating list (polling list) in the master. If it
is necessary to address several slaves in a faster cycle than the other slaves, their
node number can occur several times in the circulating list. A point-to-point link can
be implemented by means of the circulating list, in which case only one node is
entered into the circulating list.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 105
Example of configuration
1 3 57 21 0
0
1
3
5
0
7
21
1
3
5
0
1
0
1
7
21
Master
Circulating list
in the master
MICROMASTER with the addresses 0, 1, 3, 5, 7 and 21
Nodes 0 and 1 are signalled twice as often as others
Fig. 3-34 Circulating list (Example of configuration)
The length of a cycle time is determined by the time needed for the sequential
occurrence of data exchange with the individual nodes.
Cycle time
0 0 1 1 0 0 t
Telegram run time for reply from node 1
Reply delay time from node 1
Telegram run time for task for node 1
Processing time in the master
Fig. 3-35 Cycle time
Due to inconstant reply delay and processing times, the cycle time is not fixed.
The STX start character (= 02 hexadecimal) by itself is not sufficient for the slaves
to clearly identify the start of a telegram because the bit combination
02/hexadecimal can also occur in the net characters. For this reason, a no-
character start interval of at least 2 character run-times before the STX is specified
for the master. The start interval is part of the task telegram.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
106 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-14 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates
Baud rate in bit/s Start interval in ms
2400 9,20 ms
4800 4,60 ms
9600 2,30 ms
19200 1,15 ms
38400 0,57 ms
57600 0,38 ms
76800 0,29 ms
93750 0,24 ms
115200 0,19 ms
Only an STX with a preceding start interval identifies the valid start of a telegram.
Data is always transferred in accordance with the diagram illustrated below (half-
duplex mode):
Master transmits
Start
pause
STX LGE ADR 1. n BCC
STX LGE ADR 1. BCCBCC
STX
Slave transmits
Reply delay
time
Start
pause
Fig. 3-36 Transmit sequence
The time interval between the last character of the task telegram (BCC) and the
start of the reply telegram (STX) is known as the reply delay time. The maximum
permissible reply delay time is 20 ms, but it must not be less than the start
interval. If node x does not respond within the maximum permissible reply delay
time, an error message is deposited in the master.
The master than sends the telegram for the next slave node.
Bus structure
The data transfer medium and the physical bus interface are essentially
determined by what the bus system is used for. The physical interface of the USS
protocol is based on the "Recommended Standard RS-485". For point-to-point
links, a sub-quantity of EIA RS-232 (CCITT V.24) or TTY (20 mA current loop) can
be used as the physical interface.
The USS bus is based on a linear topology without branches. Both ends of the line
terminate at a node. The maximum cable length (50 m) and therefore the maximum
distance between the master and the last slave is limited by the characteristics of
the cable, the ambient conditions and the data transfer rate [EIA Standard RS-422-
A Dezember 1978, Appendix, Page 14]
The number of nodes is limited to a maximum of 33 (1 master, 32 slaves).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 107
Master
SlaveMaximum 32 slaves
First node Last node
SlaveSlave
Fig. 3-37 USS bus topology
The two ends of a bus line (first node and last node) must be terminated with bus
terminating networks. (refer to Section 3.7.1.3). Point-to-point connections are
handled just like bus connections. One node has the master function and the other
has the slave function.
Data is transferred in accordance with Standard EIA 485. RS 232 can be used for
point-to-point links. Data transfer is always half-duplex − i.e. alternating between
transmitting and receiving − and it must be controlled by the software. The half-
duplex technique allows the same cables to be used for both data-transfer
directions. This permits simple and inexpensive bus cabling, operation in
environments subject to interference and a high data transfer rate.
A shielded, twisted two-wire cable is used as the bus cable.
Table 3-15 Structural data
Conductor diameter 2 x ≈ 0,5 mm
2
Conductor ≥ 16 x ≤ 0,2 mm
Lay ratio ≥ 20 twists / m
Overall shield Braided, tin-plated copper wire, diameter ∅ ≥ 1,1 mm
2
85 % optical coverage
Overall diameter -∅ 5 mm
External sheath
Depending on the requirements regarding flame retardation,
deposits after burning etc.
NOTE
All information should only be considered as a recommendation.
Deviations or different measures may be required depending on the particular
requirements, the specific application and the conditions on site.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
108 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-16 Thermal and electrical characteristics
Cable resistance (20°C) ≤ 40 Ω/km
Insulation resistance (20°C) ≥ 200 MΩ/km
Operating voltage (20°C) ≥ 300 V
Test voltage (20°C) ≥ 1500 V
Temperature range -40 °C ≤ T ≥ 80 °C
Load capability ≥ 5 A
Capacitance ≤ 120 pF/m
Mechanical characteristics
Single bending: ≤ 5 x outer diameter
Repeated bending: ≤ 20 x outer diameter
Recommendations
Standard cable, without any special requirements:
Two-core, flexible, shielded conductor in accordance with VDE 0812, with
colored PVC sheath. PVC insulation resistant to oil, resistant to cold and
petroleum products.
Type: LiYCY 2 x 0,5 mm2
e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de
Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin
Halogen-free cable (no hydrochloric acid is generated when the cable burns):
Halogen-free, highly flexible, resistant to extreme heat and cold. Sheath
manufactured from a special ASS silicon-based composite.
Type: ASS 1 x 2 x 0,5 mm2
e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de
Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin
Recommended if halogen-free and silicon-free cables are required:
Type: BETAflam 145 C-flex. 2x0,5 mm2
e.g. Fa. Studer-Kabel-AG, http://www.studer-kabel.ch/
Herrenmattstrasse 20, CH 4658 Däniken
The total cable length of the USS connection may not exceed 50 m (max. cable
length).
The max. data transfer rate depends on the number of connected nodes (devices)
as well as on the closed-loop control technique / function selection (processor
utilization). Nominal values can be taken from the following table:
Table 3-17 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate
Max. data transfer rate Max. number of nodes (devices)
V/f control Closed-loop vector control
9.6 kbit/s 32 32
19.2 kbit/s 32 32
38.4 kbit/s 32 7
93.7 kbit/s 32 -
115.2 kbit/s 32 -
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 109
NOTE
If a higher baud rate or higher number of nodes is required, then the CB option
boards (e.g. PROFIBUS, CAN) should be used to ensure disturbance-free
operation.
3.7.1.2 The structure of net data
Information which, for example, a SIMATIC S7 control unit (= master) sends to a
drive (= slave) or the drive sends to the control unit is placed in the net-data area of
each telegram.
General structure of the net-data block
The net-data block is divided into two areas:
the PKW (parameter ID value) range
the PZD (process data) range
The structure of the net data in the USS-protocol telegram is shown below.
Protocol frame
Parameter ID value
(parameter area)
STX LGE ADR
(PKW) (PZD)
BCC
PKW: PZD: Process data
(process-data area)
Process dataParameter
Net data
Fig. 3-38 Telegram structure
The PKW area relates to the handling of the parameter ID value (PKW)
interface. The PKW interface is not a physical interface but a mechanism which
handles parameter transfer between two communication partners (e.g. control
unit and drive). This involves, for example, reading and writing parameter
values and reading parameter descriptions and associated texts.
All tasks which are performed via the PKW interface essentially involve operator
control and visualization, service and diagnosis.
The PZD area contains the signals required for the automation system:
• Control word(s) and setpoint(s) from the master to the slave
• Status word(s) and actual value(s) from the slave to the master.
PKW area
PKE IND PZD1 • • • PZD16
PZD area
PKW elements
variable length variable length
Fig. 3-39 Structure of the PKW and PZD areas
The two areas together make up the net data block. This structure applies to
telegrams from the master to the slave and vice versa.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
110 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
PKW area
With the help of the PKW mechanism, the following tasks can be performed via any
serial interface with the USS protocol:
Reading and writing parameters
Reading the description of a parameter
The PKW area can be varied. Depending on the requirements, the following
lengths can be parameterized using parameter P2013:
3 words P2013 = 3
4 words P2013 = 4
variable word length P2013 = 127
The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to
single-word (16 bit) parameter values. The PKW area must be permanently set to
3 words at the master and the slave. This setting is made during start-up and
should not be altered any more during bus operation.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word
PKE IND PWE1
Parameter ID Index Parameter value 1
The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to
double-word (32 bit) parameter values. Parameterization to a fixed length of 4
words applies to telegrams from the master to the slave and from the slave to the
master.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word
PKE IND PWE1 PWE2
Parameter ID Index Parameter value (double word)
Telegram data transfer with variable telegram length (refer to the following
example) means that the slave responds to a telegram from the master with a
telegram whose length does not have to be the same length as the telegram from
the master to the slave.
1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word (m+2). word
PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 . . . . .
With:
1 word ≤ m ≤ 118 words (maximum) when 8 PZD words (maximum) are
contained in the net data block.
1 word ≤ m ≤ 126 words (maximum) when there is no PZD.
The length of elements PEW1 to PWEm in the reply telegram and what is
contained in them depends on the task issued by the master. Variable length
means that only the number of words necessary to pass on the appropriate
information is transferred. The minimum length, however. is always 3 words. If a
slave, for example, transfers a parameter value which is a 16-bit quantity (e.g. the
status word in parameter r0052; data format: U16), then only 3 words of the PKW
area are sent in the telegram from the slave to the master. If, for example, for
MICROMASTER the actual frequency is to be read (parameter r0021), then the
PKW area in the telegram from the slave to the master is 4 words large; the reason
for this is that the speed is represented as 32-bit quantity (data format: Float). It is
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 111
mandatory to parameterize for a variable word length, if e.g. all values are to be
read at once from an “indexed” parameter (refer to "Index", special setting, index =
255). This setting to variable word-length is made during start-up. (refer to
parameter P2013).
Parameter ID (PKE) 1st
word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.:
AK
SP
M
PNU1
Parameter index (IND) 2nd
word
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.:
PNU2 RES TXT Index
Parameter value (PWE)
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.:
Parameter value, high (PWE1) 3rd
word
Parameter value, low (PWE2) 4th
word
The following applies:
AK Task or reply ID
SPM Toggle bit for processing of parameter-change reports
(MICROMASTER does not support this, SPM = 0)
PNU Parameter number
RES Reserved
TXT Read / write from parameter text
(MICROMASTER does not support this, TXT = 0)
CAUTION
Do not use a variable word length if SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 is the master.
This setting must be made both at the master as well as at the slave – and
cannot be changed while the bus is operational.
NOTE
The PKW area is transferred in increasing order, always starting with the 1st
word.
Reserved fields or functions that are not supported should be specifically pre-
assigned zero in the master implementation.
The bit 11 (SPM) is the toggle bit for parameter change reports. Parameter
change reports when reading/writing parameter texts are not supported by
MICROMASTER.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
112 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Task or reply ID (AK):
Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the task or reply ID. The task IDs are sent in the
telegram from the master to the slave. The meaning of the IDs is listed in the
following table.
Table 3-18 Task IDs (master -> drive converter)
Reply ID
Task ID Meaning
positive negative
0 No task 0 -
1 Request parameter value 1 or 2 7
2 Change parameter value (word) and save only in RAM 1 7 or 8
3 Change parameter value (double word) and save only in
RAM
2 7 or 8
4 Request descriptive element
1
3 7
5 Changing the descriptive element
1
MICROMASTER does not support this
3 7 or 8
6 Request parameter value (array)
1
4 or 5 7
7 Change parameter value (array, word)
2
and save only in
RAM
4 7 or 8
8 Change parameter value (array, double word)
2
and save
only in RAM
5 7 or 8
9 Request the number of array elements 6 7
10 Reserved - -
11 Change parameter value (array, double word) and save in
RAM and EEPROM
2 5 7 or 8
12 Change parameter value (array, word) and save in RAM
and EEPROM
2 4 7 or 8
13 Change parameter value (double word) and save in RAM
and EEPROM
2 7 or 8
14 Change parameter value (word) and save in RAM and
EEPROM
1 7 or 8
15 Read or change text
MICROMASTER does not support this
15 7 or 8
1
The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word)
2
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 113
Correspondingly, the Response IDs are transferred in the telegram from the slave
to the master at this position. Depending on the request ID, only specific response
IDs are possible.
Table 3-19 Response ID (converter -> master)
Response
ID
Significance
Request
ID
0 No response 0
1 Transfer parameter value (word) 1, 2 or 14
2 Transfer parameter value (double word) 1, 3 or 13
3 Transfer descriptive element
1
4 or 5
4 Transfer parameter value (array, word)
2
6, 7 or 12
5 Transfer parameter value (array, double word)
2
6, 8 or 11
6 Transfer the number of array elements 9
7 Request cannot be executed (with fault number) 1 or 15
8 The PKW interface does not have master authority
2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 11-
14 or 15
9
Parameter change report (word)
MICROMASTER does not support this
-
10
Parameter change report (double word)
MICROMASTER does not support this
-
11
Parameter change report (array, word)
2
MICROMASTER does not support this
-
12
Parameter change report (array, double word)
2
MICROMASTER does not support this
-
13 Reserved -
14 Reserved -
15
Transfer text
MICROMASTER does not support this
15
1
The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word)
2
The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
114 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
If the response ID has the value 7 (request cannot be executed), then a fault
number is saved in parameter value 2 (PWE2). The fault numbers are
documented in the following table.
Table 3-20 Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed"
Fault
No.
Significance
0 Inadmissible legal parameter number (PNU); if PNU is not available
1 Parameter value cannot be changed; if the parameter is a visualization parameter
2 Lower or upper limit exceeded
3 Erroneous sub-index
4 No array
5 Incorrect type of data
6 Setting not permitted (can only be reset)
7 Descriptive element cannot be changed; not possible
11 No operator control rights
12
Key word missing, device parameter: ‘access keyl’ and/or ‘special parameter access’
not appropriately set
15 No text array available
17
Request cannot be executed due to operating states;
The frequency inverter state presently does not allow the request that was issued
101
Parameter number presently de-activated;
In the present frequency inverter state, the parameter has no function (e.g. closed-loop
control type)
102
Channel width too small: Only for short channels;
the parameterized length of the PKW area has been selected too large due to the
restrictions in the device. This fault message can only occur for the USS protocol on
the technology module T 100 if basic device parameters are accessed from this
interface
103
Incorrect PKW number; only for G-SST 1/2 and SCB interface (USS).
The fault number is transferred in the following two cases:
If the request involves all indices of an indexed parameter (request index equal to 255)
or the complete parameter description is requested and a variable telegram length
was not parameterized.
If, for the request issue, the parameterized number of PKW data in the telegram is too
low (e.g.: Changing from a double word and PKW number equal to 3 (words).
104
Parameter value not permissible;
This fault number is transferred if the parameter value – that is to be transferred – is not
assigned any function in the device or at the time of the change it is not able to be
transferred for internal reasons (although it lies within the limits).
105
The parameter is indexed
e.g. request: ‘PWE, change word’ for indexed parameters
106 Request not implemented
200 New minimum value
201 New maximum value
203
No BOP/AOP display,
Parameter cannot be displayed on the BOP or AOP.
204 The ‘BOP/AOP key word’ does not match the parameter access stage.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 115
Parameter number (PNU)
The complete parameter number (refer to the parameter list) is formed from the
"basis parameter number” PNU1 and the "page parameter number” PNU2. The
following applies:
PNU = PNU1 + 2000 • PNU2
With PNU2 definition:
PNU2 2nd
word
15 14 13 12 Bit No.:
2
0
2
3
2
2
2
1
Weighting
The parameter areas are mapped using PNU1 and PNU2 as follows:
Basis parameter number
PNU1
bits 0 – 10 (PKE)
Page parameter number
PNU2
bits 12 – 15 (IND)
Parameter number
(area)
0 ... 1999 0 0 ... 1999
0 ... 1999 1 2000 ... 3999
0 ... 1999 2 4000 ... 5999
0 ... 1999 3 6000 ... 7999
0 ... 1999 4 8000 ... 9999
... ... ...
0 ... 1999 15 30000 ... 31999
Index
The index (bit 0 to 7), depending on the task, describes a definite element:
desired array element in the case of indexed parameters,
desired element of the parameter description,
Special significance of index value 255
For the following requests, the index value 255 has a special significance:
"request parameter descriptive element", or.
for the requests to read/write indexed parameters (= arrays)
Here, the following applies:
Task ID Meaning
4 The complete parameter description is requested
6
All values of the indexed parameters are requested
This request can generate fault message 102.
7, 8, 11
or 12
All values of the indexed parameters should be changed.
These requests can generate fault message 102.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
116 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Parameter value (PWE)
The parameter value (PWE) is transferred, depending on the parameterization of
the word length (refer to parameter "USS-PKW length" P2013) of the PKW area as
word or double word (32 bit). Only one parameter value can be transferred in a
telegram.
If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with 3 words (P2013 = 3), then
only 16-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements, that
are greater than 16 bit cannot be transferred.
If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized to be 4 words (P2013 = 4),
then 16 and 32-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements
that exceed 32 bits cannot be transferred.
If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with "variable length" (P2013
= 127), then 16, 32-bit parameter and parameter descriptive elements can be
transferred. Further, all elements of an indexed parameter can be read or changed
with a single request, as well as the complete parameter description requested if
the index corresponds to the value 255 (index = 255).
Transferring one 16-bit parameter value:
1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words:
The value is in PWE1
2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words:
The value is in PWE2 (least significant word, 4th
word); PWE1 is set to 0.
3. Variable PKW area:
The value is in PWE1. PWE2 and higher not available!
Transferring one 32-bit parameter value:
1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words:
Request is rejected with fault message 103.
2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words:
PWE1 (most significant word; 3rd
word) contains the high word of the double
word,
PWE2 (least significant word; 4th
word) contains the low word of the double
word.
3. Variable PKW area:
As for 2.; PWE3 and higher not available!
Process data area (PZD)
Process data is continually exchanged between the master and slaves in this area.
At the start of communications it is configured as to which process data is to be
exchanged with a slave. For instance, for slave x, the current setpoint is to be
transferred in the second PZD (= PZD2). This setting remains for the complete
data transfer.
1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word
PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8
PZD1 – PZD8 = process data
= control / status word(s) and setpoint / actual value(s));
The control / status word(s), setpoints and actual values required for the
automation are transferred in this area.
The length of the PZD area is defined by the number of PZD elements (P2012).
Contrary to the PKW area, that can be variable, the length of this area between the
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 117
communication partners (master and slave) must always be permanently declared.
The maximum number of PZD words per telegram is, for MICROMASTER, limited
to 8 words (USS-PZD length in MICROMASTER is set using parameter P2012). If
only PKW data are to be transferred in the net data block, then the number of the
PZD can also be 0!
Depending on the data transfer direction, always control word 1 or status word 1
are to be transferred in the PZD1. Depending on the data transfer direction, the
main setpoint or the main actual value is always transferred in PZD 2. Additional
setpoints or actual values are set in the following process data PZD3 to PZDn. For
MICROMASTER, if required, control word 2 or status word 2 should be transferred
in PZD4.
Request telegram, master ⇒ slave
PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8
Control word
1
Setpoint 1
Control word
2
Setpoint 2 . . . . . Setpoint 6
Response telegram, slave ⇒ master
PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8
Status word
1
Main actual
value 1
Actual value
2
status word
2
Actual value
3
. . . . .
Actual value
7
NOTE
A maximum of 8 PZD words
A minimum of 0 PZD words - i.e. no PZD area in the net data area
On the USS bus, PZD n is always transferred before PZD n+1.
For MICROMASTER, double words cannot be transferred in the PZD section.
Data received from MICROMASTER is always interpreted as 16-bit words. The
appropriate de-normalization is implemented by assigning the appropriate
parameters.
If MICROMASTER sends data to the master via the PZD area, then for physical
quantities, a normalization is made to a 16-bit value (4000 hex notation).
The setpoint can be freely assigned to the actual value; This means for example
that the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request telegram in PZD2 so the
actual frequency value can be signaled back in PZD2 in the response telegram
(this also makes sense from a technological/process perspective); or however,
also another actual value – such as the actual torque value, actual voltage
actual value or actual current value. The setpoint can be freely assigned to the
actual value; for example the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request
telegram in PZD2, which means that the actual frequency value can be signaled
back in the response telegram in PZD2 (this also makes sense from a
technological/process perspective) – or also another actual value – such as
actual torque value, actual voltage value or actual current value.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
118 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.7.1.3 USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485)
In order to ensure disturbance-free USS operation, the bus cable must be
terminated at both ends using bus terminating resistors. In this case, the bus cable
from the first node up to the last node should be considered as one bus cable – so
that the USS bus should be terminated twice. For the first bus node [device] (e.g.
master) and last bus node [device] (e.g. drive converter), th bus terminating
resistor must be switched-in.
NOTE
♦ When supplied, the bus terminating resistors are not switched-in!
♦ Please note that you only switch-in the bus terminating at the first bus node
[device] and last bus note! The bus terminating resistors should be always set
when the system is powered-down!
♦ Data transfer errors on the bus are possible!
In active bus operation, nodes where the terminating resistor is switched-in,
must always be powered-up. The terminating resistor draws the voltage from
the connected device. This is the reason that the terminating resistor is no
longer effective when the node is powered down .
The following diagram shows the structure of a bus connection through terminals
14, 15:
Screening
Screening Screening
Potential equilization cable
RS485terminator
RS485terminator
Master
0 V
(M)
• a terminating resistor must be connected at the first and last node on the bus cable
• no bus termination for other nodes
Fig. 3-40 Connecting the USS bus cable
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 119
When the MICROMASTER is used in an RS485 bus communications network the
following is required:
1. A power supply
2. A terminating resistor between P+ and N- at both bus ends
(refer to Fig. 3-41)
Control terminals
RS485 terminator
14
P+
15
N-
1
+10 V
2
0 V
to terminal 2 of the next slave
Fig. 3-41 Connecting the RS485 terminator
If the frequency inverter is the last slave on the bus (refer to Fig. 3-40), then the P+
and N- of the RS485 terminator provided must be connected there to the RS485
terminals (refer to Fig. 3-41). P10 and 0 V can be connected to terminals 1 and 2
for the power supply.
If the first or last node is not a MICROMASTER 4 the bus should be terminated
between P+ and N- with a resistor (with a value between 120 Ω and 220 Ω ).
The bus must be biassed (pull-up resistor from P+ to P5 or P10, pull-down from N-
to 0 V) at one or both ends. If the first and/or the last node is not a
MICROMASTER 4 (e.g. a S7-200 series PLC), the bus can be biassed by
connecting a 390 Ω resistor from P+ to P5 and a 390 Ω pull-down resistor from N-
to 0 V.
SIMATIC PROFIBUS connectors, e.g. 6ES7972-0BA41-0XA0, can be used for
biassing and termination when the first or last node is an S7-200 series PLC.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
120 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
NOTE
When making the installation it must be ensured that EMC disturbances/noise
cannot result in communication failures/errors or damage to the RS485 drivers.
As a minimum, the following measures must be taken:
1) Shield the motor cable and correctly ground the shield at both ends. If at all
possible, avoid interruptions in the cables. If this cannot be avoided, then it
must be ensured that the shield continues in an EMC-correct fashion at the
connecting locations.
2) All node points must be well grounded (EMC ground).
3) All relay coils must be provided with noise suppression elements.
4) The cables should be routed - as far as possible - separately from other
cables. For RS485 cables it is especially important that they are kept well
away from motor cables.
5) The shields of RS485 cables must be correctly grounded.
If the AOP communicates via the USS protocol, then contrary to the BOP, the
appropriate USS parameters (Table 3-12 and Table 3-13) should be set.
For error-free communications, the appropriate communication parameters
must be harmonized with one another and correctly set - in the frequency
inverter, the connected device and/or in the connected option board. Please
refer to the corresponding Operating Instructions for the AOP and for the
communications modules.
While RS485 communications is operational the power supply must always be
available using pull-up/pull-down resistors.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 121
3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF)
Number: 8
Parameter range: P1001 – r1024
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP3200, FP3310
A setpoint can be entered via the analog input, the serial communication
interfaces, the JOG function, the motorized potentiometer as well as also using
fixed frequencies. The fixed frequencies are defined using parameters P1001 –
P1007 and selected via binector inputs P1020 – P1022. The effective fixed
frequency setpoint is available via connector output r1024 which means that it can
be connected further. If this is to be used as setpoint source, then either parameter
P1000 or P0719 should be modified or BICO parameter r1024 should be
connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075. Contrary
to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly changes
BICO parameters P1070, P1075.
Example: Fixed frequencies as setpoint source
a) Standard method → P1000 = 3
b) BICO method → P1070 = 1024, P1075 = 0
3 methods are available when selecting the fixed frequencies.
Direct selection
In this particular mode, the control signal directly selects the fixed frequency. This
control signal is entered via the binector inputs. If several fixed frequencies are
simultaneously active, then the selected frequencies are added.
Table 3-21 Example for direct coding via digital inputs
FF1 P1001 0 0 1
FF2 P1002 0 1 0
FF3 P1003 1 0 0
FF1+FF2 0 1 1
…
…
FF1+FF2+FF3 1 1 1
DIN3 DIN2 DIN1
FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
122 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
The fixed frequencies can be selected via the digital inputs as well as also via
serial communication interfaces. The fixed frequency is selected, when using digital
inputs, using 2 techniques. This will be shown in the following example using the
fixed frequency P1001 and digital input 1 (refer to Fig. 3-42).
a) Standard methods → P0701 = 15
b) BICO methods → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1
P1016
P0701 = 15 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1
DIN1
r1024
r0722.0
P1020
1
2,3
P1001
0
0
P0702 = 15 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 1
P1017
DIN2 r0722.1
P1021
1
2,3
P1002
0
0
....
+
...
+
Fig. 3-42 Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2
Direct selection + ON command
When this fixed frequency is selected, the fixed frequencies are also directly
selected whereby the selection is combined with the ON command. When this
technique is used, a separate ON command is not required. The following is
obtained essentially analog to the example shown above:
a) Standard method → P0701 = 16
b) BICO method → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 2
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 123
Binary-coded selection + ON command
Using this technique up to 8 fixed frequencies can be selected using 3 control
signals. These control signals are either entered via digital inputs or a serial
communications interface. The fixed frequencies are indirectly selected using the
binary coding (refer to Table 3-22, → e.g. selected using the digital DIN inputs),
whereby the selection is combined with the ON command.
Table 3-22 Example for binary coding via digital inputs
DIN3 DIN2 DIN1
0 Hz FF0 0 0 0
P1001 FF1 0 0 1
P1002 FF2 0 1 0
… … … … …
… … … … …
P1006 FF6 1 1 0
P1007 FF7 1 1 1
Contrary to "Direct selection + ON command", the ON command is only active if
the setting for the first 3 binary inputs is set to "Binary-coded selection + ON
command" or P0701 = P0702 = P0703 = 17. The following is obtained analog to
the above example:
a) Standard method → P0701 = 17
b) BICO method → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3
P1016
P0701 = 17 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3
DIN1 r0722.0
P1020
1
2,30
P0702 = 17 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 3
P1017
DIN2 r0722.1
P1021
1
2,30
....
0 0 1
1 1 1
Fixed frequency 7
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1007.D (30.00)
r1024
CO: Act. FF
Fixed frequency 1
-650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz]
P1001.D (0.00)
.
.
.
.
.
.
...
Fig. 3-43 Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded
method
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
124 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP)
Parameter range: P1031 – r1050
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP3100
This function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer to enter setpoints. The
motorized potentiometer value is adjusted using the "Raise" and "Lower control
signal" which is selected using BICO parameters P1035 and P1036 (refer to Fig.
3-44). The value which has been set is available through connector output r1050
so that it can be further connected and used.
Fig. 3-44 Motorized potentiometer
Selecting via serial interfaces
The MOP functionality can be selected via the operator panels (refer to Section
3.1.3), digital inputs as well as via serial interfaces (refer to the example).
Parameterization is also possible directly using BICO parameters P1035 and
P1036 as well as also parameters P0700 and P0719. In this case, for a value
assigned to P0700, the BICO parameter is appropriately modified.
Example: Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface
a) Standard method → P0700 = 4
b) BICO method → P1035 = 2032.13
P1036 = 2032.14
::::
(refer to P0700 for a complete list)
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 125
If the motorized potentiometer is to be used as setpoint source, then either
parameter P1000 or P0719 should be modified or the BICO parameter r1050
should be connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075.
Contrary to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly
changes BICO parameters P1070, P1075.
Example: Setpoint via the motorized potentiometer (MOP)
a) Standard method → P1000 = 1
b) BICO method → P1070 = 1050
P1075 = 0
The MOP is configured using the following parameters and has the mode of
operation as shown in Table 3-23:
Limits using the minimum frequency P1080 or maximum frequency P1082
Ramp-up/ramp-down time P1120 or P1121
Inhibits MOP reversing function P1032
Saves the MOP setpoint P1031
MOP setpoint P1040
Table 3-23 Mode of operation of the MOP
Motorized potentiometer
Lower Raise
Function
0 0 Setpoint is frozen
0 1 Raise setpoint
1 0 Lower setpoint
1 1 Setpoint is frozen
Selecting via BOP or AOP
The following settings / operator actions should be made when selecting the
motorized potentiometer using the BOP or AOP:
Table 3-24 Selecting the motorized potentiometer
Parameters / keys BOP AOP (at the BOP link)
Command
source
P0700 1 4
P1000 1
P1035 - 2032.13 (2032.D)
P1036 - 2032.14 (2032.E)
Raise MOP output frequency
Setpoint
source
Lower MOP output frequency
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
126 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.10 JOG
Parameter range: P1055 – P1061
Warnings A0923
Faults -
Function chart number: FP5000
The JOG function is used as follows:
To check the functionality of the motor and drive inverter after commissioning
has been completed (the first traversing motion, checking the direction of
rotation, etc.)
Positioning a drive / a driven load into a specific position
Traversing a drive, e.g. after a program has been interrupted
The drive is traversed using this function by entering fixed frequencies P1058,
P1059. The JOG mode can be selected either using the operator panel (refer to
Section 3.1.3), digital inputs or also via the serial interfaces (refer to the example).
An ON/OFF command is not used to move the drive, but when the "JOG keys" are
pressed. These "JOG keys" are selected using the BICO parameters P1055 and
P1056.
JOG right
f
P1058
P1059
A0923 A0923
P1060
P1060
(0)
P1055
(0)
P1056
"1"
"0"
"1"
"0"
t
t
t
P1061
DIN
BOP
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB
COM link
JOG left
P1082
-P1082
P1061
Fig. 3-45 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 127
If both JOG keys are simultaneously pressed, then the instantaneous frequency is
kept (constant velocity phase) and alarm A0923 is output. When a key is pressed,
the drive inverter accelerates the motor to the fixed frequency in the time entered in
P1060. This frequency is only exited after the key has been cancelled and the drive
then brakes down to 0 Hz in the time entered in P1061.
In addition to the explicit parameterization (P1055 and P1056), the JOG
functionality is also enabled via parameter P0700 or P0719 (implicit
parameterization). In this case, if a value is assigned to P0700, the BICO
parameter is appropriately modified.
Example: Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface
a) Standard method → P0700 = 4
b) BICO method → P1055 = 2032.8
P1056 = 2032.9
::::
(refer to P0700 for a complete list)
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
128 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.11 PID controller (technological controller)
Parameter range: P2200
P2201 – r2294
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310, FP3400, FP5100
Features:
- cycle time: 8 ms
MICROMASTER has an integrated technological controller (PID controller, enabled
via P2200). This can be used to process basic higher-level control functions. These
typically include:
Pressure control for extruders
Water level control for pump drives
Temperature control for fan drives
And similar control tasks
The technological setpoints and actual values can be entered via the PID
motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP), PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF), analog input
(ADC) or via serial interfaces (USS on BOP link, USS on COM link, CB on COM
link) (refer to the example). The appropriate parameterization of the BICO
parameter defines which setpoints or actual values are to be used (refer to Fig.
3-46).
PID
MOP
ADC
PID
SUM
PID
PID
FF
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB
COM link
P2254
P2253
PID
RFG
PID
PT1
−
∆PID
P2200
P2264
PID
PT1
PID
SCL
OutputPID
0
1
Motor
control
P2257
P2258
P2261
P2271
P2269
P2270
P2265
P2280
P2285
Fig. 3-46 Structure of the technological controller (PID controller)
NOTICE
Changes in parameter P2200 take effect only after a fresh ON command.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 129
Example: The permanent PID controller should fulfill the following
secondary conditions/limitations:
PID controller enable and PID setpoint input via PID fixed
frequencies and PID actual value via the analog input.
Parameterizations:
a. Permanent PID controller enable: P2200 = 1.0
b. Setpoint input via PID-FF: P2253 = 2224
c. Actual value input via analog input ADC: P2264 = 755
The supplementary (additional) setpoint is added to the main setpoint (PID-SUM)
and the sum is fed to the setpoint filter (PID-PT1) at the setpoint-actual value
summation point via the PID ramp-function generator (PID-RFG). The source of the
supplementary setpoint (BICO parameter P2254), the ramp-up / ramp-down times
of the PID ramp-function generator (P2257, P2258) as well as also the filter time
(P2261) can be adapted to the particular application by appropriately
parameterizing the corresponding parameters.
Similar to the PID setpoint branch, the actual value branch of the technological
controller has a filter (PID-PT1) which can be set using parameter P2265. In
addition to the smoothing, the actual value can be modified using a scaling unit
(PID-SCL).
The technological controller can be parameterized as either P, I or PI controller
using parameters P2280 and P2285.
Kp Tn
+
-
P2285P2280
r2273r2262
PID
feedback
Motor
control
x
y
P2291
P2293
P2293
P2292
r2294
PID
setpoint
r2272x
y
P2267
P2268
Fig. 3-47 PID controller
For specific applications, the PID output quantity can be limited to defined values.
This can be achieved using the fixed limits - P2291 and P2292. In order to prevent
the PID controller output exercising large steps at power-on, these PID output limits
are ramped-up with ramp time P2293 from 0 to the corresponding value P2291
(upper limit for the PID output) and P2292 (lower limit for the PID output). As soon
as these limits have been reached, the dynamic response of the PID controller is
no longer limited by this ramp-up/ramp-down time (P2293).
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
130 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.11.1 PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP)
Parameter range: P2231 – r2250
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP3400
The PID controller has a PID motorized potentiometer which can be separately
adjusted. The functionality is identical with the motorized potentiometer (refer to
Section 3.9), whereby the PID parameters are emulated in the range from P2231 –
r2250 (refer to the comparison → Table 3-25).
Table 3-25 Correspondence between the parameters
PID motorized potentiometer Motorized potentiometer
P2231[3] Setpoint memory of PID-MOP P1031[3] Setpoint memory of the MOP
P2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP P1032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP
P2235[3] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) P1035[3] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command)
P2236[3] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) P1036[3] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command)
P2240[3] Setpoint of PID-MOP P1040[3] Setpoint of the MOP
r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP r1050 CO: Act. output freq. of the MOP
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 131
3.11.2 PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF)
Number: 7
Parameter range: P2201 – r2224
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310
Analog to the fixed frequencies (refer to Section 3.8), the PID controller has
separate programmable PID fixed setpoints. The values are defined using
parameters P2201 – P2207 and are selected using binector inputs P2220 – P2222.
The selected PID fixed setpoint is available via connector output r2224 where it can
be further processed (e.g. as PID main setpoint → P2253 = 2224).
3 methods are available to select the PID fixed setpoints, analog to the fixed
frequencies (Section 3.8):
Direct selection
Direct selection + ON command
Binary-coded selection + ON command
The methods are selected using parameters P2216 – P2218.
P2216
P0701 = 15
or
P0701 = 99, P2220 = 722.0, P2216 = 1
DIN1
r2224
r0722.0
P2220
1
2,3
P2201
0
. . . .
0
....
. . . .
Fig. 3-48 Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via
DIN1
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
132 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.12 Setpoint channel
The setpoint channel (refer to Fig. 3-49) forms the coupling element between the
setpoint source and the motor control. MICROMASTER has a special characteristic
which allows the setpoint to be entered simultaneously from two setpoint sources.
The generation and subsequent modification (influencing the direction, suppression
frequency, up/down ramp) of the complete setpoint is carried-out in the setpoint
channel.
MOP
ADC
FF
USS
BOP link
USS
COM link
CB
COM link
Setpoint source
Main
setpoint
Additonal
setpoint
SUM AFM Limit RFG
Setpoint channel
Motor
control
Motor
control
Fig. 3-49 Setpoint channel
3.12.1 Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM)
Parameter range: P1070 – r1114
Warnings -
Fault -
Function chart number: FP5000, FP5200
For applications where the control quantities are generated from central control
systems, fine tuning is often required locally on-site (correction quantity). For
MICROMASTER, this can be very elegantly realized using the summation point
where the main and supplementary (additional) setpoint are added in the setpoint
channel. In this case, both quantities are simultaneously read-in via two separate
or one setpoint source and summed in the setpoint channel. Depending on
external circumstances, the supplementary setpoint can be dynamically
disconnected or switched-in to the summation point (refer to Fig. 3-50). This
functionality can be used to advantage, especially for discontinuous processes.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 133
AFM Limit RFG
r1078
0 1
CI: Add. setp.scal
(1:0)
P1076.C
CI: Add. setpoint
(0:0)
P1075.C
(0:0)
BI: Disab.add.setp
P1074.C
CI: Main setp scal
(1:0)
P1071.C
CI: Main setpoint
(755:0)
P1070.C
+
+
Motor
control
Fig. 3-50 Summation
MICROMASTER has the following possibilities to select the setpoint source:
1. P1000 – selecting the frequency setpoint source
2. P0719 – selecting the command / setpoint source
3. BICO parameterization
- P1070 CI: Main setpoint
- P1075 CI: Additional setpoint
Further, the main setpoint as well as the supplementary (additional) setpoint can be
scaled independently of one another. In this case, for example, a user can simply
implement an override function using the appropriate parameterization.
A scan sequence is generally associated with a forwards and a backwards motion.
When selecting the reversing functionality, after reaching the end position, a
direction of rotation reversal can be initiated in the setpoint channel (refer to Fig.
3-51).
On the other hand, if it is to be prevented that a direction of rotation reversal or a
negative frequency setpoint is to be entered via the setpoint channel, then this can
be inhibited using BICO parameter P1110.
SUM
-1
0
1
0
1
P1113r1078 P1110 P1091 P1094
P1101
...
Skip Limit
P1080 P1082
RFG
Fig. 3-51 Modifying the frequency setpoint
Driven machines can have one or several resonance points in the range from 0 Hz
up to the reference frequency. These resonance points result in oscillations which,
under worst case conditions, can damage the driven load. Using suppression
frequencies, MICROMASTER allows these resonant frequencies to be passed
through as quickly as possible. This means that the suppression frequencies
increase the availability of the driven load over the long term.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
134 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.12.2 Ramp-function generator (RFG)
Parameter range: P1120, P1121
r1119, r1170
P1130 – P1142
Function chart number: FP5000, FP5300
The ramp-function generator is used to limit the acceleration when the setpoint
changes according to a step function. This therefore helps to reduce the stressing
on the mechanical system of the machine. An acceleration ramp and a braking
ramp can be set independently of one another using the ramp-up time P1120 and
the ramp-down time P1121. This allows a controlled transition when the setpoint is
changed (refer to Fig. 3-52).
Withoutrounding
t
f
fmax
P1120 P1121
f2
f1
f
fmax
P1133P1132P1131P1130 t
f2
f1
tup tdown
Withrounding
for P1131)P1130(
2
1
P1120
P1082
f-f 12
+≥⋅
P1120
P1082
f-fP1131)P1130(
2
1
t
12
up ⋅++=
for P1133)P1132(
2
1
P1121
P1082
f-f 12
+≥⋅
P1121
P1082
f-f
P1133)P1132(
2
1
t
12
down ⋅++=
Where the rounding times are increased to be greater than the ramp period then the ramp
period is determined by the following equations:
( ) ( )
( ) ⎟⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜⎜
⎝
⎛
+⋅
⎟
⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎛
+⋅
⋅⋅−⋅
=
1130P
1131P
1
1131P1130Pf
1130P1120Pff2
t
max
2
12
up
( ) ( )
( ) ⎟⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜⎜
⎝
⎛
+⋅
⎟
⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜
⎜
⎝
⎛
+⋅
⋅⋅−⋅
=
1132P
1133P
1
1133P1132Pf
1132P1120Pff2
t
max
2
12
down
Fig. 3-52 Ramp-function generator
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 135
In order to avoid torque surges at the transitions (constant velocity phase ←→
accelerating / braking phase), additional rounding-off times P1130 – P1133 can be
programmed. This is especially important for applications (e.g.
transporting/pumping liquids or for cranes) which require an especially "soft", jerk-
free acceleration and braking.
If the OFF1 command is initiated while the drive is accelerating, then rounding-off
can be activated or de-activated using parameter P1134 (refer to Fig. 3-53). These
rounding-off times are defined using parameters P1132 and P1133.
f
OFF1
ON
t
Setpoint reached
fSet
t
f
P1132 > 0
P1133 > 0
P1132
Setpoint reached
Setpoint not reached
fSet
t
Setpoint not reached
P1134 = 0
P1134 = 1
P1133 P1133P1132
P1132 P1133 P1133
Fig. 3-53 Rounding off after an OFF1 command
In addition to the rounding-off times, the ramp-function generator can be influenced
using external signals. The ramp-function generator provides the following
functionality using BICO parameters P1140, P1141 and P1142.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
136 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-26 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator
Parameter Description
P1140 BI: RFG enable The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 if the
binary signal = 0.
P1141 BI: RFG start The ramp-function generator output keeps its actual
value if the binary signal = 0.
P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint If the binary signal = 0, then the ramp-function
generator input is set to 0 and the output is reduced
to 0 via the ramp-function generator ramp.
The ramp-function generator itself is enabled after the pulses have been enabled
(inverter enable) and after the excitation time has expired (P0346). After limiting to
the maximum speeds for the positive and negative directions of rotation (P1082,
-P1082 or 0 Hz for the direction of rotation inhibit) the setpoint speed for the control
is obtained (r1170).
NOTE
The maximum drive inverter frequency is defined in the setpoint channel using
parameter P1080. The maximum possible frequency is 650 Hz.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 137
3.12.3 OFF/braking functions
Parameter range: P1121, P1135, P2167, P2168
P0840 – P0849
r0052 bit 02
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
The drive inverter and the user must respond to an extremely wide range of
situations and stop the drive. In this case, both requirements relating to operations
as well as drive inverter protective functions (e.g. electrical and thermal overload)
and man-machine protective functions have to be taken into account. As a result of
the different OFF/braking functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) MICROMASTER can
flexibly respond to the requirements mentioned above.
OFF1
The OFF1 command is closely coupled to the ON command. When the ON
command is withdrawn, then OFF1 is directly activated. The drive is braked by
OFF1 with the ramp-down time P1121. If the output frequency falls below the
parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter
pulses are cancelled.
t
P2168
t
P2167
Operation
actf
OFF1
P1082
fmax
r0052 Bit02
P1121
P1082
f
P1121t
2
1OFF,down ⋅=
tdown,OFF1
Pulse
cancellation
Fig. 3-54 OFF1
NOTE
OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO
parameter P0840 (BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing).
BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using
P0700.
The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source.
If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the
digital input that was last set, is valid, e.g. DIN3 is active.
OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking.
When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167
and P2168 are not taken into account.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
138 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
OFF2
The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. This means
that the motor coasts-down and it is not possible to brake in a controlled fashion.
t
t
Pulse
cancellation
Operation
actf
OFF2
P1082
fmax
r0052 Bit02
Fig. 3-55 OFF2
NOTE
The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources
are defined using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2.
OFF2).
As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to
the BOP. This source is still available even if another command source is
defined (e.g. terminal as command source → P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected
using DIN2 → P0702 = 3).
OFF3
The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the
exception of the autonomous OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency
falls below parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the
inverter pulses are cancelled as for the OFF1 command.
t
P2168
t
P2167
Operation
actf
OFF3
P1082
fmax
r0052 Bit02
P1135
P1082
f
P1135t
2
3OFF,down ⋅=
tdown,OFF3
Pulse
cancellation
Fig. 3-56 OFF3
NOTE
OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO
parameters P0848 (BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 139
3.12.4 Manual / automatic operation
Parameter range: P0719, P0810
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
It is necessary to change-over from the automatic mode into the manual mode to
load and unload production machines and to feed new materials (e.g. batch
processing). The machine operator carries-out the preparatory activities for
subsequent automatic operation in the manual mode. In the manual mode, the
machine operator locally controls the machine (enters the ON/OFF command as
well as also the setpoint). A changeover is only made into the automatic mode after
the set-up has been completed. In the automatic mode, the control (open-loop) of
the machines and production processes are handled by a higher-level control
system (e.g. PLC). This operation is maintained until it is necessary to again load
and unload the machine or feed new material into the machine or production
process.
For MICROMASTER 420, indexed parameter P0719 and BICO parameter P0810
are used to change over between the manual and automatic mode. The command
and setpoint sources are defined using P0719 (refer to Table 3-28), whereby
P0719 index 0 (P0719[0]) defines the automatic mode and P0719 index 1
(P0719[1]) the manual mode. BICO parameter P0810 is used to change-over
between the automatic and manual modes. P0810 can be controlled from any
control sources (refer to Table 3-27).
BOP
BOP
Setpoint
channel
Motor
control
Sequence control
MOP
ADC
FF
0
1
P0700
Terminals
P1000
USS
CB
CommandsourceSetpointsource
P0719[0] = 00
P0719[1] = 11
Cmd
Remote
Cmd
Local
0
1
P0719[0] = 00
P0719[1] = 11
Setpoint
Remote
Setpoint
Local
P0810P0810
Fig. 3-57 Changing-over using the BICO parameter P0810
Table 3-27 Examples for the parameter settings of P0810
Parameter setting Command source
P0810 = 722.2 requires P0703 = 99 Digital input 3
P0810 = 2032.15 USS at the BOP link
P0810 = 2036.15 USS at the COM link
P0810 = 2090.15 CB at the COM link
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
140 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 3-28 Possible parameter settings for P0719
Value Command source Setpoint source
0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter
1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint
2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint
3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency
4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on BOP link
5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on COM link
6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB on COM link
10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter
11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint
12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint
13 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency
15 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on BOP link
16 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on COM link
40 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = BICO parameter
41 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
42 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
43 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Fixed frequency.
44 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
45 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on COM link
46 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = CB on COM link
50 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
51 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
52 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
53 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
54 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
55 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
60 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter
61 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint
62 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint
63 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency
64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link
66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 141
3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB)
Parameter range: P1215
P0346, P1216, P1217, P1080
r0052 bit 12
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
For drives which must be secured when powered-down to prevent them
undesirably moving, the MICROMASTER brake sequence control (enabled via
P1215) can be used to control the motor holding brake.
Before opening the brake, the pulse inhibit must be removed and a current
impressed which keeps the drive in that particular position. In this case, the
impressed current is defined by the min. frequency P1080. A typical value in this
case is the rated motor slip r0330. In order to protect the motor holding brake from
continuous damage, the motor may only continue to move after the brake has been
released (brake release times lie between 35 ms and 500 ms). This delay must be
taken into account in parameter P1216 "Holding brake release delay" (refer to Fig.
3-58).
Fig. 3-58 Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
142 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
The motor holding brake is either closed using OFF1 / OFF3 or OFF2. For OFF1 /
OFF3, when the minimum frequency P1080 is reached, the motor is operated at
this frequency until the brake has been applied (closing times of brakes lie between
15 ms and 300 ms). The actual time is specified using parameter P1217 "Holding
time after ramp down" (refer to Fig. 3-58). If, on the other hand, an OFF2 command
has been output, then independent of the drive state, the status signal r0052 bit 12
"Motor holding brake active" is reset. This means that the brake immediately closes
after OFF2 (refer to Fig. 3-59).
0
fmin
(p1080)
p1216
OFF1/OFF3
ON
1
r0052.C Bit 12
f
p0346
Motor excitation
finished
r0056 Bit04
t
t
t
t
t
t
OFF2
Brake
Status
Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time
open
closed
Active
Inactive
Fig. 3-59 Motor holding brake after OFF2
The mechanical brake is controlled using the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor
holding brake active" of the brake control. This signal can be output as follows:
Via digital outputs
The status signal is output via the digital output. In this case, the internal
MICROMASTER relay (if the specification is sufficient) or also an external
contactor or relay can be used to control the brake.
Via status signal using the serial interface (USS or PROFIBUS)
The master must process the status signal. The signal must be connected to
the digital output of the master to which the contactor / relay for the motor
holding brake is connected.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 143
NOTE
Motors have optional holding brakes which are not designed to be used as
brakes for normal operation. The holding brakes are only designed for a limited
number of emergency braking operations / motor revolutions with the brake
closed (refer to the Catalog data).
When commissioning a drive with integrated holding brake it is therefore
absolutely imperative that it is ensured that the holding brake functions
perfectly. A "clicking noise" in the motor indicates that the brake has been
correctly released.
Parameter settings:
♦ To open/close, the digital output controls the motor holding brake at point 1/2
(refer to Fig. 3-58). In this case the prerequisite is that the motor holding
brake P1215 has been activated as well as the selection of the motor
holding brake at the digital output.
♦ Brake opening time P1216 is greater than/equal to the time to open the
holding brake.
♦ Brake delay time P1217 is greater than/equal to the time to close the holding
brake.
♦ Select the min. frequency P1080 so that it acts just like a weight equalization
function.
♦ A typical value for the min. frequency P1080 for the motor holding brake is
the slip frequency of the motor r0330. The rated slip frequency can be
calculated using the following formula:
n
nsy
nnsy
Slip f
n
nn
P0310
100
r0330
[Hz]f ⋅
−
=⋅=
♦ The following control parameters should be noted in conjunction with the
motor holding brake:
− P1310, P1311, P1333, P1335
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
144 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
WARNING
It is not sufficient to select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake
active" in P0731 – P0733. In order to activate the motor holding brake, in
addition, parameter P1215 must also be set to 1.
If the frequency inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning
may not be carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for
crane applications) unless the load has been secured. Potentially hazardous
loads can be secured as follows before commissioning is started:
♦ Lower the load to the floor
♦ During the commissioning phase or after the frequency inverter has been
replaced, the frequency inverter must be inhibited from controlling the motor
holding brake (it is not permissible that the frequency inverter controls the
holding brake). Quick commissioning or a parameter download using
STARTER etc. may only be carried-out after this has been absolutely
ensured. The motor holding brake terminals can then be re-assigned (in this
case, it is not permissible that digital output P0748 is inverted for the motor
holding brake).
♦ In order to hold the motor against the mechanical brake at a specific
frequency, it is important that the min. frequency P1080 approximately
corresponds to the slip frequency. If the value is selected to be too high,
then the current drawn can be too high so that the frequency inverter shuts-
down (trips) due to an overcurrent. If the value selected is too low, then it is
possible that not enough torque is produced to hold the load.
It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The
reason for this is that generally it is only dimensioned/designed for a limited
number of emergency braking operations.
Motor with motor holding brake (example)
A motor with motor holding brake for a hanging (suspended) axis is connected to
the frequency inverter. This holding brake is to be controlled using the 1st
digital
output.
Which settings have to be made?
Select the "motor holding brake active" function (52.12) at digital output P0731.
Activate the brake sequence control in the frequency inverter (P1215 = 1).
Set parameter P1216 to open the holding brake after an ON command.
The brake opening time P1216 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than
the time required to open the holding brake. The opening time of the brake
(refer to the Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay opening time can be used
as nominal value for P1216.
Set parameter P1217 to close the holding brake after an OFF1/3 command.
The brake delay time P1217 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than the
time required to close the holding brake. The closing time of the brake (refer to
Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay closing time can be used as nominal
value for P1217.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 145
Set the load holding
The opening / closing times of mechanical brakes are subject to certain
fluctuations; this is the reason that a weight equalization function must be
parameterized in the frequency inverter for the time P1216 and P1217. The
following parameters must be defined so that the axis cannot sag (i.e. the axis
cannot drop/fall).
♦ In order that the motor can immediately establish a torque after an ON
command, the magnetizing time P0346, determined with the quick
commissioning, may not be reset. This is the reason that parameter P0346
should be checked for the weight equalization.
Typical magnetizing times for 4-pole 1LA7 motors are:
0.12 kW 50 ms 5.50 kW 250 ms
1.50 kW 100 ms 7.50 kW 300 ms
♦ The min. frequency P1080 should approximately correspond to the rated
motor slip (P1080 ≈ r0330[Hz])
♦ In addition, the voltage boost should be adapted:
- constant voltage boost P1310 ≈ 90 % (empirical value)
- voltage boost when accelerating
P1311 ≈ 50 % (empirical value)
Connecting-up the motor holding brake control
♦ Directly connected to the relay output
COM
NO
10
11
CPU
MICROMASTER 420
M
3~
=
Motor with
motor
holding brake
Fig. 3-60 Direct motor holding brake connection
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
146 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
If the frequency inverter directly controls the motor holding brake using the
relay integrated in the frequency inverter, then the max. load capability of
this relay should be carefully taken into consideration in conjunction with the
voltage/current data of the holding brake. The following applies for the relay
integrated in the frequency inverter:
− 30 V DC / 5 A
− 250 V AC / 2 A
If this value is exceeded, an additional relay should, for example, be used.
♦ Indirectly connecting relay output via an additional relay
8
9
Output 0 V, max. 100 mA
(isolated)
Output +24 V, max. 100 mA
(isolated)
24 V
0 V
Relay
M
3~
=
COM
NO
10
11
CPU
MICROMASTER 420
Motor with
motor
holding brake
Free-
wheeling
diode
Caution
The relay may not overload the internal 24 V power supply!
Fig. 3-61 Indirect motor holding brake connection
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 147
3.14 Electronic brakes
MICROMASTER 420 has 2 electronic brakes:
DC braking (refer to Section 3.14.1)
Compound braking (refer to Section 3.14.2)
These brakes can actively brake the drive and avoid a possible DC link overvoltage
condition. An inter-dependency as shown in Fig. 3-62 is present.
DC braking
P1233 > 0
?
yes
no
DC braking
enabled
Compound
braking
P1236 > 0
?
Compound braking
enabled
disabled
no
yes
Fig. 3-62 Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes
3.14.1 DC braking
Parameter range: P1230, P1232, P1233
r0053 Bit00
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
The drive decelerates along a parameterized braking ramp if an OFF1 / OFF3
command is output. A "flat" ramp must be selected so that the drive inverter is not
tripped (shutdown) due to the high regenerative energy which would cause a DC
link overvoltage condition. The DC brake should be activated while the OFF1 /
OFF3 command is present if the drive is to be braked faster. For DC braking,
instead of continually reducing the output frequency / voltage during the OFF1 /
OFF3 phase, a DC voltage / current is input (refer to sequence a).
The drive can be brought to a standstill in the shortest time using DC current
braking (DC brake). DC braking is selected as follows:
After OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233) Sequence 1
Directly selected using BICO parameter P1230 Sequence 2
For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a
significant braking torque for an induction motor. The magnitude, duration and
frequency at which braking starts can be set for the braking current and therefore
braking torque by setting the appropriate parameters.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
148 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
The DC brake can therefore support a braking operation from approx. < 10 Hz or
prevents / minimizes the increase in the DC link voltage for regenerative braking.
This is realized because energy is directly absorbed in the motor. The essential
advantage and the main application of the DC brake is the fact that a holding
torque can be generated at standstill (0 Hz). For instance, this is important for
applications where after positioning, any motion in the mechanical system / product
itself can result in waste.
DC braking is especially used for:
Centrifuges
Saws
Grinding machines
Conveyor belts
Sequence 1
1. Enabled using P1233
2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (refer to Fig. 3-63)
3. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time
P0347.
4. The required braking current P1233 is then impressed for the selected braking
time P1232. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired.
0 t
OFF1/OFF3
ON
t
1
t
⏐f⏐
P1233
1
tt
P0347
OFF2
DC braking
OFF2
DC braking active
r0053
Bit00
Fig. 3-63 DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 149
Sequence 2
1. Enabled and selected using BICO parameter P1230 (refer to Fig. 3-64)
2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time
P0347.
3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed for the time selected and
the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00.
4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the drive accelerates back to the setpoint
frequency until the motor speed matches the drive inverter output frequency. If
there is no match, then there is danger that a fault will be output as a result of
overcurrent - F0001. This can be avoided by activating the flying restart
function.
ON/OFF1
⏐f⏐
P0347
f*
i
t
t
t
t
1
0
f_act
DC braking
0
1
DC braking active
r0053
Bit 00
t
f_set
(0:0)
P1230.C
BI: Enable DC brk.
Fig. 3-64 DC braking after external selection
NOTE
1. The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors !
2. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads !
3. For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal
energy in the motor. If braking lasts too long, then the drive can overheat !
4. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the drive speed using an
external control. When parameterizing and setting the drive system, then as far
as possible, it should be tested using real loads !
5. DC braking is independent of the ON command. This means that it can even
be selected in the "Ready" state.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
150 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.14.2 Compound braking
Parameter range: P1236
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
For compound braking (this is enabled using P1236) DC braking is superimposed
with regenerative braking (where the drive regenerates into the line supply as it
brakes along a ramp). If the DC link voltage exceeds the compound switch-in
threshold VDC-Comp (refer to Fig. 3-65), then a DC current is impressed as a function
of P1236. In this case, braking is possible with a controlled motor frequency and
minimum regenerative feedback. Effective braking is obtained without having to
use additional components by optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or
when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for OFF3) and using compound braking P1236.
Compound braking is suitable for:
Horizontal motion (e.g. traversing drives, conveyor belts)
Vertical motion (e.g. hoisting gear)
⏐f⏐
i
t
t
f_act
f_set
P1236 = 0
Without Compound braking
u
t
⏐f⏐
i
t
t
f_act
f_set
P1236 >0
With Compound braking
t
DC-link
u
DC-link
UDC-Comp
P0210213.1U:0=P1254 Comp-DC ⋅⋅=
1242r0.98U:0P1254 Comp-DC ⋅=≠
Fig. 3-65 Compound braking
The compound braking switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is calculated as a function of
parameter P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels) either directly using the line
supply voltage P0210 or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242 (refer to the
formula in Fig. 3-65).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 151
WARNING
For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC
braking (braking along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic
energy of the motor and driven load are converted into thermal energy in the
motor. If this power loss is too high or if the braking operation takes too long,
then this can cause the drive to overheat !
When using compound braking it must be expected that there is a higher level
of noise above the compound braking switch-in threshold.
NOTE
Compound braking is de-activated, if
- flying restart is active, and
- DC braking is active is selected.
The compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is dependent on P1254
VDC-Comp(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC-Comp(P1254 ≠ 0)
a) Auto-detect circuit enabled (P1254 = 1):
- VDC-Comp (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter
runs-up - i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected
- Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically
adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation
location.
b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0):
- 0210213.1, PV CompDC ⋅⋅=
- The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210
- P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
152 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.15 Automatic restart
Parameter range: P1210
P1211
Warnings A0571
Faults F0035
Function chart number: -
After a power failure (F0003 "Undervoltage"), the "Automatic restart" function
(enabled using P1210) automatically powers-up the drive inverter again. Any faults
are automatically acknowledged by the drive inverter.
When it comes to power failures (line supply failure), then a differentiation is made
between the following conditions:
Line undervoltage (brownout)
"Line undervoltage" is a situation where the line supply is interrupted and returns
before (if installed) the BOP display has gone dark (this is an extremely short line
supply interruption where the DC link hasn't completely collapsed).
Line failure (blackout)
"Line failure" is a situation where the display has gone dark (this represents a
longer line supply interruption where the DC link has completely collapsed) before
the line supply returns.
The automatic restart function P1210 is shown in the following diagram (refer to
Table 3-29) as a function of external states / events.
Table 3-29 Automatic restarts
0 − − − − −
1 − −
2 + − − −
3 + + + +
4 + + − − −
5 + − + +
6 + + + + +
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
restart
restart
restart
restart
restart
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
restart
restart
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
restart
restart
restart
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
restart
restart
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
Fault acknowl.
restart
restart
restart
ON always active (permanent)P1210 ON in no-voltage condition
Fault F0003 on All other faults on
BrownoutBlackout BrownoutBlackout
All faults on
Blackout
−
−
−
Restart
No faults on
Blackout
−
+
Fault acknowl.
restart
−
−
Fault acknowl.
Restart
Restart
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 153
The number of start attempts is specified using parameter P1211. The number is
internally decremented after each unsuccessful attempt. After all attempts have
been made (as specified in parameter P1211), automatic restart is cancelled with
message F0035. After a successful start attempt, the counter is again reset to the
initial value.
NOTE
The "Flying restart" function (refer to Section 3.16) must be additionally
activated if, for an automatic restart, the drive inverter is to be connected to a
motor which may already be spinning.
DANGER
For longer line supply failures (blackouts)and when the automatic restart
function is activated, over a longer period of time it may be assumed that
MICROMASTER is powered-down. However, when the line supply returns,
motors can automatically start to run again without any operator intervention.
If the operating range of the motors is entered in this status, this can result in
death, severe injury or material damage.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
154 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.16 Flying restart
Parameter range: P1200
P1202, P1203
r1204, r1205
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
The "Flying restart" function (this is enabled using P1200, refer to Table 3-30)
allows the drive inverter to be switched to a motor which is still spinning. If the drive
inverter was to be powered-up without using the flying restart function, there would
be a high possibility that a fault with overcurrent F0001 would occur. The reason for
this is that the flux must first be established in the motor and the V/f control must be
set corresponding to the actual motor speed. The drive inverter frequency is
synchronized with the motor frequency using the flying restart function.
When the drive inverter is normally powered-up it is assumed that the motor is
stationary and the drive inverter accelerates the motor from standstill and the
speed is ramped-up to the setpoint which has been entered. However, in many
cases this condition is not fulfilled. A fan drive is a typical example. When the drive
inverter is powered-down the air flowing through the fan can cause it to rotate in
any direction.
Table 3-30 Settings for parameter P1200
Parameter P1200 Flying restart active Search direction
0 Disabled -
1 Always Start in the direction of the setpoint
2 For line supply on and fault Start in the direction of the setpoint
3 For fault and OFF2 Start in the direction of the setpoint
4 Always Only in the direction of the setpoint
5 For line supply on, fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
6 For fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint
Depending on parameter P1200, after the de-magnetizing time has expired P0347,
flying restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max (refer to Fig.
3-66).
P0310
100
r0330
2P1802f2ff
standardslip,maxmaxsearch,
⋅⋅+=⋅= +
This is realized either after the line supply returns when the automatic restart
function has been activated or after the last shutdown with the OFF2 command
(pulse inhibit).
V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20):
The search frequency is reduced, as a function of the DC link current with the
search rate which is calculated from parameter P1203. In so doing, the
parameterizable search current P1202 is impressed. If the search frequency is
close to the rotor frequency, the DC link current suddenly changes because the flux
in the motor establishes itself. Once this state has been reached, the search
frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is changed to the voltage value
of the V/f characteristic with the magnetizing time P0346 (refer to Fig. 3-66).
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 155
After the magnetizing time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to
the speed actual value and the motor is operated with the actual reference
frequency.
Setpoint frequency
t
f
f
Ramp upMagnetizing
time
P0346
Demagnetizing
time
P0347
Flying restart
P1202
P1203
search,max
Fig. 3-66 Flying restart
NOTE
If a higher value is entered for the search velocity P1203 this results in a flatter
search curve and therefore to an extended search time. A lower value has the
opposite effect.
For "Flying restart", a braking torque is generated which can cause drives, with
low moments of inertia, to brake.
For group drives, "Flying restart" should not be activated due to the different
characteristics of the individual motors when coasting down.
WARNING
When "Flying restart" is activated (P1200 > 0), although the drive is at a stand-
still and the setpoint is 0, it is possible that the drive is accelerated as a result of
the search current !
If the operating range of the motors is entered when the drive is in this state,
this can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
156 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.17 Closed-loop Vdc control
3.17.1 Vdc_max controller
Parameter range: P1240, r0056 bit 14
r1242, P1243
P1250 – P1254
Warnings A0502, A0910
Faults F0002
Function chart number: FP4600
DC link undervoltage
Cause:
Line supply voltage failure or dip (blackout or brownout)
Remedy:
A regenerative torque is entered for the operational drive which compensates
the existing losses and therefore stabilizes the voltage in the DC link. This
technique is carried-out using the Vdc_min controller (refer to Section 3.18) and
is known as kinetic buffering.
A brief regenerative load can be handled using this function (enabled using P1240)
without the drive inverter being shut down (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC
link overvoltage"). In this case, the frequency is controlled so that the motor doesn't
go too far into regenerative operation.
If the drive inverter regenerates too much when braking the machine due to a fast
ramp-down time P1121, then the braking ramp / ramp time are automatically
extended and the drive inverter is operated at the DC link voltage limit r1242 (refer
to Fig. 3-67). If the DC link threshold r1242 is again fallen below, then the Vdc_max
controller withdraws the extension of the braking ramp.
t
t
⏐f⏐
1
-controller activeVDC_max
t
VDC
r1242
0
r0056 Bit 14
f
fact
set
A0911
Fig. 3-67 Vdc_max controller
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 157
On the other hand, if the Vdc_max controller increases the output frequency (e.g.
for a steady-state regenerative load), then the Vdc_max controller is disabled by an
internal drive inverter monitoring function and warning A0910 is output. If the
regenerative load continues, the drive inverter is protected using fault F0002.
In addition to controlling the DC link, the Vdc_max controller supports the
stabilizing processes of the speed at the end of an acceleration phase. This is
especially the case if there is an overshoot and the motor therefore briefly goes into
regenerative operation (damping effect).
NOTE
If the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 (switch-on level of
Vdc_max.) of the Vdc_max controller in the "Ready" state, then the Vdc_max
controller is de-activated and warning A0910 is output.
Cause: The line supply voltage does not match the application situation.
Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254 and P0210.
If, in the "Run" state, the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242
and if the Vdc_max controller output is limited by parameter P1253 for approx.
200 ms, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and warning A0910 and,
where relevant, fault F0002 are output.
Cause: Line supply voltage P0210 or ramp-down time P1121 too low
The moment of inertia of the driven load is too high
Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254, P0210, P1121
The Vdc_max switch-in threshold VDC_max depends on P1254
VDC_max(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC_max(P1254 ≠ 0)
a) Auto-detect function enabled (P1254 = 1):
- VDC_max (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter
runs-up, i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected
- Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically
adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation
location.
b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0):
- 0210P215.1U max_DC ⋅⋅=
- The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210
- P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
158 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.18 Monitoring functions / messages
3.18.1 General monitoring functions / messages
Parameter range: P2150 – r2197
r0052, r0053, r2197
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP4100, FP4110
MICROMASTER has an extensive range of monitoring functions / messages which
can be used for open-loop process control. The control can either be implemented
in the drive inverter or also using an external control (e.g. PLC). The interlocking
functions in the drive inverter (refer to Section 3.1.2.3) as well as the output of
signals (refer to Section 3.6.2 or 0) for external control are implemented using
BICO technology.
The status of the individual monitoring functions / messages are emulated in the
following CO/BO parameters:
r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word
r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1
r0053 CO/BO: Status word 2
r0054 CO/BO: Control word 1
r0055 CO/BO: Supplementary (additional) control word
r0056 CO/BO: Status word – motor control
r0722 CO/BO: Status, digital inputs
r0747 CO/BO: Status, digital outputs
r2197 CO/BO: Messages 1
Frequently used monitoring functions / messages including parameter number and
bit are shown in the following Table.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 159
Table 3-31 Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages
Functions / states Parameter / bit number Function chart
Drive ready 52.0 -
Drive ready to run 52.1 -
Drive running 52.2 -
Drive fault active 52.3 -
OFF2 active 52.4 -
OFF3 active 52.5 -
On inhibit active 52.6 -
Drive warning active 52.7 -
Deviation setpoint – actual value 52.8 -
PZD control 52.9 -
Maximum frequency reached 52.A -
Warning: Motor current limit 52.B -
Motor holding brake active 52.C -
Motor overload 52.D -
Motor runs right 52.E -
Drive inverter overload 52.F -
DC brake active 53.0 -
Ramping finished 53.9 -
PID output R2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 53.A FP5100
PID output R2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 53.B FP5100
Download data set 0 from AOP 53.E -
Download data set 0 from AOP 53.F -
|f_act| > P1080 (f_min) 53.2 2197.0 FP4100
|f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) 53.5 2197.1 FP4110
|f_act| > P2155 (f_1) 53.4 2197.2 FP4110
f_act > zero 2197.3 FP4110
f_act >= setpoint (f_set) 53.6 2197.4 -
|f_act| >= P2167 (f_off) 53.1 2197.5 FP4100
|f_act| > P1082 (f_max) 2197.6 -
f_act == setpoint (f_set) 2197.7 FP4110
i_act r0068 >= P2170 53.3 2197.8 FP4100
Approx. Vdc_act < P2172 53.7 2197.9 FP4110
Approx. Vdc_act > P2172 53.8 2197.A FP4110
No-load operation 2197.B -
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
160 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses
Parameter range: P0610 – P0614
P0345
r 0034
Warnings A0511
Faults F0011
Function chart number: -
MICROMASTER 420 has a completely new integrated concept for thermal motor
protection. There are numerous possibilities of effectively protecting the motor but
at the same time ensuring high motor utilization. The basic philosophy of this
innovative concept is to detect critical thermal states, output warnings and initiate
the appropriate responses. By responding to critical states it is possible to operate
the drive at the thermal power limit and to avoid, under all circumstances, an
immediate shutdown (where the drive inverter is tripped).
Features
The protective concept distinguishes itself as a result of the following individual
features:
Protection is effective without using any temperature sensor. The temperatures
of various locations in the motor are indirectly determined using a temperature
model.
Selectable responses P0610 which are to be initiated when the warning
threshold is exceeded in order to prevent an overload condition.
The motor protection has been designed to be completely independent of the
drive inverter protection. Warning thresholds and responses for drive inverter
protection must be separately parameterized.
3.19.1 Thermal motor model
The motor temperature rise increases because of the losses occurring during the
energy-conversion process in the motor. These losses can be essentially sub-
divided into two groups:
No-load losses
The no-load losses include the bearing and air friction losses as well as the re-
magnetizing losses (eddy current and hysteresis losses). All of these loss
components dependent on the speed and electrical frequency.
Load losses
The load losses are mainly determined by the thermal losses in the windings
due to the current flowing through them.
An electrical motor represents a multi-material system (iron, copper, insulating
material, air) where the heat source is especially concentrated in the windings, the
laminated core and the shaft bearings. The following simplifications were made to
replicate the thermal processes in the motor:
The motor is a homogenous body
Heat sources are uniformly distributed in the motor
Heat is only dissipated using convection
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 161
Using these simplifications, the thermal motor behavior can be defined using a 1st
Order filter (PT1 filter). In this case, the square of the normalized motor current
(measured motor current r0027 divided by the rated motor current P0305) weighted
by the thermal motor time constant P0611 results in the I²t value of the motor
r0034. The I²t value represents a parameter for the temperature rise / temperature
of the motor.
In addition, the output frequency (motor speed) is included in the calculation in
order to take into account the cooling effect of the motor fan.
If parameter P0335 is changed to a force-ventilated motor, then the calculation is
also appropriately modified.
If the I²t value of the motor (r0034) reaches the value defined in P0614 (default:
100%), alarm message A0511 is output and depending on P0610, a response is
initiated, or, when the shutdown threshold is reached, a fault. The following settings
are possible for P0610:
0 No response, only a warning
1 Warning and Imax is reduced
(this results in a lower output frequency)
2 Warning and fault (F0011)
⎟
⎠
⎞
⎜
⎝
⎛
P0305
r0027
2
P0310
r0021
Motor
i2t
temp.
reaction
P0610
P0611
P0335
P0614
P06141.1⋅
Trip threshold
Warning threshold
I_max reduction
A0511
F0011
t
r0034
)ti( 2
Fig. 3-68 Drive inverter response
The thermal motor time constant P0611 is a measure for the rate at which the
motor temperature changes and must be entered depending on the motor.
NOTE
For motors with a higher weight P0344, the temperature increase characteristic
is significantly slower than for small motors.
If thermal data of a third-party motor is not entered, then values are used that
are based on a Siemens motor.
Thermal motor data should be taken from the appropriate motor Catalogs.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
162 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Temperature Classes
The permissible temperature rise of electrical machinery (motors) is limited due to
the thermal strength of the insulating materials.
Different maximum values are permissible depending on the material used. In
compliance with regulations for rotating electrical machinery, a differentiation is
made between several temperature Classes (refer to the motor rating plate) and
these are assigned to the highest permissible continuous temperature. An excerpt
from IEC 85 is shown in the "Thermal Classes" table.
Table 3-32 Thermal classes
Max.perm.temperatureThermal Class
Y
A
E
B
F
90 °C
105 °C
120 °C
130 °C
155 °C
H 180 °C
Excerpt from IEC 85
3.19.2 PTC temperature sensor
When the motor is operated below the
rated speed the cooling effect of the
shaft-mounted fan is reduced. As a
result, for most motors when continually
operated at lower frequencies, the
power has to be reduced. Under these
particular conditions, the motors are
only protected against overheating if
either the parameters of the motor
temperature model (refer to Section
3.19.1) were precisely determined or a
PTC temperature sensor is mounted to
the motor and connected to one of the
digital inputs of the MICROMASTER
420 (refer to Fig. 3-69).
Parameters P0701, P0702 or P0703 =
29 (external fault) should be set to
activate the shutdown (tripping) function
for a motor overtemperature condition.
If the resistance of the PTC
temperature sensor exceeds the
shutdown (trip) threshold (motor
overtemperature condition), then Fault
F0085 is output (external fault).
Fig. 3-69 PTC characteristic for
1LG / 1LA motors
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 163
Term. 5, 6
or 7
1 kΩ
5, 6
or 7
PNP digital input (P0725 = 1)
Term. 8 (24 V)
Term. 9 (0 V)
Term. 5, 6
or 7
12 kΩ
5, 6
or 7
NPN digital input (P0725 = 0)
Term. 9 (0 V)
Term. 8 (24 V)
RPTC ≈ 900 Ω ⇒ DIN switches from "0" → "1"
Fig. 3-70 Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER 420
NOTE
The specified circuit examples apply for the PTC temperature sensor from the M11
Motor Catalog (motor protection using PTC thermistors, Code Z = A10 – A16) - that
is used for the 1LA and 1LG Siemens motors.
NOTE
In order to avoid noise from being coupled into the drive inverter electronics - with
the associated disturbances - none of the free conductors in the motor cable may
be used to connect the temperature sensor to the drive inverter. The temperature
sensor must be connected to the drive inverter using a separate cable (if possible,
using a shielded cable).
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
164 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.20 Power module protection
3.20.1 General overload monitoring
Parameter range: P0640, r0067, r1242, P0210
Warnings A0501, A0502, A0503
Faults F0001, F0002, F0003
Function chart number: -
Just the same as for motor protection, MICROMASTER provides extensive
protection for the power components. This protection concept is also sub-divided
into 2 levels:
Warning and response
Fault and shutdown
Using this concept, a high utilization of the power module components can be
achieved without the drive inverter being immediately shut down. The power
module components are monitored as follows:
Table 3-33 General protection of the power components
Warning and response Fault and shutdown
Overcurrent / short circuit Imax controller for V/f
A0501
r0056 bit 09
r0056 bit 13
(refer to Section 3.21.1.2)
F0001
DC link overvoltage Vdc_max controller
A0502
(refer to Section 3.17.1)
F0002
The monitoring thresholds for the right-hand column in the table above are
permanently saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user. On the
other hand, the threshold levels for the "Warning and response" column can be
modified by the user to optimize the system. These values have default settings so
that the "Fault and shutdown" thresholds do not respond.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 165
3.20.2 Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses
Parameter range: P0290 – P0294
r0036 – r0037
Warnings A0504, A0505
Faults F0004, F0005, F0012, F0020, F0022
Function chart number: -
Similar to motor protection, the main function of the thermal power module
monitoring is to detect critical states. Parameterizable responses are provided to
the user which allows the drive system to be still operated at the power limit thus
avoiding immediate shutdown. However, the possibilities of assigning parameters
only involves interventions below the shutdown threshold which cannot be changed
by users.
MICROMASTER 420 has the following thermal monitoring functions:
Heatsink temperature
The monitoring of the heatsink temperature r0037[0] of the power
semiconductor (IGBT).
i2
t monitoring
The i2
t monitoring is used to protect components which have a long thermal
time constant in comparison to the semiconductors. An overload with reference
to i2
t is present if the drive inverter utilization r0036 indicates a value greater
than 100 % (utilization as a % referred to rated operation).
Normalized output current
t
100 %
Reaction via P0290
Default: "current reduction"
r0207
r0027
P0294 (95 %)
t
i2
t [%]
r0036
1
0
A0505
t
Fig. 3-71 Drive inverter response to an overload condition
Parameter P0290 defines how the drive inverter responds to an overload condition.
The following settings are possible:
0 "Reduce the output frequency"
1 "Shutdown (F0004)"
2 "Reduce the pulse frequency and output frequency"
3 "Reduce the pulse frequency then shutdown (F0004)"
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
166 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
When an overload occurs regarding one of these monitoring functions, initially, a
warning is output. The warning threshold P0294 (i2
t monitoring) and P0292
(heatsink temperature monitoring) can be parameterized relative to the shutdown
values.
f_pulse
control
i_max
control
A0504
A0505
A0506
F0004
F0005
Inverter overload reaction
P0290
r0036
r0037 Heat sink
temperature
P0292
i2
t
P0294
Inverter monitoring
Fig. 3-72 Overload response of the drive inverter (P0290)
Example
The warning threshold P0292 for the temperature monitoring (heatsink
temperature) is set to 15 °C in the factory. This means that warning A0504 is
output 15 °C below the shutdown threshold.
At the same time that the warning is output, the parameterized responses are
initiated via P0290. Possible responses include:
Reducing the pulse frequency (P0290 = 2, 3)
This is an extremely effective method to reduce losses in the power module, as
the switching losses represent a very high proportion of the overall losses. In
many applications, a temporary reduction of the pulse frequency can be
tolerated in favor of maintaining the process.
Disadvantage
The current ripple is increased when the pulse frequency is reduced. This can
result in an increase of the torque ripple at the motor shaft (for low moments of
inertia) and an increase in the noise level.
Reducing the output frequency (P0290 = 0,2)
This is advantageous if it is not desirable to reduce the pulse frequency or if the
pulse frequency is already set to the lowest level. Further, the load should have
a characteristic similar to that of a fan, i.e. a square-law torque characteristic for
decreasing speed. When the output frequency is reduced, this significantly
reduces the drive inverter output current and in turn reduces the losses in the
power module.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 167
No reduction (P0290 = 1)
This option should be selected if neither a reduction in the pulse frequency nor
a reduction in the output current is being considered. In this case, the drive
inverter does not change its operating point after the warning threshold has
been exceeded so that the drive can be further operated until the shutdown
values are reached. After the shutdown threshold has been reached, the drive
inverter shuts down (trips) with fault F0004. The time which expires up to
shutdown is however not defined and depends on the magnitude of the
overload. Only the warning threshold can be changed in order to obtain an
earlier warning and, if required, externally intervene in the drive process (e.g. by
reducing the load, lowering the ambient temperature).
NOTE
If the drive inverter fan fails, this would be indirectly detected by the
measurement of the heatsink temperature.
A wire breakage or short circuit of the temperature sensor(s) is also monitored.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
168 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique
There are several open-loop/closed-loop techniques for speed and torque control
for drive inverters with induction and synchronous motors. These techniques can
be roughly classified as follows:
V/f characteristic control (briefly: V/f control)
Field-orientated closed-loop control technique (briefly: Vector control)
These techniques differ from one another both regarding the control quantity as
also in the complexity of the technique, which in turn are obtained as a result of the
requirements associated with the particular application. For basic applications (e.g.
pumps and fans), to a large extent, V/f control is used. Vector control is mainly
used for sophisticated applications (e.g. winders), where a good control and
behavior in noisy conditions are required regarding the speed and torque. If these
requirements are also present in the range from 0 to approx. 1 Hz, then the
speed/torque accuracy without encoder is not sufficient. In this case, Vector control
with speed feedback must be used.
NOTE
Vector control is only available for MICROMASTER 440.
3.21.1 V/f control
Parameter range: P1300
P1310 – P1350
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP6100
The V/f characteristic represents the simplest control technique. In this case the
stator voltage of the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled
proportionally to the stator frequency. This technique has proven itself for a wide
range of "basic" applications, such as
Pumps, fans
Belt drives
and similar processes.
The goal of V/f control is to keep the flux Φ constant in the motor. In this case, this
is proportional to the magnetizing current Iµ and the ratio between voltage V and
frequency f.
Φ ~ Iµ ~ V/f
The torque M, developed by induction motors, is proportional to the product
(precisely the vectorial product Φ x I) of flux and current.
M ~ Φ ∗ I
In order to generate the highest possible torque from a given current, the motor
must operate with a constant flux which is as high as possible. In order to keep the
flux Φ constant, when frequency f changes, the voltage V must be changed in
proportion so that a constant magnetizing current Iµ flows. The V/f characteristic
control is derived from these basic principles.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 169
f
U, M, P, Φ
Voltage control range Field control range
Rated motor
operating pointMn, Φn
fn fmax
M, Φ
U, P
U, P
Fig. 3-73 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from a
drive inverter
There are several versions of the V/f characteristic as shown in Table 3-34.
Table 3-34 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300)
Parameter
value
Significance Use / property
0 Linear
character-
istic
Standard case
Vn
0 fn
V
f
P1300 = 0
1 FCC Characteristic which compensates the voltage losses of the stator
resistance for static (steady-state) or dynamic loads (flux current control
FCC). This is especially used for small motors which have a relatively high
stator resistance. Refer to Section 3.21.1.2.
2 Square-law
character-
istic
This is a characteristic which
takes into consideration the
torque characteristic of the driven
load (e.g. fan / pump)
a) Square-law characteristic
(f
2
characteristic)
b) Energy saving as the lower
voltage also results in lower
currents and losses.
Vn
0 fn
V
f
P1300 = 2
3 Programm-
able
character-
istic
Characteristic which takes into
consideration the torque
characteristic of the motor /
driven load (e.g. synchronous
motor).
V
P1325
f1
P1320
fmax
P1082
Vmax
r0071
Vn
P0304
P1323
P1321
f0
0 Hz
f2
P1322
f3
P1324
fn
P0310
f
P1300 = 3
P1310
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
170 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.21.1.1 Voltage boost
Parameter range: P1310, P1311, P1312
r0056 bit 05
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP6100
For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only output a low output voltage.
Even at low frequencies, the ohmic resistances of the stator winding play a role,
which are neglected when determining the motor flux in Section 3.21.1. This means
that the output voltage can be too low in order to
implement the magnetization of an induction motor,
to hold the load
to voltage drops (ohmic losses in the winding resistances) in the system or
to provide a breakaway / accelerating / braking torque.
The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in MICROMASTER using the
following parameters (refer to Table 3-35):
Table 3-35 Voltage boost
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation
P1310 Constant
voltage boost
The voltage boost is effective over the complete
frequency range whereby the value continually
decreases at high frequencies.
f
Linear V/f
OFF
ON
t
t
⏐f⏐
P1310 active
t0
1
Validity range
Vmax
Vn
(P0304)
VConBoost,100
0 fn
(P0310)
f max
(P1082)
V
fBoost,end
(P1316)
Boost
Output voltage
actual V
N
orm
al V/f
(P1300
=
0)
VConBoost,50
Boost voltage
erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1310_linear_MM420.vsd
P1311 Voltage boost when
accelerating- / braking
The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating
or braking.
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 171
Parameter Voltage boost Explanation
Vmax
Vn
(P0304)
VAccBoost,100
0 fn
(P0310)
fmax
(P1082)
f
V
fBoost,end
(P1316)
VAccBoost,50
Boost
Norm
al V/f
(P1300
=
0)
actual V
Output voltage OFF
ON
t
t
⏐f⏐
P1311 active
t0
1
Boost voltage Validity range
erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1311_MM420.vsd
P1312 Voltage boost when starting The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating
for the first time (standstill)
OFF
ON
t
t
⏐f⏐
P1312 active
t0
1
Vmax
Vn
(P0304)
VStartBoost,100
0 fn
(P0310)
fmax
(P1082)
f
V
fBoost,end
(P1316)
VStartBoost,50
Boost
Boost voltage
Norm
al V/f
(P1300
=
0)
actual V
Output voltage
Validity range
erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1312_MM420.vsd
NOTE
Especially at low frequencies, the motor temperature is additionally increased
as a result of the voltage boost (the motor overheats) !
The voltage value at 0 Hz is determined from the product of rated motor current
P0305, stator resistance P0350 and the appropriate parameters P1310 –
P1312.
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
172 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.21.1.2 V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC)
Parameter range: P1300, P1333
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
An improved current measurement function has been
developed for our MICROMASTER drive inverters. This
permits the output current to be precisely determined referred
to the motor voltage. This measurement guarantees that the
output current is sub-divided into a load component and a flux
component. Using this sub-division, the motor flux can be
controlled and can be appropriately adapted and optimized
in-line with the prevailing conditions.
FCC operation is only activated after the FCC starting
frequency P1333 has been exceeded. The FCC starting frequency P1333 is
entered as a percentage to the rated motor frequency P0310. For a rated motor
frequency of 50 Hz and a factory setting of P1333 = 10 %, this results in an FCC
starting frequency of 5 Hz. The FCC starting frequency may not be selected too
low as this has a negative impact on the control characteristics and can result in
oscillation and system instability.
The "V/f with FCC" control type (P1300 = 1) has proven itself in many applications.
It has the following advantages with respect to the standard V/f control:
Higher motor efficiency
Improved stabilizing characteristics
♦ → higher dynamic response
♦ → improved behavior to disturbances / control
3.21.1.3 Slip compensation
totali
fluxi
loadi
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 173
Parameter range: P1335 – r1337
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: FP6100
In the V/f characteristic operating mode the motor frequency is always lower than
the drive inverter output frequency by the slip frequency fs. If the load (the load is
increased from M1 to M2) is increased with a constant output frequency, then the
slip s when motoring increases and the motor frequency decreases (from f1 to f2).
This behavior, typical for an induction motor, can be compensated using slip
compensation P1335. This therefore eliminates the speed reduction, caused by the
load, by boosting (increasing) the drive inverter output frequency (refer to Fig.
3-74).
Without Slip compensation
M
f
∆f
f2 f1
M2
M1
With Slip compensation
M
f
∆f
f2 f1
M2
M1
fout M1
fout M2
Fig. 3-74 Slip compensation
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
174 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
3.21.1.4 V/f resonance damping
Parameter range: P1338, P1349
Warnings -
Faults -
Function chart number: -
For variable-speed drives, resonance effects can occur in the upper frequency
range (> 20 Hz). These resonance effects result in an increased noise level and
also can damage / destroy the mechanical system. These resonance effects can
occur for:
Geared motors
Reluctance motors
Large motors
(low stator resistance → poor electrical damping)
Contrary to the "skip frequency" function (refer to Section 3.12.1 and parameters
P1091 to P1094), where the resonance frequency is passed through as quickly as
possible, for the V/f resonance damping (parameter P1338), the resonance effects
are dampened from a control-related perspective. The advantage of this function is
that by using this active damping, operation is possible in the resonance range.
The V/f resonance damping is activated and adjusted using parameter P1338. This
parameter represents a gain factor that is a measure for the damping of the
resonance frequency. With parameter P1349 the upper limit is defined for the
effectiveness of this parameter. In a range of 5 % below the upper limit, damping is
reduced linearly from 100 % to 0 %. The following oscillogram (refer to Fig. 3-75)
indicates the effect of the resonance damping function using as an example a
reluctance motor with gearbox. The phase output currents are displayed for an
output frequency of 45 Hz.
Without V/f resonance damping (P1338 = 0) V/f resonance damping active (P1338 = 1)
Fig. 3-75 Effect of V/f resonance damping
Issue 10/06 3 Functions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 175
3.21.1.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)
Parameter range: P1340 – P1344
r0056 bit 13
Warnings A0501
Faults F0001
Function chart number: FP6100
Our drive inverters have, in the V/f characteristic mode, a current limiting controller
(Imax controller, refer to Fig. 3-76). This controller avoids overload conditions. This
controller protects the drive inverter and the motor against continuous overload
conditions by automatically reducing the drive inverter output frequency by fImax
(r1343) or the drive inverter output voltage by VImax (r1344). By either reducing the
output frequency or the output voltage, this reduces the load on the drive inverter
and protects against continuous damage.
Imax controller setpoint
+−
r1343
CO:Imax ctrl Foutp
r1344
CO:Imax ctrl Voutp
Current feedback
r0067
CO: Outp cur limit [A]
r0068
CO: Output current [A]
Motor ovl fact [%]
10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P0640.D (150.0)
Motor temperatur
Inverter temperatur
i2
t inverter
Motor ovl fact [%]
10.0 ... 400.0 [%]
P0640.D (150.0)
Imax ctrl prp gain
0.000 ... 5.499
P1345.D (0.250)
Kp Tn
Kp Tn
Imax ctrl int time
0.000 ... 50.000 [s]
P1346.D (0.300)
Imax ctrl prp gain
0.000 ... 0.499
P1340.D (0.000)
Imax ctrl int time
0.000 ... 50.000 [s]
P1346.D (0.300)
UI_max
fI_max
Fig. 3-76 Imax controller
NOTE
A reduction in the frequency only reduces the load if the load decreases at lower
speeds (e.g. square-law torque-speed characteristic of the driven load).
3 Functions Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
176 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 177
4 Troubleshooting
This Chapter contains:
Operating statuses and messages of the inverter with the SDP
Notes on troubleshooting with the BOP
A list of the alarms and fault messages
4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 178
4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP.............................................................................. 179
4.3 Fault messages..................................................................................................... 180
4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
178 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
WARNING
♦ Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by repair
centers authorized by Siemens or by qualified personnel who are thoroughly
acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this
manual.
♦ Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in
the relevant spare parts list.
♦ Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access
4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP
Table 4-1 explains the
meaning of the various
states of the LEDs on
the SDP.
Table 4-1 Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP
Mains not present Fault inverter temperature
Ready to run
Warning current limit - both
LEDs twinkling same time
Inverter fault - other than the
ones listed below
Other warnings - both LEDs
twinkling alternatively
Inverter running
Undervoltage trip /
undervoltage warning
Fault overcurrent Drive is not in ready state
Fault overvoltage
ROM failure - Both LEDs
flashing same time
Fault motor overtemperature
RAM failure - Both LEDs
flashing alternatively
LEDs for indicating the drive
state
Off
On
approx. 0,3 s, flashing
approx. 1 s, twinkling
Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 179
4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP
Warnings and faults are displayed on the BOP with Axxx and Fxxx respectively.
The individual messages are shown in the Parameter list.
If the motor fails to start when the ON command has been given:
Check that P0010 = 0.
Check that a valid ON signal is present.
Check that P0700 = 2 (for digital input control) or
P0700 = 1 (for BOP control).
Check that the setpoint is present (0 to 10V on Terminal 3) or the setpoint has
been entered into the correct parameter, depending upon the setpoint source
(P1000). See the Parameter List for further details.
If the motor fails to run after changing the parameters, set P0010 = 30 then P0970
= 1 and press P to reset the inverter to the factory default parameter values.
Now use a switch between terminals 5 and 8 on the control board. The drive
should now run to the defined setpoint by analogue input.
NOTICE
Motor data must relate to the inverter data power range and voltage.
4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
180 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
4.3 Fault messages and alarm messages
4.3.1 Fault messages
In the event of a failure, the inverter switches off and a fault code appears on the
display.
NOTE
To reset the fault code, one of three methods listed below can be used:
1. Cycle the power to the drive.
2. Press the button on the BOP or AOP.
3. Via Digital Input 3 (default setting)
Fault messages are stored in parameter r0947 under their code number (e.g.
F0003 = 3). The associated error value is found in parameter r0949. The value 0 is
entered if a fault has no error value. It is furthermore possible to read out the point
in time that a fault occurred (r0948) and the number of fault messages (P0952)
stored in Parameter r0947.
A detailed description of the fault messages is provided in the parameter list.
4.3.2 Alarm messages
Alarm messages are stored in parameter r2110 under their code number (e.g.
A0503 = 503) and can be read out from there.
A detailed description of the alarm messages is provided in the parameter list.
Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 181
4.3.3 Suppressing fault / alarm messages
From the perspective of the application and user, fault-free operation is the
decisive criterion when it comes to the acceptance of drive systems. For special
applications, not only this, but fault-free operation is required even if an overload
condition exists or external events cause faults. For applications such as these
(e.g. mixer systems), fault-free operation has a higher priority than the protection of
the drive system.
With MICROMASTER, it is possible to suppress up to 3 fault / alarm messages
using the indexed parameters P2100 and P2101. The fault / alarm messages to be
suppressed (refer to Section "Fault / alarm messages") are selected using
parameter P2100 while the response is entered using parameter P2101. Indices 0 -
2 of the two parameters are used to correlate between suppressing the fault / alarm
messages and the response. The following settings are possible for the responses:
0 No response, no display
1 OFF1 stop response
2 OFF2 stop response
3 OFF3 stop response
4 No response, only a warning
Example:
Alarm A0911 indicates that the drive has extended the ramp run-down time in order
to avoid an overvoltage condition. If you wish to suppress this message, then set
the following parameters:
P2100[0] = 911 (selects Alarm A0911)
P2101[0] = 0 (no response, no display)
NOTE
All of the fault messages are assigned the standard response to OFF2 (refer to
the fault/alarm list).
The standard responses of several fault messages, caused by the hardware -
e.g. overcurrent F0001 - can neither be suppressed nor modified.
4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
182 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 183
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications
This Chapter contains:
Table 5-1 contains the general technical specifications for the
MICROMASTER 420 inverter
Table 5-2 contains terminal tightening torques
Table 5-3 contains information on reducing the current as a function of the
pulse frequency
Table 5-4 includes various tables of specific technical data for individual
MICROMASTER 420 inverters
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
184 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 5-1 MICROMASTER Performance Ratings
Feature Specification
Mains operating voltage
and
Power ranges
1 AC 200 V to 240 V ± 10 % 0,12 kW – 3,0 kW (0,16 hp – 4,0 hp)
3 AC 200 V to 240 V ± 10 % 0,12 kW – 5,5 kW (0,16 hp – 7,5 hp)
3 AC 380 V to 480 V ± 10 % 0,37 kW – 11,0 kW (0,50 hp – 15,0 hp)
Input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz
Output frequency 0 Hz to 650 Hz
Power factor ≥ 0,7
Inverter efficiency 96 % to 97 %
Overload capability 50 % overload capability for 60 s within 5 min period referred to the rated output
current
Inrush current Less than nominal input current
Power-ON-OFF cycle time Every 30 s
Control method Linear V/f Control; Linear V/f with Flux Current Control (FCC),
Quadratic V/f Control; Multi-point V/f control
Pulse frequency 2 kHz to 16 kHz (2 kHz steps)
Fixed frequencies 7, programmable
Skip frequencies 4, programmable
Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz Digital, 0.01 Hz Serial, 10 bit Analogue
(motor potentiometer 0.1 Hz [0.1% (in PID mode)])
Digital inputs 3, programmable (isolated), switchable active high / active low (PNP/NPN)
Analogue input 1, (0 to 10 V) used for frequency setpoint or PI feedback signal, scalable or
usable as 4
th
digital input
Relay output 1, programmable 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive), 250 V AC / 2 A (inductive)
Analogue output 1, programmable (0 mA to 20 mA)
Serial interface RS-485, Option RS-232
Electromagnetic compatibility Optional EMC filters to EN55011 Class A or B,
also Internal Class A filters available
Braking DC braking, compound braking
Protection level IP20
Temperature range -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F)
Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F)
Humidity < 95 % RH – non-condensing
Operational altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level without derating
Protection features Undervoltage , Overvoltage, Overload, Ground Faults, Short circuit, Stall
Prevention, Motor Blocking Protection, Motor Overtemperature, Inverter
Overtemperature, Parameter Interlock
Standards UL, cUL, CE, C-tick
CE Marked Conformity with EC Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC
and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC
Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 185
Table 5-2 Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals
Frame
Size
Dimensions
Required cooling air
flow
Tightening torque for
power connections
mm 73 × 173 × 149 l/s 4.8 Nm 1.1
A W x H x D
inch 2.87 × 6.81 × 5.87 CFM 10.2 lbf.in 10
mm 149 × 202 × 172 l/s 24 Nm 1.5
B W x H x D
inch 5.87 × 7.95 × 6.77 CFM 51 lbf.in 13.3
mm 185 × 245 × 195 l/s 54.9 Nm 2.25
C W x H x D
inch 7.28 × 9.65 × 7.68 CFM 116.3 lbf.in 20
Table 5-3 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency
Output current in A with a switching frequency of:Mains voltage Power (CT)
[kW] 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz
1/3 AC 200 V 0.12 to 5.5 Factory setting 16 kHz – no derating necessary
0.37 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.1
0.55 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.1
0.75 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 1.1
1.1 3.0 3.0 2.7 2.7 1.6 1.6 1.1
1.5 4.0 4.0 2.7 2.7 1.6 1.6 1.1
2.2 5.9 5.9 5.1 5.1 3.6 3.6 2.6
3.0 7.7 7.7 5.1 5.1 3.6 3.6 2.6
4.0 10.2 10.2 6.7 6.7 4.8 4.8 3.6
5.5 13.2 13.2 13.2 13.2 9.6 9.6 7.5
7.5 19.0 18.4 13.2 13.2 9.6 9.6 7.5
3 AC 400 V
11.0 26.0 26.0 17.9 17.9 13.5 13.5 10.4
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
186 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 5-4 MICROMASTER 420 Specifications
In order to have a UL compliant installation fuses from the SITOR range with the
appropriate current rating must be used.
Input voltage range 1 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 %
(with built in Class A Filter)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2AB11
-2AA1
2AB12
-5AA1
2AB13
-7AA1
2AB15
-5AA1
2AB17
-5AA1
2AB21
-1BA1
2AB21
-5BA1
2AB22
-2BA1
2AB23
-0CA1
[kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0
Output Rating
[hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6 6.0
Input Current 1) [A] 1.8 3.2 4.6 6.2 8.2 11.0 14.4 20.2 35.5
Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4 13.6
Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 16 20 20 32 40
Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3807 3807 3812 3817
For UL specified * * * * * * * * *
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 16 16 12 10
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8
[kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.3 3.6 3.6 5.2
Weight
[lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.9 2.9 7.3 7.9 7.9 11.4
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line
supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage
of 240 V without line commutating reactor.
* UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 187
Input voltage range 1 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 %
(Unfiltered)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC11
-2AA1
2UC12
-5AA1
2UC13
-7AA1
2UC15
-5AA1
2UC17
-5AA1
2UC21
-1BA1
2UC21
-5BA1
2UC22
-2BA1
2UC23
-0CA1
[kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0
Output Rating
[hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0
Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6 6.0
Input Current 1) [A] 1.8 3.2 4.6 6.2 8.2 11.0 14.4 20.2 35.5
Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4 13.6
Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 16 20 20 32 40
Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3807 3807 3812 3817
For UL specified * * * * * * * * *
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 14
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8
[kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.9 2.9 3.1 5.2
Weight
[lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 6.4 6.4 6.8 11.4
Input voltage range 3 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 %
(with built in Class A Filter)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2AC23
-0CA1
2AC24
-0CA1
2AC25
-5CA1
[kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5
Output Rating
[hp] 4.0 5.0 7.5
Output Power [kVA] 6.0 7.7 9.6
Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 19.7 26.5
Output Current [A] 13.6 17.5 22.0
Fuse [A] 25 32 35
Recommended 3NA 3810 3812 3814
For UL specified * * *
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 4.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 14 14 12
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[mm
2
] 1.5 2.5 4.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 16 14 12
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[kg] 5.2 5.5 5.5
Weight
[lbs] 11.4 12.1 12.1
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line
supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage
of 240 V without line commutating reactor.
* UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
188 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Input voltage range 3 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 %
(Unfiltered)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC11-
2AA1
2UC12-
5AA1
2UC13-
7AA1
2UC15-
5AA1
2UC17-
5AA1
2UC21-
1BA1
2UC21-
5BA1
2UC22-
2BA1
[kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2
Output Rating
[hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0
Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6
Input Current 1) [A] 1.1 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.7 6.4 8.3 11.7
Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4
Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 20
Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3805 3807
For UL specified * * * * * * * *
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10
[kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.9 2.9 3.1
Weight
[lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 6.4 6.4 6.8
Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC23-
0CA1
2UC24-
0CA1
2UC25-
5CA1
[kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5
Output Rating
[hp] 4.0 5.0 7.5
Output Power [kVA] 6.0 7.7 9.6
Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 19.7 26.5
Output Current [A] 13.6 17.5 22.0
Fuse [A] 25 32 35
Recommended 3NA 3810 3812 3814
For UL specified * * *
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 4.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 14 14 12
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[mm
2
] 1.5 2.5 4.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 16 14 12
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[kg] 5.2 5.5 5.5
Weight
[lbs] 11.4 12.1 12.1
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line
supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage
of 240 V without line commutating reactor.
* UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 189
Input voltage range 3 AC 380 V – 480 V, ± 10 %
(with built in Class A Filter)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2AD22-
2BA1
2AD23-
0BA1
2AD24-
0BA1
2AD25-
5CA1
2AD27-
5CA1
2AD31-
1CA1
[kW] 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0
Output Rating
[hp] 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0
Output Power [kVA] 4.5 5.9 7.8 10.1 14.0 19.8
Input Current 1) [A] 7.5 10.0 12.8 15.6 22.0 32.3
Output Current [A] 5.9 7.7 10.2 13.2 19.0 26.0
Fuse [A] 16 16 20 20 25 35
Recommended 3NA 3805 3805 3807 3807 3810 3814
For UL specified * * * * * *
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 16 14 12 10
[mm
2
] 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 10 10 10 8 8 8
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 16 14 12
[mm
2
] 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 10 10 10 8 8 8
[kg] 3.1 3.3 3.3 5.4 5.7 5.7
Weight
[lbs] 6.8 7.3 7.3 11.9 12.5 12.5
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line
supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage
of 400 V without line commutating reactor.
* UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
190 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Input voltage range 3 AC 380 V – 480 V, ± 10 %
(Unfiltered)
Order No. 6SE6420- 2UD13-
7AA1
2UD15-
5AA1
2UD17-
5AA1
2UD21-
1AA1
2UD21-
5AA1
2UD22-
2BA1
2UD23-
0BA1
2UD24-
0BA1
[kW] 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0
Output Rating
[hp] 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
Output Power [kVA] 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.3 3.0 4.5 5.9 7.8
Input Current 1) [A] 2.2 2.8 3.7 4.9 5.9 7.5 10.0 12.8
Output Current [A] 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 4.0 5.9 7.7 10.2
Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 20
Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3805 3807
For UL specified * * * * * * * *
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10
[mm
2
] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18
[mm
2
] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10
[kg] 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 3.3 3.3 3.3
Weight
[lbs] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 7.3 7.3 7.3
Order No. 6SE6420- 2UD25-
5CA1
2UD27-
5CA1
2UD31-
1CA1
[kW] 5.5 7.5 11.0
Output Rating
[hp] 7.5 10.0 15.0
Output Power [kVA] 10.1 14.0 19.8
Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 22.0 32.3
Output Current [A] 13.2 19.0 26.0
Fuse [A] 20 25 35
Recommended 3NA 3807 3810 3814
For UL specified * * *
[mm
2
] 2.5 4.0 6.0
Input Cable, min.
[awg] 14 12 10
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Input Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[mm
2
] 1.5 2.5 4.0
Output Cable, min.
[awg] 16 14 12
[mm
2
] 10.0 10.0 10.0
Output Cable, max.
[awg] 8 8 8
[kg] 5.5 5.5 5.5
Weight
[lbs] 12.1 12.1 12.1
1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line
supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage
of 400 V without line commutating reactor.
* UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
Issue 10/06 6 Options
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 191
6 Options
An overview of the options available for the MICROMASTER 420 is given in this
section. For further information about options, please refer to the catalog or the
documentation CD.
6.1 Device-independent options
Basic Operator Panel (BOP)
Advanced Operator Panel (AOP)
PROFIBUS module
PC to inverter connection kit
PC to AOP connection kit
BOP/AOP door mounting kit for single inverter control
AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control
"DriveMonitor” and "Starter" commissioning tool
6.2 Device-dependent options
EMC filter, Class A
EMC filter, Class B
Additional EMC filter, Class B
Low leakage Class B filter
Line commutating choke
Output choke
LC filter
Gland plate
CAUTION
If using output chokes or LC filters operation is only permissible with a pulse
frequency of 4 kHz. Make shure that the automatic pulse frequency reductions are
disabled.
Coercing required parameter adjusting: P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1.
6 Options Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
192 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 193
7 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)
This Chapter contains:
EMC information.
7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)................................................................... 194
Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
194 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)
All manufacturers / assemblers of electrical apparatus which "performs a complete
intrinsic function and is placed on the market as a single unit intended for the end
user” must comply with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC.
There are three routes for the manufacturer/assembler to demonstrate compliance:
7.1.1 Self-certification
This is a manufacturer's declaration that the European standards applicable to the
electrical environment for which the apparatus is intended have been met. Only
standards that have been officially published in the Official Journal of the European
Community can be cited in the manufacturer's declaration.
7.1.2 Technical construction file
A technical construction file can be prepared for the apparatus describing its EMC
characteristics. This file must be approved by a ‘Competent Body’ appointed by the
appropriate European government organization. This approach allows the use of
standards that are still in preparation.
7.1.3 EC type examination certificate
This approach is only applicable to radio communication transmitting apparatus. All
MICROMASTER units are certified for compliance with the EMC directive, when
installed in accordance with the recommendations in Section 2.
Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 195
7.1.4 EMC Directive Compliance with Imminent Harmonics
Regulations
From 1st January 2001 all electrical apparatus covered by the EMC Directive will
have to comply with EN 61000-3-2 "Limits for harmonic current emissions
(equipment input ≤ 16 A per phase)".
All Siemens variable speed drives of the MICROMASTER, MIDIMASTER,
MICROMASTER Eco and COMBIMASTER ranges, which are classified as
"Professional Equipment" within the terms of the standard, fulfill the requirements
of the standard.
Special considerations for 250 W to 550 W drives with 230 V 1ac mains supplies
when used in non-industrial applications
Units in this voltage and power range will be supplied with the following warning:
”This equipment requires supply authority acceptance for connection to the public
supply network”. Please refer to EN 61000-3-12 sections 5.3 and 6.4 for further
information. Units connected to Industrial Networks1 do not require connection
approval (see EN 61800-3, section 6.1.2.2).
The harmonic current emissions from these products are described in the table
below:
Table 7-1 Permissible harmonic current emissions
Rating Typical Harmonic
Current (A)
Typical Harmonic
Current (%)
Typical Voltage Distortion
Distribution Transformer Rating
10 kVA 100 kVA 1 MVA
3
rd
5
th
7
th
9
th
11
th
3
rd
5
th
7
th
9
th
11
th
THD (%) THD (%) THD (%)
250 W 1AC 230 V 2.15 1.44 0.72 0.26 0.19 83 56 28 10 7 0.77 0.077 0.008
370 W 1AC 230 V 2.96 2.02 1.05 0.38 0.24 83 56 28 10 7 1.1 0.11 0.011
550 W 1AC 230 V 4.04 2.70 1.36 0.48 0.36 83 56 28 10 7 1.5 0.15 0.015
The allowed harmonic currents for "professional equipment” with an input power
> 1 kW are not yet defined. Therefore, any electrical apparatus containing the
above drives which has an input power > 1 kW will not require connection
approval.
Alternatively, the necessity to apply for connection approval can be avoided by
fitting the input chokes recommended in the technical catalogues (except 550 W
230 V 1ac units).
1 Industrial Networks are defined as those which do not supply buildings used for domestic purposes.
Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
196 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
7.1.5 Classification of EMC performance
Three General classes of EMC performance are available as detailed below:
Class 1: General Industrial
Compliance with the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN 61800-3
for use in Second Environment (Industrial).
Table 7-2 Class 1 - General Industrial
EMC Phenomenon Standard Level
Radiated Emissions EN 55011 Level A1Emissions:
Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Limits complying with EN 55011,
Class A, Group 2
Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables, 1 kV control
Immunity:
Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Field
EN 61000-4-3 26-1000 MHz, 10 V/m
Class 2: Filtered Industrial
This level of performance will allow the manufacturer/assembler to self-certify their
apparatus for compliance with the EMC directive for the industrial environment as
regards the EMC performance characteristics of the power drive system.
Performance limits are as specified in the Generic Industrial Emissions and
Immunity standards EN 61000-6-4 and EN 61000-6-2.
Table 7-3 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial
EMC Phenomenon Standard Level
Radiated Emissions EN 55011 Limit A1Emissions:
Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Limits complying with EN
55011, Class A, Group 2
Supply Voltage Distortion EN 61000-2-4
Voltage Fluctuations, Dips,
Unbalance, Frequency
Variations
EN 61000-2-1
Magnetic Fields EN 61000-4-8 50 Hz, 30 A/m
Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables,
2 kV control
Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Field,
amplitude modulated
EN 61000-4-3 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80%
AM, power and signal lines
Immunity:
Radio-frequency
Electromagnetic Field,
pulse modulated
EN 61000-4-3 900 MHz, 10 V/m 50% duty
cycle, 200 Hz repetition rate
Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 197
Class 3: Filtered - for residential, commercial and trade applications
This level of performance will allow the manufacturer / assembler to self-certify
compliance of their apparatus with the EMC directive for the residential,
commercial and trade applications environment as regards the EMC performance
characteristics of the power drive system. Performance limits are as specified in
the generic emission and immunity standards EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-1 in
residential.
Table 7-4 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential, Commercial and trade applications
EMC Phenomenon Standard Level
Emissions: Radiated Emissions* EN 55011 Limit B
Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Category C1:
Limit complying with
EN 55011, Class B
Category C2:
Limit complying with
EN 55011, Class A
Immunity: Supply Voltage Distortion EN 61000-2-4
Voltage Fluctuations, Dips,
Unbalance, Frequency
Variations
EN 61000-2-1
Magnetic Fields EN 61000-4-8 50 Hz, 30 A/m
Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge
Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables, 2 kV control
Radio Frequency
Electromagnetic Field,
amplitude modulated
EN 61000-4-3 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80%
AM, power and signal lines
Radio-frequency
Electromagnetic Field,
pulse modulated
EN 61000-4-3 900 MHz, 10 V/m 50% duty
cycle, 200 Hz repetition rate
* These limits are dependent on the inverter being correctly installed inside a
metallic switchgear enclosure. The limits will not be met if the inverter is not
enclosed.
NOTICE
To achieve these performance levels, you must not exceed the default Pulse
frequency nor use cables longer than 25 m.
The MICROMASTER inverters are intended exclusively for professional
applications. Therefore, they do not fall within the scope of the harmonics
emissions specification EN 61000-3-2.
Maximum mains supply voltage when filters are fitted is 460 V.
Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
198 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Table 7-5 Compliance Table
Model Remarks
Class 1 – General Industrial
6SE6420-2U***-**A1 Units without filters, all voltages and performances. The product norm
EN 61800-3 +A11 for "Variable-speed electrical drives, Part 3: EMC
product standard including specific test methods” specifies limits for
conducted emissions which cannot be complied with by unfiltered
inverters in the second environment.
Filtered inverters (as described under Class 2) must be installed for
drive systems in C3 installations.
The use of unfiltered inverters in industrial environments is allowed only
if they are part of a system which is equipped with line filters on the
higher-level supply side.
Class 2 – Filtered Industrial
6SE6420-2A***-**A0 All units with integral Class A filters
6SE6420-2A***-**A0 with
6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0
Frame size A units 400-480 V with external Class A footprint filters
Class 3 – Filtered for residential, commercial and light industry
6SE6420-2U***-**A0 with
6SE6400-2FB0*-***0
Unfiltered units fitted with external Class B footprint filters.
6SE6420-2A***-**A1 with
6SE6400-2FS0*-***0 or
6SE6400-2FL0*-***0
Units with fitted Class A filters and additional external Class B filters.
6SE6420-2U***-**A1 with
6SE6400-2FA0*-***0
6SE6420-2A***-**A1
Unfiltered units fitted with external Class B filters
All units with fitted Class A filters.
For drive systems in category C2 installations, the following warning
notice is necessary:
In residential environments, this product may cause radio-frequency
disturbances which may necessitate interference suppression
measures.
* denotes any value is allowed.
Category C3: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V.
For use in second environment.
Category C2: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V. For use in first
environment. Installation and commissioning by EMC expert only.
Category C1: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V.
For use in first environment.
Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 199
Appendices
A Changing the Operator Panel
P
Fn
0
1
P
Fn
0
1
P
Fn
0
1
1
3 4
2
Removing Covers Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
200 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
B Removing Covers
B.1 Removing Covers Frame Size A
3
1 2
4
Issue 10/06 Removing Covers
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 201
B.2 Removing Covers Frame Size B and C

!

# $
Removing ‘Y’ Cap Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
202 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
C Removing ‘Y’ Cap
C.1 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A
21
LK 700
Issue 10/06 Removing ‘Y’ Cap
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 203
C.2 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C

!
Removing fan Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
204 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
D Removing fan
D.1 Removing fan, Frame Size A
Issue 10/06 Removing fan
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 205
D.2 Removing fan, Frame Sizes B and C
Applicable Standards Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
206 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
E Applicable Standards
European Low Voltage Directive
The MICROMASTER product range complies with the requirements of the Low
Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended by Directive 98/68/EEC. The units
are certified for compliance with the following standards:
EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems,
Part 5-1: Safety requirements –
Electrical, thermal and energy
EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines
European Machinery Directive
The MICROMASTER inverter series does not fall under the scope of the
Machinery Directive. However, the products have been fully evaluated for
compliance with the essential Health  Safety requirements of the directive
when used in a typical machine application. A Declaration of Incorporation is
available on request.
European EMC Directive
When installed according to the recommendations described in this manual,
the MICROMASTER fulfils all requirements of the EMC Directive as defined by
the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN61800-3.
Underwriters Laboratories
UL and CUL LISTED POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT
ISO 9001
Siemens plc operates a quality management system, which complies with the
requirements of ISO 9001.
Issue 10/06 Short circuit current rating (SCCR)
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 207
F Short circuit current rating (SCCR)
Frame Size C
The equipment has a standard SCCR value of 10 kA, which complies with the
requirements of UL508C.
In addition to the standard SCCR a high SCCR is available which can be used
for industrial control panel installations in line with the National Electrical Code
(NEC) article 409 (edition 2005) and Underwriters Laboratories UL508A (effective
April 2006).
The uL certification of MICROMASTER 420 allows the drives to adopt a high
SCCR equal to the interupt current rating of the branch-circuit protection (BCP)
device protecting the drive.
Hence by selection of the correct uL listed BCP device with appropriate interrupt
rating for the application, any high SCCR rating can be achieved for
MICROMASTER 420, including SCCR values above 10 kA.
The above statements are valid for the respective maximum voltage of the drive
when protected by a UL recognised/listed H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or
self-protected combination motor controller.
List of Abbreviations Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
208 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
G List of Abbreviations
AC Alternating current
AD Analog digital converter
ADC Analog digital converter
ADR Address
AFM Additional frequency modification
AG Automation unit
AIN Analog input
AOP Advanced operator panel
AOUT Analog output
ASP Analog setpoint
ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation
BCC Block check character
BCD Binary-coded decimal code
BI Binector input
BICO Binector / connector
BO Binector output
BOP Basic operator panel
C Commissioning
CB Communication board
CCW Counter-clockwise
CDS Command data set
CFM Cubic feet per minute (1 l/s ≅ 2,1 CFM)
CI Connector input
CM Configuration management
CMD Commando
CMM Combimaster
CO Connector output
CO/BO Connector output / Binector output
COM Common (terminal that is connected to NO or NC)
COM-Link Communication link
CT Commissioning, ready to run
CT Constant torque
CUT Commissioning, run, ready to run
CW Clockwise
DA Digital analog converter
DAC Digital analog converter
DC Direct current
DDS Drive data set
Issue 10/06 List of Abbreviations
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 209
DIN Digital input
DIP DIP switch
DOUT Digital output
DS Drive state
EEC European Economic Community
EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory
ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker
EMC Electro-magnetic compatibility
EMF Electromotive force
EMI Electro-magnetic interference
ESB Equivalent circuit
FAQ Frequently asked questions
FB Function block
FCC Flux current control
FCL Fast current limit
FF Fixed frequency
FFB Free function block
FOC Field orientated control
FSA Frame size A
GSG Getting started guide
GUI ID Global unique identifier
HIW Main actual value
HSW Main setpoint
HTL High-threshold logic
I/O Input and output
IBN Commissioning
IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor
IND Sub-index
JOG Jog
KIB Kinetic buffering
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
LGE Length
MHB Motor holding brake
MM4 MICROMASTER 4th. Generation
MOP Motor potentiometer
NC Normally closed
NO Normally open
OPI Operating instructions
PDS Power drive system
PID PID controller (proportional, integral, derivative)
PKE Parameter ID
PKW Parameter ID value
PLC Programmable logic controller
List of Abbreviations Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
210 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
PLI Parameter list
PPO Parameter process data object
PTC Positive temperature coefficient
PWE Parameter value
PWM Pulse-width modulation
PX Power extension
PZD Process data
QC Quick commissioning
RAM Random-access memory
RCCB Residual current circuit breaker
RCD Residual current device
RFG Ramp function generator
RFI Radio-frequency interference
RPM Revolutions per minute
SCL Scaling
SDP Status display panel
SLVC Sensorless vector control
STW Control word
STX Start of text
SVM Space vector modulation
TTL Transistor-transistor logic
USS Universal serial interface
VC Vector control
VT Variable torque
ZSW Status word
ZUSW Additional setpoint
Issue 10/06 Index
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 211
Index
A
Altitude......................................................24
Ambient operating conditions...................23
Altitude..................................................24
Atmospheric Pollution...........................24
Electromagnetic Radiation....................24
Humidity................................................24
Installation and cooling .........................24
Shock....................................................24
Temperature .........................................23
Vibration................................................24
Water hazard ........................................24
Applicable standards
European EMC Directive ....................206
European Low Voltage Directive ........206
European Machinery Directive............206
ISO 9001.............................................206
Underwriters Laboratories ..................206
Atmospheric Pollution...............................24
Automatic restart ....................................152
B
BICO technology ......................................44
Block diagram...........................................56
C
Changing the Operator Panel.................199
Closed-loop Vdc control .........................156
Vdc_max controller.............................156
Commissioning.........................................59
50 / 60 Hz setting..................................61
Commissioning the application.............72
Fast commissioning ..............................62
Motor / control data...............................69
Motor data identification........................70
Reset to the factory setting...................88
Series commissioning...........................86
With BOP or AOP .................................62
Communications.......................................98
Compound braking.................................150
Contact address .........................................5
Current reduction depending on pulse
frequency ............................................185
D
DC braking............................................. 147
Dimensions and Torques......................... 25
Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420 ..... 25
E
Electrical Installation ................................ 27
Electro-Magnetic Compatibility
EC type-examination certificate ......... 194
general ............................................... 194
self-certification .................................. 194
technical construction file................... 194
Electro-Magnetic Interference.................. 32
avoiding EMI......................................... 32
Electromagnetic Radiation....................... 24
Electronic brakes ................................... 147
Compound braking............................. 150
DC braking ......................................... 147
EMC ....................................................... 194
EMC Directive Compliance.................... 195
EMC performance
filtered for residential, commercial and
trade applications ............................... 197
filtered industrial class........................ 196
general industrial class....................... 196
EMI........................................................... 32
F
Fault messages
with the BOP fitted.............................. 179
with the SDP fitted.............................. 178
Features................................................... 19
Fixed frequencies................................... 121
Flying restart .......................................... 154
Foreword.................................................... 5
Functions ................................................. 35
H
Humidity................................................... 24
Index Issue 10/06
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
212 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
I
Inputs / outputs.........................................89
Analog inputs ........................................94
Analog outputs......................................96
Digital inputs .........................................89
Digital outputs .......................................92
Installation ................................................21
after a period of storage........................23
Installation and cooling.............................24
J
Jog..........................................................126
JOG ........................................................126
L
Long cables
operation with........................................29
M
Main Characteristics.................................19
Mechanical Installation.............................25
MICROMASTER 420
fault messages....................................180
general..................................................18
Main Characteristics .............................19
Performance Characteristics ................19
Protection characteristics......................20
specifications ......................................183
MICROMASTER 420 Specifications ......186
MICROMASTER Performance Ratings .184
Monitoring functions / messages............158
Motor connections....................................29
Motor control...........................................168
V/f control............................................168
Motor holding brake................................141
Motorized potentiometer.........................124
Mounting on standard rail.........................26
O
Online Service  Support...........................5
Operation with
long cables............................................29
Residual Current Device.......................28
ungrounded IT supplies ........................28
Operator panels for MM4 .........................52
AOP ......................................................53
BOP ......................................................52
SDP.......................................................57
Options
Device-dependent options ................. 191
Device-independent options............... 191
Overload responses............................... 160
Overview.................................................. 17
P
Parameters .............................................. 38
Attributes .............................................. 40
Changing with BOP.............................. 55
Grouping and access ........................... 43
Monitoring parameters ......................... 39
Setting parameters............................... 38
Performance Characteristics ................... 19
PID controller ......................................... 128
PID fixed setpoint ............................... 131
PID motorized potentiometer ............. 130
Power and motor connections ................. 29
Power connections................................... 29
Power module protection....................... 164
Protection characteristics......................... 20
Q
Qualified personnel.................................... 6
R
Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A ........... 202
Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C. 203
Removing Covers Frame Size A ........... 200
Removing Covers Frame Size B and C. 201
Removing fan
Frame Size A...................................... 204
Frame Sizes B and C ......................... 205
Residual Current Device
operation with....................................... 28
S
Safety instructions...................................... 7
Screening Methods.................................. 33
Setpoint channel .................................... 132
AFM.................................................... 132
Ramp-function generator ................... 134
Shock....................................................... 24
Issue 10/06 Index
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 213
T
Technical Support ......................................5
Technological controller .........................128
Temperature.............................................23
Thermal motor protection .......................160
Troubleshooting......................................177
U
Ungrounded (IT) supplies
operation with........................................28
V
V/f control ...............................................168
Current limiting....................................175
Vibration ...................................................24
W
Warnings, cautions  notes
commissioning........................................ 8
dismantling  disposal.......................... 10
general ................................................... 7
operation ................................................ 9
repair .................................................... 10
transport  storage................................. 8
Water hazard ........................................... 24
Wiring Guidelines EMI ............................. 33
Micromaster 420 operating instructions
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 215
Suggestions and/or Corrections
Suggestions
Corrections
To:
Siemens AG
Automation  Drives Group
SD SPA PM4
Postfach 3269
D-91050 Erlangen
Bundesrepublik Deutschland
For Publication/Manual:
MICROMASTER 420
Email: documentation.sd@siemens.com
User Documentation
From
Name:
Operating Instructions
Order Number:
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Date of Issue: 10/06
Company/Service Department
Address:
Telephone: __________ /
Telefax: __________ /
Should you come across any printing
errors when reading this publication,
please notify us on this sheet.
Suggestions for improvement are also
welcome.
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
216 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Issue 10/06 View of Unit
MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions
6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 217
View of Unit Frame Size A Frame Size B  C
SDP
fitted
Power Terminal
Connections
Control Terminal
Connections
Access to
Y Cap
Siemens AG
Bereich Automation and Drives (AD)
Geschäftsgebiet Standard Drives (SD)
Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen
Federal Republic of Germany
© Siemens AG, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006
Object to change without prior notice
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No.: 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
Date: 10/06

More Related Content

PDF
Siemens micromaster-440-manual
PDF
Siemens micro master 440 quick-start-guide
PDF
Manual altivar 11
PDF
400kV GIS Substation
PDF
7SD52/53 Line Differential Protection Relay
PPTX
ABB ACS 800 SERIES VFD TRAINNING GUIDE BY DEEPAK GORAI
PDF
Sinamics g120 treinamento (en)
PDF
1 sinamics components
Siemens micromaster-440-manual
Siemens micro master 440 quick-start-guide
Manual altivar 11
400kV GIS Substation
7SD52/53 Line Differential Protection Relay
ABB ACS 800 SERIES VFD TRAINNING GUIDE BY DEEPAK GORAI
Sinamics g120 treinamento (en)
1 sinamics components

What's hot (20)

PPT
Introducción a las protecciones electricas
PPT
Introduction to plc (s7)­
PPT
Disjuntores e fuzíveis
PDF
Nbr 14136 (2002) Plugues Tomadas Uso Domestico E An Logo 20a250 Vca Padroniza O
DOCX
5. Switchyard & Substation
PDF
Designing an Uninterruptible Power Supply
PDF
Schneider manual altivar 312
PDF
System neutral-earthing
PPT
Rotary and Key Lock Switches
PDF
Zab un1010 user manual 3 bhs335648 e81
PPTX
Elementos de subestação
PPT
Switchgear and protection lecture 2 type of circuit breakers and applications
PDF
Ats48 getting started_sp_nha94286_00
PPTX
Fieldbus wiring guide
PPTX
Mantenimiento eléctrico industrial
PDF
Atv312 manual do usuário-br-11 fev11
PPTX
Power quality 1
PDF
Dimensionamento de instalação elétrica pela demanda de consumo
PDF
Abb lv breakers working with trip curves
PDF
Apostila 20 comandos-20eletricos
Introducción a las protecciones electricas
Introduction to plc (s7)­
Disjuntores e fuzíveis
Nbr 14136 (2002) Plugues Tomadas Uso Domestico E An Logo 20a250 Vca Padroniza O
5. Switchyard & Substation
Designing an Uninterruptible Power Supply
Schneider manual altivar 312
System neutral-earthing
Rotary and Key Lock Switches
Zab un1010 user manual 3 bhs335648 e81
Elementos de subestação
Switchgear and protection lecture 2 type of circuit breakers and applications
Ats48 getting started_sp_nha94286_00
Fieldbus wiring guide
Mantenimiento eléctrico industrial
Atv312 manual do usuário-br-11 fev11
Power quality 1
Dimensionamento de instalação elétrica pela demanda de consumo
Abb lv breakers working with trip curves
Apostila 20 comandos-20eletricos
Ad

Similar to Micromaster 420 operating instructions (20)

PDF
440 opi 24294529_en_1006
PDF
430 opi 24479264_en_1006
PDF
410 opi 21742069_en_0705
PDF
Caterpillar CAT 215 EXCAVATOR (96L00787-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual ...
PDF
Caterpillar CAT 313B EXCAVATOR (9PR00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual...
PDF
New holland mh plus wheel excavator service repair manual
PDF
Conext SmartBox-BA Owners Guide (975-0752-01-01_Rev-C)_ENG
PDF
Commander sx user guide
PDF
New holland mh6.6 wheel excavator service repair manual
PDF
TM.P7.02.pdf
PDF
New holland f156.6 a grader service repair manual
PDF
611 a start up
PDF
Catalog biến tần Inovance MD290
PDF
Fiat kobelco e22 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
PDF
Fiat kobelco e25 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
PDF
Fiat kobelco e20 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
PDF
Fiat kobelco e22 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
PDF
New holland w50 wheel loader service repair manual
PDF
New holland w70 wheel loader service repair manual
PDF
New holland w60 wheel loader service repair manual
440 opi 24294529_en_1006
430 opi 24479264_en_1006
410 opi 21742069_en_0705
Caterpillar CAT 215 EXCAVATOR (96L00787-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual ...
Caterpillar CAT 313B EXCAVATOR (9PR00001-UP) Operation and Maintenance Manual...
New holland mh plus wheel excavator service repair manual
Conext SmartBox-BA Owners Guide (975-0752-01-01_Rev-C)_ENG
Commander sx user guide
New holland mh6.6 wheel excavator service repair manual
TM.P7.02.pdf
New holland f156.6 a grader service repair manual
611 a start up
Catalog biến tần Inovance MD290
Fiat kobelco e22 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
Fiat kobelco e25 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
Fiat kobelco e20 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
Fiat kobelco e22 sr mini crawler excavator service repair manual
New holland w50 wheel loader service repair manual
New holland w70 wheel loader service repair manual
New holland w60 wheel loader service repair manual
Ad

Recently uploaded (20)

PPTX
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
PDF
Blue Purple Modern Animated Computer Science Presentation.pdf.pdf
PPTX
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
PDF
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
PDF
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
PDF
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
PPT
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
PDF
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
PDF
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
PPTX
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
PDF
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
PPTX
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
PPTX
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
PDF
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
PDF
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
PDF
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
PPTX
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
PDF
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
PPTX
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
PDF
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows
Digital-Transformation-Roadmap-for-Companies.pptx
Blue Purple Modern Animated Computer Science Presentation.pdf.pdf
MYSQL Presentation for SQL database connectivity
7 ChatGPT Prompts to Help You Define Your Ideal Customer Profile.pdf
Dropbox Q2 2025 Financial Results & Investor Presentation
Chapter 3 Spatial Domain Image Processing.pdf
“AI and Expert System Decision Support & Business Intelligence Systems”
The Rise and Fall of 3GPP – Time for a Sabbatical?
Network Security Unit 5.pdf for BCA BBA.
KOM of Painting work and Equipment Insulation REV00 update 25-dec.pptx
MIND Revenue Release Quarter 2 2025 Press Release
Cloud computing and distributed systems.
ACSFv1EN-58255 AWS Academy Cloud Security Foundations.pptx
NewMind AI Weekly Chronicles - August'25 Week I
Electronic commerce courselecture one. Pdf
Reach Out and Touch Someone: Haptics and Empathic Computing
Big Data Technologies - Introduction.pptx
Per capita expenditure prediction using model stacking based on satellite ima...
Spectroscopy.pptx food analysis technology
Peak of Data & AI Encore- AI for Metadata and Smarter Workflows

Micromaster 420 operating instructions

  • 1. MICROMASTER 420 0.12 kW - 11 kW Operating Instructions Issue 10/06 User Documentation 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 2. MICROMASTER 420 Documentation Getting Started Guide Is for quick commissioning with SDP and BOP. Operating Instructions Gives information about features of the MICROMASTER 420, Installation, Commissioning, Control modes, System Parameter structure, Troubleshooting, Specifications and available options of the MICROMASTER 420. Parameter List The Parameter List contains the description of all Parameters structured in functional order and a detailed description. The Parameter list also includes a series of function plans. Catalogues In the catalogue you will find all the necessary information to select an appropriate inverter, as well as filters, chokes, operator panels and communication options.
  • 3. MICROMASTER 420 0.12 kW - 11 kW Operating Instructions User Documentation Issue 10/06 Valid for Release Issue 10/06 Inverter Type Control Version MICROMASTER 420 V1.2 0.12 kW - 11 kW Overview 1 Installation 2 Commissioning 3 Troubleshooting 4 MICROMASTER 420 specifications 5 Options 6 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) 7 Appendices A B C D E F G Index
  • 4. MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 4 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Further information is available on the Internet under: http://www.siemens.de/micromaster Approved Siemens Quality for Software and Training is to DIN ISO 9001, Reg. No. 2160-01 The reproduction, transmission or use of this document, or its contents is not permitted unless authorized in writing. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design are reserved. © Siemens AG 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006. All Rights Reserved. MICROMASTER® is a registered trademark of Siemens. Other functions not described in this document may be available. However, this fact shall not constitute an obligation to supply such functions with a new control, or when servicing. We have checked that the contents of this document correspond to the hardware and software described. There may be discrepancies nevertheless, and no guarantee can be given that they are completely identical. The information contained in this document is reviewed regularly and any necessary changes will be included in the next edition. We welcome suggestions for improvement. Siemens handbooks are printed on chlorine-free paper that has been produced from managed sustainable forests. No solvents have been used in the printing or binding process. Document subject to change without prior notice. Order Number: 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Siemens-Aktiengesellschaft
  • 5. Issue 10/06 Foreword MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 5 Foreword User Documentation WARNING Before installing and commissioning, you must read the safety instructions and warnings carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels. Information is also available from: Regional Contacts Please get in touch with your contact for Technical Support in your Region for questions about services, prices and conditions of Technical Support. Central Technical Support The competent consulting service for technical issues with a broad range of requirements-based services around our products and systems. Europe / Africa Tel: +49 (0) 180 5050 222 Fax: +49 (0) 180 5050 223 Email: adsupport@siemens.com America Tel: +1 423 262 2522 Fax: +1 423 262 2589 Email: simatic.hotline@sea.siemens.com Asia / Pacific Tel: +86 1064 757 575 Fax: +86 1064 747 474 Email: adsupport.asia@siemens.com Online Service & Support The comprehensive, generally available information system over the Internet, from product support to service & support to the support tools in the shop. http://www.siemens.com/automation/service&support Contact address Should any questions or problems arise while reading this manual, please contact the Siemens office concerned using the form provided at the back this manual.
  • 6. Definitions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Definitions and Warnings DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. CAUTION used with the safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. CAUTION used without safety alert symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in a property damage. NOTICE indicates a potential situation which, if not avoided, may result in an undesirable result or state. NOTES For the purpose of this documentation, "Note" indicates important information relating to the product or highlights part of the documentation for special attention. Qualified personnel For the purpose of this Instruction Manual and product labels, a "Qualified person" is someone who is familiar with the installation, mounting, start-up and operation of the equipment and the hazards involved. He or she must have the following qualifications: 1. Trained and authorized to energize, de-energize, clear, ground and tag circuits and equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 2. Trained in the proper care and use of protective equipment in accordance with established safety procedures. 3. Trained in rendering first aid. PE = Ground ♦ PE – Protective Earth uses circuit protective conductors sized for short circuits where the voltage will not rise in excess of 50 Volts. This connection is normally used to ground the inverter. ♦ - Is the ground connection where the reference voltage can be the same as the Earth voltage. This connection is normally used to ground the motor. Use for intended purpose only The equipment may be used only for the application stated in the manual and only in conjunction with devices and components recommended and authorized by Siemens.
  • 7. Issue 10/06 Safety Instructions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 7 Safety Instructions The following Warnings, Cautions and Notes are provided for your safety and as a means of preventing damage to the product or components in the machines connected. This section lists Warnings, Cautions and Notes, which apply generally when handling MICROMASTER 420 Inverters, classified as General, Transport & Storage, Commissioning, Operation, Repair and Dismantling & Disposal. Specific Warnings, Cautions and Notes that apply to particular activities are listed at the beginning of the relevant chapters and are repeated or supplemented at critical points throughout these chapters. Please read the information carefully, since it is provided for your personal safety and will also help prolong the service life of your MICROMASTER 420 Inverter and the equipment you connect to it. General WARNING ♦ This equipment contains dangerous voltages and controls potentially dangerous rotating mechanical parts. Non-compliance with Warnings or failure to follow the instructions contained in this manual can result in loss of life, severe personal injury or serious damage to property. ♦ Only suitable qualified personnel should work on this equipment, and only after becoming familiar with all safety notices, installation, operation and maintenance procedures contained in this manual. The successful and safe operation of this equipment is dependent upon its proper handling, installation, operation and maintenance. ♦ Risk of electric shock. The DC link capacitors remain charged for five minutes after power has been removed. It is not permissible to open the equipment until 5 minutes after the power has been removed. ♦ HP ratings are based on the Siemens 1LA motors and are given for guidance only, they do not necessarily comply with UL or NEMA HP ratings. CAUTION ♦ Children and the general public must be prevented from accessing or approaching the equipment! ♦ This equipment may only be used for the purpose specified by the manufacturer. Unauthorized modifications and the use of spare parts and accessories that are not sold or recommended by the manufacturer of the equipment can cause fires, electric shocks and injuries.
  • 8. Safety Instructions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 8 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 NOTICE ♦ Keep these operating instructions within easy reach of the equipment and make them available to all users ♦ Whenever measuring or testing has to be performed on live equipment, the regulations of Safety Code VBG 4.0 must be observed, in particular § 8 "Permissible Deviations when Working on Live Parts”. Suitable electronic tools should be used. ♦ Before installing and commissioning, please read these safety instructions and warnings carefully and all the warning labels attached to the equipment. Make sure that the warning labels are kept in a legible condition and replace missing or damaged labels. Transport & Storage WARNING ♦ Correct transport, storage, erection and mounting, as well as careful operation and maintenance are essential for proper and safe operation of the equipment. CAUTION ♦ Protect the inverter against physical shocks and vibration during transport and storage. Also be sure to protect it against water (rainfall) and excessive temperatures (see Table 5-1 on page 184). Commissioning WARNING ♦ Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material. Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation, commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the device/system. ♦ Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards). ♦ If a Residual Current-operated protective Device (RCD) is to be used, it must be an RCD type B. Machines with a three phase power supply, fitted with EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker - see DIN VDE 0160, section 5.5.2 and EN50178 section 5.2.11.1). ♦ The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: - the power supply terminals L/L1, N/L2, L3. - the motor terminals U, V, W, DC+, DC- ♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4) CAUTION The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried out as shown in Fig. 2-8 on page 33, to prevent inductive and capacitive interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
  • 9. Issue 10/06 Safety Instructions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 9 Operation WARNING ♦ Motor parameters must be accurately configured for the motor overload protection to operate correctly. ♦ MICROMASTERS operate at high voltages. ♦ When operating electrical devices, it is impossible to avoid applying hazardous voltages to certain parts of the equipment. ♦ Emergency Stop facilities according to EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain operative in all operating modes of the control equipment. Any disengagement of the Emergency Stop facility must not lead to uncontrolled or undefined restart. ♦ Wherever faults occurring in the control equipment can lead to substantial material damage or even grievous bodily injury (i.e. potentially dangerous faults), additional external precautions must be taken or facilities provided to ensure or enforce safe operation, even when a fault occurs (e.g. independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks, etc.). ♦ Certain parameter settings may cause the inverter to restart automatically after an input power failure. ♦ This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection in accordance with UL508C section 42. Refer to P0610 and P0335, i 2 t is ON by default. Motor overload protection can also be provided using an external PTC via a digital input. ♦ This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V / 460 V when protected by an H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self- protected combination motor controller (for more details see Appendix F). ♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4).
  • 10. Safety Instructions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 10 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Repair WARNING ♦ Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by repair centers authorized by Siemens or by qualified personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual. ♦ Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant spare parts list. ♦ Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access Dismantling & Disposal NOTES ♦ The inverter’s packaging is re-usable. Retain the packaging for future use or return it to the manufacturer. ♦ Easy-to-release screw and snap connectors allow you to break the unit down into its component parts. You can then re-cycle these component parts, dispose of them in accordance with local requirements or return them to the manufacturer.
  • 11. Issue 10/06 Table of Contents MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 11 Table of Contents 1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 17 1.1 The MICROMASTER 420....................................................................................... 18 1.2 Features.................................................................................................................. 19 2 Installation............................................................................................................. 21 2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 23 2.2 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 23 2.3 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 25 2.4 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 27 3 Functions............................................................................................................... 35 3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 38 3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 52 3.3 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 56 3.4 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 57 3.5 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 59 3.6 Inputs / outputs ....................................................................................................... 89 3.7 Communications ..................................................................................................... 98 3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 121 3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 124 3.10 JOG....................................................................................................................... 126 3.11 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 128 3.12 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 132 3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 141 3.14 Electronic brakes .................................................................................................. 147 3.15 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 152 3.16 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 154 3.17 Closed-loop Vdc control........................................................................................ 156 3.18 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 158 3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses.............................................. 160 3.20 Power module protection...................................................................................... 164 3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 168
  • 12. Table of Contents Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 12 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 4 Troubleshooting.................................................................................................. 177 4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 178 4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP.............................................................................. 179 4.3 Fault messages and alarm messages.................................................................. 180 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications................................................................... 183 6 Options ................................................................................................................ 191 6.1 Device-independent options ................................................................................. 191 6.2 Device-dependent options.................................................................................... 191 7 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC).............................................................. 193 7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)................................................................... 194 Appendices .............................................................................................................................. 199 A Changing the Operator Panel............................................................................ 199 B Removing Covers ............................................................................................... 200 B.1 Removing Covers Frame Size A .......................................................................... 200 B.2 Removing Covers Frame Size B and C................................................................ 201 C Removing ‘Y’ Cap ............................................................................................... 202 C.1 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A .......................................................................... 202 C.2 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C................................................................ 203 D Removing fan ...................................................................................................... 204 D.1 Removing fan, Frame Size A................................................................................ 204 D.2 Removing fan, Frame Sizes B and C ................................................................... 205 E Applicable Standards ......................................................................................... 206 F Short circuit current rating (SCCR)................................................................... 207 G List of Abbreviations .......................................................................................... 208 Index .............................................................................................................................. 211
  • 13. Issue 10/06 Table of Contents MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 13 List of Illustrations Fig. 2-1 Forming ................................................................................................................................ 23 Fig. 2-2 Ambient operating temperature............................................................................................ 23 Fig. 2-3 Installation altitude................................................................................................................ 24 Fig. 2-4 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420 ................................................................................... 25 Fig. 2-5 MICROMASTER 420 connection terminals.......................................................................... 30 Fig. 2-6 Motor and Power Connections ............................................................................................. 30 Fig. 2-7 Control terminals of MICROMASTER 420............................................................................ 31 Fig. 2-8 Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI................................................................. 33 Fig. 3-1 Parameter types ................................................................................................................... 38 Fig. 3-2 Header line for parameter P0305 ......................................................................................... 42 Fig. 3-3 Parameter grouping / access................................................................................................ 43 Fig. 3-4 Binectors .............................................................................................................................. 47 Fig. 3-5 Connectors........................................................................................................................... 48 Fig. 3-6 BICO connections (examples).............................................................................................. 49 Fig. 3-7 Normalization / de-normalization .......................................................................................... 51 Fig. 3-8 Operator panels.................................................................................................................... 52 Fig. 3-9 Operator panel keys ............................................................................................................. 54 Fig. 3-10 Changing parameters using the BOP................................................................................... 55 Fig. 3-11 MICROMASTER 420 – block diagram ................................................................................. 56 Fig. 3-12 Status Display Panel (SDP).................................................................................................. 57 Fig. 3-13 Recommended wiring for the factory setting ........................................................................ 58 Fig. 3-14 Procedure when commissioning........................................................................................... 59 Fig. 3-15 DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz...................................................................... 61 Fig. 3-16 Mode of operation of the 50/60 Hz DIP switch in conjunction with P0100............................ 61 Fig. 3-17 Example of a typical motor rating plate ................................................................................ 65 Fig. 3-18 Motor terminal box................................................................................................................ 66 Fig. 3-19 Star / delta circuit configurations .......................................................................................... 67 Fig. 3-20 V/f characteristic................................................................................................................... 67 Fig. 3-21 Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools....................................................................... 86 Fig. 3-22 Digital inputs......................................................................................................................... 89 Fig. 3-23 Digital output ........................................................................................................................ 92 Fig. 3-24 Connection example for ADC voltage input.......................................................................... 94 Fig. 3-25 ADC channel ........................................................................................................................ 94 Fig. 3-26 Wire breakage monitoring .................................................................................................... 95 Fig. 3-27 Signal output through the DAC channel ............................................................................... 96 Fig. 3-28 DAC channel ........................................................................................................................ 96 Fig. 3-29 Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link................................................... 98 Fig. 3-30 Cycle times......................................................................................................................... 101
  • 14. Table of Contents Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 14 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Fig. 3-31 Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer (master).............. 102 Fig. 3-32 Telegram structure .............................................................................................................103 Fig. 3-33 Assignment of the address byte (ADR) .............................................................................. 104 Fig. 3-34 Circulating list (Example of configuration) .......................................................................... 105 Fig. 3-35 Cycle time........................................................................................................................... 105 Fig. 3-36 Transmit sequence............................................................................................................. 106 Fig. 3-37 USS bus topology...............................................................................................................107 Fig. 3-38 Telegram structure .............................................................................................................109 Fig. 3-39 Structure of the PKW and PZD areas................................................................................. 109 Fig. 3-40 Connecting the USS bus cable........................................................................................... 118 Fig. 3-41 Connecting the RS485 terminator ...................................................................................... 119 Fig. 3-42 Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2.......................................... 122 Fig. 3-43 Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded method .... 123 Fig. 3-44 Motorized potentiometer..................................................................................................... 124 Fig. 3-45 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise....................................................................... 126 Fig. 3-46 Structure of the technological controller (PID controller) .................................................... 128 Fig. 3-47 PID controller...................................................................................................................... 129 Fig. 3-48 Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via DIN1.............. 131 Fig. 3-49 Setpoint channel................................................................................................................. 132 Fig. 3-50 Summation ......................................................................................................................... 133 Fig. 3-51 Modifying the frequency setpoint........................................................................................ 133 Fig. 3-52 Ramp-function generator.................................................................................................... 134 Fig. 3-53 Rounding off after an OFF1 command ............................................................................... 135 Fig. 3-54 OFF1 .................................................................................................................................. 137 Fig. 3-55 OFF2 .................................................................................................................................. 138 Fig. 3-56 OFF3 .................................................................................................................................. 138 Fig. 3-57 Changing-over using the BICO parameter P0810.............................................................. 139 Fig. 3-58 Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1 ................................................................................. 141 Fig. 3-59 Motor holding brake after OFF2 ......................................................................................... 142 Fig. 3-60 Direct motor holding brake connection ............................................................................... 145 Fig. 3-61 Indirect motor holding brake connection............................................................................. 146 Fig. 3-62 Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes.......................................................................... 147 Fig. 3-63 DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3........................................................................................... 148 Fig. 3-64 DC braking after external selection .................................................................................... 149 Fig. 3-65 Compound braking ............................................................................................................. 150 Fig. 3-66 Flying restart....................................................................................................................... 155 Fig. 3-67 Vdc_max controller.............................................................................................................156 Fig. 3-68 Drive inverter response ...................................................................................................... 161 Fig. 3-69 PTC characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors........................................................................... 162
  • 15. Issue 10/06 Table of Contents MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 15 Fig. 3-70 Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER 420................................................ 163 Fig. 3-71 Drive inverter response to an overload condition ............................................................... 165 Fig. 3-72 Overload response of the drive inverter (P0290)................................................................ 166 Fig. 3-73 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from a drive inverter............................................................................................ 169 Fig. 3-74 Slip compensation ..............................................................................................................173 Fig. 3-75 Effect of V/f resonance damping ........................................................................................ 174 Fig. 3-76 Imax controller.................................................................................................................... 175 List of Tables Table 2-1 Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 420............................................................... 25 Table 3-1 Parameter attributes............................................................................................................. 40 Table 3-2 Parameter P0700 ................................................................................................................. 44 Table 3-3 Parameter P1000 ................................................................................................................. 45 Table 3-4 Parameter P0719 ................................................................................................................. 46 Table 3-5 Normalized interfaces........................................................................................................... 50 Table 3-6 Normalization functions ........................................................................................................50 Table 3-7 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs ..................................................................................... 57 Table 3-8 Example 1LA7060-4AB10 .................................................................................................... 68 Table 3-9 Parameter for motor/control data.......................................................................................... 69 Table 3-10 Parameters P0701 – P0706 ................................................................................................. 90 Table 3-11 Parameter P0731 (frequently used functions / states).......................................................... 93 Table 3-12 BOP link ............................................................................................................................... 99 Table 3-13 COM link............................................................................................................................... 99 Table 3-14 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates................................................................... 106 Table 3-15 Structural data .................................................................................................................... 107 Table 3-16 Thermal and electrical characteristics ................................................................................ 108 Table 3-17 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate....................... 108 Table 3-18 Task IDs (master -> drive converter).................................................................................. 112 Table 3-19 Response ID (converter -> master) .................................................................................... 113 Table 3-20 Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed" .................................... 114 Table 3-21 Example for direct coding via digital inputs......................................................................... 121 Table 3-22 Example for binary coding via digital inputs........................................................................ 123 Table 3-23 Mode of operation of the MOP ........................................................................................... 125 Table 3-24 Selecting the motorized potentiometer ............................................................................... 125 Table 3-25 Correspondence between the parameters ......................................................................... 130 Table 3-26 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator ................................................................... 136 Table 3-27 Examples for the parameter settings of P0810................................................................... 139 Table 3-28 Possible parameter settings for P0719............................................................................... 140
  • 16. Table of Contents Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 16 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-29 Automatic restarts .............................................................................................................. 152 Table 3-30 Settings for parameter P1200............................................................................................. 154 Table 3-31 Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 159 Table 3-32 Thermal classes ................................................................................................................. 162 Table 3-33 General protection of the power components..................................................................... 164 Table 3-34 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300).................................................................................. 169 Table 3-35 Voltage boost ..................................................................................................................... 170 Table 4-1 Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP ....................................................... 178 Table 5-1 MICROMASTER Performance Ratings.............................................................................. 184 Table 5-2 Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals ............. 185 Table 5-3 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency............................................................... 185 Table 5-4 MICROMASTER 420 Specifications .................................................................................. 186 Table 7-1 Permissible harmonic current emissions ............................................................................ 195 Table 7-2 Class 1 - General Industrial................................................................................................ 196 Table 7-3 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial................................................................................................. 196 Table 7-4 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential, Commercial and trade applications ............................... 197 Table 7-5 Compliance Table .............................................................................................................. 198
  • 17. Issue 10/06 1 Overview MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 17 1 Overview This Chapter contains: A summary of the major features of the MICROMASTER 420 range. 1.1 The MICROMASTER 420....................................................................................... 18 1.2 Features.................................................................................................................. 19
  • 18. 1 Overview Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 18 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 1.1 The MICROMASTER 420 The MICROMASTER 420s are a range of frequency inverters for controlling the speed of three phase AC motors. The various models available range from the 120 W single-phase input to the 11 kW three-phase input. The inverters are microprocessor-controlled and use state-of-the-art Insulated Gate BipoIar Transistor (IGBT) technology. This makes them reliable and versatile. A special pulse-width modulation method with selectable Pulse frequency permits quiet motor operation. Comprehensive protective functions provide excellent inverter and motor protection. The MICROMASTER 420 with its default factory settings, is ideal for a large range of simple motor control applications. The MICROMASTER 420 can also be used for more advanced motor control applications via its comprehensive parameter lists. The MICROMASTER 420 can be used in both 'stand-alone' applications as well as being integrated into 'Automation Systems'.
  • 19. Issue 10/06 1 Overview MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 19 1.2 Features Main Characteristics Easy installation Easy commissioning Rugged EMC design Can be operated on IT line supplies Fast repeatable response time to control signals Comprehensive range of parameters enabling configuration for a wide range of applications Simple cable connection 1 Output relay 1 Analog output (0 – 20 mA) 3 Isolated and switchable NPN/PNP digital inputs 1 Analog input, ADC: 0 – 10 V The analog input can be used as the 4th digital input BICO technology Modular design for extremely flexible configuration High switching frequencies for low-noise motor operation Detailed status information and integrated message functions Performance Characteristics V/f Control ♦ Flux Current Control (FCC) for improved dynamic response and motor control ♦ Multi-point V/f characteristic Automatic restart Flying restart Slip compensation Fast Current Limitation (FCL) for trip-free operation Motor holding brake Built-in DC injection brake Compound braking to improve braking performance Setpoint input via: ♦ Analog input ♦ Communication interface ♦ JOG function ♦ Motorized potentiometer ♦ Fixed frequencies Ramp function generator ♦ With smoothing ♦ Without smoothing Closed-loop control with proportional-integral controller function (PI)
  • 20. 1 Overview Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 20 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Protection characteristics Overvoltage/undervoltage protection Overtemperature protection for the inverter Ground fault protection Short-circuit protection i2 t thermal motor protection PTC for motor protection Options Refer to Chapter 6
  • 21. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 21 2 Installation This Chapter contains: General data relating to installation Dimensions of Inverter Wiring guidelines to minimize the effects of EMI Details concerning electrical installation 2.1 General ................................................................................................................... 23 2.2 Ambient operating conditions ................................................................................. 23 2.3 Mechanical installation............................................................................................ 24 2.4 Electrical installation ............................................................................................... 27
  • 22. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 22 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 WARNING ♦ Work on the device/system by unqualified personnel or failure to comply with warnings can result in severe personal injury or serious damage to material. Only suitably qualified personnel trained in the setup, installation, commissioning and operation of the product should carry out work on the device/system. ♦ Only permanently-wired input power connections are allowed. This equipment must be grounded (IEC 536 Class 1, NEC and other applicable standards). ♦ If a Residual Current-operated protective Device (RCD) is to be used, it must be an RCD type B. Machines with a three-phase power supply, fitted with EMC filters, must not be connected to a supply via an ELCB (Earth Leakage Circuit-Breaker EN50178 Section 5.2.11.1). ♦ The following terminals can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative: - the power supply terminals L/L1, N/L2, L3. - the motor terminals U, V, W, DC+, DC- ♦ Always wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. ♦ This equipment must not be used as an ‘emergency stop mechanism’ (see EN 60204, 9.2.5.4) ♦ The minimum size of the earth bonding conductor must be equal to or greater than the cross-section of the power supply cables. CAUTION The connection of power, motor and control cables to the inverter must be carried out as shown in Fig. 2-8 on page 33, to prevent inductive and capacitive interference from affecting the correct functioning of the inverter.
  • 23. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 23 2.1 General Installation after a Period of Storage Following a prolonged period of storage, you must reform the capacitors in the inverter. The requirements are listed below. Storage period less than 1 year: No action necessary Storage period 1 to 2 years Prior to energizing, connect to voltage for one hour Storage period 2 to 3 years Prior to energizing, form according to the curve Storage period 3 and more years Prior to energizing, form according to the curve 100 50 75 0,5 1 Voltage [%] Time t [h] 2 4 6 8 Fig. 2-1 Forming 2.2 Ambient operating conditions Temperature 0 20 3010 40 [°C] Operating temperature -10 50 60 75 50 25 100 [%] Permissible output current Fig. 2-2 Ambient operating temperature
  • 24. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 24 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Humidity Relative air humidity ≤ 95% Non-condensing Altitude If the inverter is to be installed at an altitude > 1000 m or > 2000 m above sea level, derating will be required: 80 100 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 Permissible output current % Installation altitude in m above sea level Permissible input voltage 80 100 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 % Installation altitude in m above sea level 77 Fig. 2-3 Installation altitude Shock and Vibration Do not drop the inverter or expose to sudden shock. Do not install the inverter in an area where it is likely to be exposed to constant vibration. Mechanical strength to EN 60721-3-3 Deflection: 0.075 mm (10 ... 58 Hz) Acceleration: 9.8 m/s2 (> 58 ... 200 Hz) Electromagnetic Radiation Do not install the inverter near sources of electromagnetic radiation. Atmospheric Pollution Do not install the inverter in an environment, which contains atmospheric pollutants such as dust, corrosive gases, etc. Water Take care to site the inverter away from potential water hazards, e.g. do not install the inverter beneath pipes that are subject to condensation. Avoid installing the inverter where excessive humidity and condensation may occur. Installation and cooling CAUTION The inverters MUST NOT be mounted horizontally. The inverters can be mounted without any clearance at either side. Allow 100 mm clearance above and below the inverter. Make sure that the cooling vents in the inverter are positioned correctly to allow free movement of air.
  • 25. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 25 2.3 Mechanical installation WARNING ♦ To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid down in these operating instructions. ♦ Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective gear. ♦ The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. ♦ The inverters can be mounted adjacent to each other. If they are mounted on top of each other, however, a clearance of 100 mm has to be observed. ♦ IP20 protection is only against direct contact, always use these products within a protective cabinet. 4 160 mm 6.30" 55 mm 2.2" Ø 4.5 mm 0.17" Ø 4.8 mm 0.19" 174 mm 6.85" 138 mm 5.43" Ø 5.5 mm 0.22" 204 mm 8.03" 174 mm 6.85" Frame Size A Frame Size B Frame Size C Fig. 2-4 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420 Table 2-1 Dimensions and Torques of MICROMASTER 420 Frame-Size Overall Dimensions Fixing Method Tightening Torque mm 73 x 173 x 149 A Width x Height x Depth inch 2.87 x 6.81 x 5.87 2 x M4 Bolts 2 x M4 Nuts 2 x M4 Washers for mounting on standard rail 2.5 Nm with washers fitted mm 149 x 202 x 172 B Width x Height x Depth inch 5.87 x 7.95 x 6.77 4 x M4 Bolts 4 x M4 Nuts 4 x M4 Washers 2.5 Nm with washers fitted mm 185 x 245 x 195 C Width x Height x Depth inch 7.28 x 9.65 x 7.68 4 x M5 Bolts 4 x M5 Nuts 4 x M5 Washers 2.5 Nm with washers fitted
  • 26. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 26 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Upper rail latch Lower rail latch Release Mechanism 2.3.1 Mounting on standard rail, Frame Size A Fitting the Inverter to a 35 mm standard rail (EN 50022) 1. Fit the inverter to the rail using the upper rail latch. 2. Push the inverter against the rail and the lower rail latch should click into place. Removing the Inverter from the rail 1. To disengaged the release mechanism of the inverter, insert a screwdriver into the release mechanism. 2. Apply a downward pressure and the lower rail latch will disengage. 3. Pull the inverter from the rail.
  • 27. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 27 2.4 Electrical installation WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. ♦ To ensure the safe operation of the equipment, it must be installed and commissioned by qualified personnel in full compliance with the warnings laid down in these operating instructions. ♦ Take particular note of the general and regional installation and safety regulations regarding work on dangerous voltage installations (e.g. EN 50178), as well as the relevant regulations regarding the correct use of tools and personal protective gear. ♦ Never use high voltage insulation test equipment on cables connected to the inverter. ♦ The mains input, DC and motor terminals, can carry dangerous voltages even if the inverter is inoperative; wait 5 minutes to allow the unit to discharge after switching off before carrying out any installation work. CAUTION The control, power supply and motor leads must be laid separately. Do not feed them through the same cable conduit/trunking.
  • 28. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 28 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 2.4.1 General WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. If the inverter is not grounded correctly, extremely dangerous conditions may arise within the inverter, which could prove potentially fatal. Operation with ungrounded (IT) supplies Filtered It is not permissible to connect MICROMASTER 4 drive converters equipped with integrated filter to non-grounded line supplies. Unfiltered If connected to non-grounded line supplies, the 'Y' capacitor must be disabled in the device. The procedure is described in Attachment B.2. If the MICROMASTER is to remain in operation in non-grounded networks when a ground fault occurs during the input or output phase, an output reactor must be installed. Operation with Residual Current Device If an RCD (also referred to as ELCB or RCCB) is fitted, the MICROMASTER inverters will operate without nuisance tripping, provided that: A type B RCD is used. The trip limit of the RCD is 300mA. The neutral of the supply is grounded. Only one inverter is supplied from each RCD. The output cables are less than 50m (screened) or 100m (unscreened). NOTE The residual current operated circuit-breakers used must provide protection against direct-current components in the fault current and must be suitable for briefly suppressing power pulse current peaks. It is recommended to protect the frequency inverter by fuse separately. The regulations of the individual country (e.g. VDE regulations in Germany) and the regional power suppliers must be observed!
  • 29. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 29 2.4.2 Power and motor connections WARNING The inverter must always be grounded. ♦ Isolate the mains electrical supply before making or changing connections to the unit. ♦ Ensure that the motor is configured for the correct supply voltage: single / three-phase 230 V MICROMASTERS must not be connected to a 400 V three-phase supply. ♦ When synchronous motors are connected or when coupling several motors in parallel, the inverter must be operated with voltage/frequency control characteristic (P1300 = 0, 2 or 3). CAUTION After connecting the power and motor cables to the proper terminals, make sure that the covers have been replaced properly before supplying power to the unit! NOTICE ♦ Ensure that the appropriate circuit-breakers/fuses with the specified current rating are connected between the power supply and inverter (see chapter 5, Tables starting on page 186). ♦ Use Class 1 60/75o C copper wire only (for UL compliance). For tightening torque see Table 5-2, page 185. Operation with long cables All inverters will operate at full specification with cable lengths up to 50 m screened or 100 m unscreened. When using output reactors as shown in Catalog DA 51.2, the following cable lengths are possible: Supply Voltage 200 V … 240 V ± 10 % 380 V … 400 V ± 10 % 401 V … 480 V ± 10 % Frame Sizes A … C A … B C A … C Shielded 200 m 150 m 200 m 100 m Non-shielded 300 m 225 m 300 m 150 m CAUTION When using output reactors and LC filters, operation up to a pulse frequency of 4 kHz only is permitted. Please ensure that the automatic pulse frequency reductions are also deactivated. Mandatory parameter settings when using an output reactor: P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1.
  • 30. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 30 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Access to the power and motor terminals You can gain access to the mains and motor terminals by removing the covers (see also Appendices A and B). The mains and motor connections must be made as shown in Fig. 2-6. L2/N L3 L1/L U V W Fig. 2-5 MICROMASTER 420 connection terminals L2 L1 N Fuse Contactor Optional Filter PE Optional line choke MICROMASTER 1) PE L/L1 N/L2 U V W Motor L3 Single Phase PE L3 L2 L1 Fuse Contactor Optional Filter PE Optional line choke MICROMASTER 1) PE L3 L2 L1 U V W Motor Three Phase PE 1) with and without filter Fig. 2-6 Motor and Power Connections
  • 31. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 31 2.4.3 Control terminals Permitted cable diameters: 0.08 … 2.5 mm2 (AWG: 28 … 12) Terminal Designation Function 1 - Output +10 V 2 - Output 0 V 3 ADC+ Analog input 1 (+) 4 ADC- Analog input 1 (-) 5 DIN1 Digital input 1 6 DIN2 Digital input 2 7 DIN3 Digital input 3 8 - Isolated output +24 V / max. 100 mA 9 - Isolated output 0 V / max. 100 mA 10 RL1-B Digital output / NO contact 11 RL1-C Digital output / Changeover contact 12 DAC+ Analog output (+) 13 DAC- Analog output (-) 14 P+ RS485 port 15 P- RS485 port Fig. 2-7 Control terminals of MICROMASTER 420 A detailed description of the inputs and outputs is provided in Section 3.6.
  • 32. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 32 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 2.4.4 Avoiding Electro-Magnetic Interference (EMI) The inverters are designed to operate in an industrial environment where a high level of EMI can be expected. Usually, good installation practices will ensure safe and trouble-free operation. If you encounter problems, follow the guidelines stated below. Action to Take Ensure that all equipment in the cubicle is well grounded using short, thick grounding cable connected to a common star point or busbar Make sure that any control equipment (such as a PLC) connected to the inverter is connected to the same ground or star point as the inverter via a short thick link. Connect the return ground from the motors controlled by the inverters directly to the ground connection (PE) on the associated inverter Flat conductors are preferred as they have lower impedance at higher frequencies Terminate the ends of the cable neatly, ensuring that unscreened wires are as short as possible Separate the control cables from the power cables as much as possible, using separate trunking, if necessary at 90º to each other. Whenever possible, use screened leads for the connections to the control circuitry Ensure that the contactors in the cubicle are suppressed, either with R-C suppressors for AC contactors or 'flywheel' diodes for DC contactors fitted to the coils. Varistor suppressors are also effective. This is important when the contactors are controlled from the inverter relay Use screened or armored cables for the motor connections and ground the screen at both ends using the cable clamps WARNING Safety regulations must not be compromised when installing inverters!
  • 33. Issue 10/06 2 Installation MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 33 2.4.5 Screening Methods Gland Plate The Gland Plate Kit is supplied as an option. It allows easy and efficient connection of the necessary screening. See the Gland Plate Installation Instructions contained on the Docu-CD. Screening without a Gland Plate Should a Gland Plate not be available, then the inverter can be screened using the methodology shown in Fig. 2-8. 1 Mains power input 2 Control cable 3 Motor cable 4 Footprint filter 5 Metal back plate 6 Use suitable clips to fix motor and control cable screens securely to metal back plate 7 Screening cables Fig. 2-8 Wiring Guidelines to Minimize the Effects of EMI
  • 34. 2 Installation Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 34 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 35. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 35 3 Functions This Section includes the following: Explanation of the MICROMASTER 420 parameters An overview of the parameter structure of MICROMASTER 420 A description of the display and operator control elements and communications A block diagram of MICROMASTER 420 An overview of the various ways of commissioning the MICROMASTER 420 A description of the inputs and outputs Possibilities of controlling the MICROMASTER 420 A description of the various functions of the MICROMASTER 420 and their implementation Explanation and information on the protective functions 3.1 Parameters ............................................................................................................. 38 3.1.1 Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes ..................................... 38 3.1.2 Interconnecting signals (BICO technology) ............................................................ 44 3.1.2.1 Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source P1000....... 44 3.1.2.2 Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719 .................................................. 46 3.1.2.3 BICO technology..................................................................................................... 47 3.1.3 Reference quantities............................................................................................... 50 3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER..................................................................... 52 3.2.1 Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel) ..................................................... 52 3.2.2 Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) .............................................. 53 3.2.3 Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP) ................................ 54 3.2.4 Changing parameters using the operator panel ..................................................... 55 3.3 Block diagram ......................................................................................................... 56 3.4 Factory setting ........................................................................................................ 57 3.5 Commissioning ....................................................................................................... 59 3.5.1 50/60 Hz setting...................................................................................................... 61 3.5.2 Quick commissioning.............................................................................................. 62 3.5.3 Calculating the motor / control data........................................................................ 69 3.5.4 Motor data identification (stator resistance)............................................................ 70 3.5.5 Commissioning the application............................................................................... 72 3.5.5.1 Serial Interface (USS)............................................................................................. 72 3.5.5.2 Selection of command source ................................................................................ 73 3.5.5.3 Digital input (DIN).................................................................................................... 73 3.5.5.4 Digital output (DOUT) ............................................................................................. 74 3.5.5.5 Selection of frequency setpoint............................................................................... 74 3.5.5.6 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 75 3.5.5.7 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 76 3.5.5.8 Motor potentiometer (MOP).................................................................................... 77 3.5.5.9 Fixed frequency (FF)............................................................................................... 78 3.5.5.10 JOG......................................................................................................................... 78 3.5.5.11 Ramp-function generator (HLG) ............................................................................. 79 3.5.5.12 Reference/limit frequencies .................................................................................... 80 3.5.5.13 Motor control........................................................................................................... 80 3.5.5.14 Inverter/motor protection......................................................................................... 82
  • 36. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 36 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.15 Inverter-specific Functions...................................................................................... 83 3.5.6 Series commissioning............................................................................................. 86 3.5.7 Parameter reset to the factory setting..................................................................... 88 3.6 Inputs / outputs ....................................................................................................... 89 3.6.1 Digital inputs (DIN).................................................................................................. 89 3.6.2 Digital output (DOUT) ............................................................................................. 92 3.6.3 Analog input (ADC)................................................................................................. 94 3.6.4 Analog output (DAC)............................................................................................... 96 3.7 Communication....................................................................................................... 98 3.7.1 Universal serial interface (USS)............................................................................ 100 3.7.1.1 Protocol specification and bus structure............................................................... 102 3.7.1.2 The structure of net data....................................................................................... 109 3.7.1.3 USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485)...................................................... 118 3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF).......................................................................................... 121 3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) ........................................................................... 124 3.10 JOG....................................................................................................................... 126 3.11 PID controller (technological controller)................................................................ 128 3.11.1 PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) ............................................................. 130 3.11.2 PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF)................................................................................... 131 3.12 Setpoint channel ................................................................................................... 132 3.12.1 Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM)............................. 132 3.12.2 Ramp-function generator (RFG)........................................................................... 134 3.12.3 OFF/braking functions .......................................................................................... 137 3.12.4 Manual / automatic operation ............................................................................... 139 3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB)................................................................................... 141 3.14.1 DC braking............................................................................................................ 147 3.14.2 Compound braking................................................................................................ 150 3.15 Automatic restart................................................................................................... 152 3.16 Flying restart ......................................................................................................... 154 3.17.1 Vdc_max controller ............................................................................................... 156 3.18 Monitoring functions / messages .......................................................................... 158 3.18.1 General monitoring functions / messages ............................................................ 158 3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses ............................................. 160 3.19.1 Thermal motor model............................................................................................ 160 3.19.2 PTC temperature sensor ...................................................................................... 162 3.20 Power module protection...................................................................................... 164 3.20.1 General overload monitoring ................................................................................ 164 3.20.2 Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses........................................ 165 3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique ............................................................. 168 3.21.1 V/f control.............................................................................................................. 168 3.21.1.1 Voltage boost........................................................................................................ 170 3.21.1.2 V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC)............................................ 172 3.21.1.3 Slip compensation................................................................................................. 172 3.21.1.4 V/f resonance damping......................................................................................... 174 3.21.1.5 Current limiting (Imax controller)........................................................................... 175
  • 37. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 37 WARNING MICROMASTER drive inverters operate with high voltages. When electrical equipment is operated, then specific parts of this equipment are at hazardous voltage levels. Emergency switching-off devices in compliance with EN 60204 IEC 204 (VDE 0113) must remain functional in all operating modes of the control device. When the Emergency switching-off device is reset, then it is not permissible that the equipment runs-up again in an uncontrolled or undefined way. In cases and situations where short-circuits in the control device can result in significant material damage or even severe bodily injury (i.e. potentially hazardous short-circuits), then additional external measures or devices/equipment must be provided in order to ensure or force operation without any potential hazards, even if a short-circuit occurs (e.g. independent limit switches, mechanical interlocks etc.). Certain parameter settings can mean that the drive inverter automatically restarts after the power supply voltage fails and then returns. The motor parameters must be precisely configured in order to ensure perfect motor overload protection. The drive inverter provides internal motor overload protection according to UL508C, Section 42. Also refer to P0610, P0611 and P0335 - I2 t is enabled in the default setting. This equipment is suitable for use in a circuit capable of delivering not more than 10,000 symmetrical amperes (rms), for a maximum voltage of 230 V / 460 V when protected by an H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self- protected combination motor controller (for more details see Appendix F). The drive unit may not be used as 'Emergency switching-off device' (refer to EN 60204, 9.2.5.4). CAUTION Only qualified personnel may commission (start-up) the equipment. Safety measures and warnings must be always extremely carefully observed and fulfilled.
  • 38. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 38 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.1 Parameters 3.1.1 Setting / monitoring parameters and parameter attributes The drive inverter is adapted to the particular application using the appropriate parameters. This means that each parameter is identified by a parameter number, parameter text and specific attributes (e.g. readable, can be written into, BICO attribute, group attribute etc.). Within any one particular drive system, the parameter number is unique. On the other hand, an attribute can be assigned a multiple number of times so that several parameters can have the same attribute. For MICROMASTER, parameters can be accessed using the following operator units: BOP (option) AOP (option) PC-based commissioning (start-up) tool "Drive Monitor" or "STARTER". These PC-based tools are supplied on the CD-ROM. The parameter types are the main differentiating feature of the parameters. Parameter "normal" Write-/Read parameters Read (r....) Write/Read (P....) BICO output BICO input"normal" Read parameters Fig. 3-1 Parameter types Setting parameters Parameters which can be written into and read – "P" parameters These parameters are activated/de-activated in the individual functions and directly influence the behavior of a function. The value of this parameter is saved in a non- volatile memory (EEPROM) as long as the appropriate option was selected (non- volatile data save). Otherwise, these values are saved in the non-volatile memory (RAM) of the processor, which are lost after power failure or power-off/power-on operations. Notation: P0927 setting parameter 927 P0748.1 setting parameter 748, bit 01 P0719[1] setting parameter 719 index 1 P0013[0...19] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19) Abbreviated notation P0013[20] setting parameter 13 with 20 indices (indices 0 to 19)
  • 39. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 39 Monitoring parameters These can only be read – "r" parameters These parameters are used to display internal quantities, for example states and actual values. These parameters are indispensable, especially for diagnostics. Notation: r0002 monitoring parameter 2 r0052.3 monitoring parameter 52, bit 03 r0947[2] monitoring parameter 947 index 2 r0964[0...4] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4) Abbreviated notation r0964[5] monitoring parameter 964 with 5 indices (indices 0 to 4) NOTE A parameter (e.g. P0013[20]) with x consecutive elements (in this case: 20) is defined using an index. x is defined by the numerical index value. When transferred to a parameter this means that an indexed parameter can assume several values. The values are addressed via the parameter number including the index value (e.g. P0013[0], P0013[1], P0013[2], P0013[3], P0013[4], ...). Index parameters, for example, are used for: Table functions Sub-functions In addition to the parameter number and parameter text, every setting and monitoring parameter has different attributes which are used to individually define the properties/characteristics of the parameter. The attributes are listed in the following Table (refer to Table 3-1) which are used for MICROMASTER. P0013[0] P0013[1] P0013[2] P0013[18] P0013[19] ...
  • 40. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 40 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-1 Parameter attributes Attribute group Attribute Description The data type of a parameter defines the maximum possible value range. 3 data types are used for MICROMASTER. They either represent an unsigned integer value (U16, U32) or a floating-point value (float). The value range is frequently restricted by a minimum, maximum value (min, max) or using drive inverter/motor quantities. U16 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 16 bits, max. value range: 0 .... 65535 U32 Unsigned, integer value with a size of 32 bits max. value range: 0 .... 4294967295 Data types Float A simple precise floating point value according to the IEEE standard format max. value range: -3.39e +38 – +3.39e +38 The value range, which is specified as a result of the data type, is restricted/limited by the minimum, maximum value (min, max) and using drive inverter/motor quantities. Straightforward commissioning (start-up) is guaranteed in so much that the parameters have a default value. These values (min, def, max) are permanently saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user. - No value entered (e.g.: "r parameter") Min Minimum value Def Default value Value range Max Maximum value For MICROMASTER, the units of a particular parameter involve the physical quantity (e.g. m, s, A). Quantities are measurable properties/characteristics of physical objects, operations, states and are represented using characters of a formula (e.g. V = 9 V). - No dimension % Percentage A Ampere V Volt Ohm Ohm us Microseconds ms Milliseconds s Seconds Hz Hertz kHz Kilohertz 1/min Revolutions per minute [RPM] m/s Meters per second Nm Newton meter W Watt kW Kilowatt Hp Horse power kWh Kilowatt hours °C Degrees Celsius m Meter kg Kilograms Unit ° Degrees (angular degrees)
  • 41. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 41 Attribute group Attribute Description The access level is controlled using parameter P0003. In this case, only those parameters are visible at the BOP or AOP, where the access level is less than or equal to the value assigned in parameter P0003. On the other hand, for DriveMonitor and STARTER, only access levels 0 and 4 are relevant. For example, parameters with access level 4 cannot be changed if the appropriate access level has not been set. The following access levels are implemented in the family of MICROMASTER drive units: 0 User-defined parameter list (refer to P0013) 1 Standard access to the most frequently used parameters 2 Extended access, e.g. to drive inverter I/O functions 3 Expert access only for experienced users Access level As far as the ability to visualize the parameters is concerned, the group assignment of the individual parameters must be taken into account. Parameter P0004 is used for the control (refer to the Grouping). The parameters are sub-divided into groups according to their functionality. This increases the transparency and allows a parameter to be quickly searched for. Furthermore, parameter P0004 can be used to control the ability to be visualized for the BOP / AOP. Main parameter area: ALWAYS 0 all parameters INVERTER 2 drive inverter parameters 0200 .... 0299 TECH_APL 5 technical applications / units 0500 .... 0599 COMMANDS 7 control commands, digital I/O 0700 .... 0749 and 0800 .... 0899 TERMINAL 8 Analog inputs/outputs 0750 .... 0799 SETPOINT 10 Setpoint channel and ramp-function gen. 1000 .... 1199 FUNC 12 Drive inverter functions 1200 .... 1299 CONTROL 13 Motor open-loop/closed-loop control 1300 .... 1799 COMM 20 Communications 2000 .... 2099 ALARMS 21 Faults, warnings, monitoring functions" 2100 .... 2199 Grouping TECH 22 Technological controller (PID controller) 2200 .... 2399 Description for Binector Input (BI), Binector Output (BO), Connector Input (CI), Connector Output (CO) and Connector Output / Binector Output (CO/BO), refer to Section 3.1.2.3 BI Binector Input BO Binector Output CI Connector Input CO Connector Output BICO CO/BO Connector Output / Binector Output "P" parameters can only be changed depending on the drive state. The parameter value is not accepted if the instantaneous state is not listed in the parameter attribute "Change state". For instance, the commissioning (start-up) parameter P0010 with the attribute "CT" can only be changed in quick start-up "C" or ready "T" but not in run "U". C Quick commissioning (start-up) U Operation (run) Change state T Ready This parameter attribute identifies as to whether the parameter is included in the quick commissioning (start-up) (P0010 = 1). No The parameter is not included in the quick commissioning (start-up) QC. Yes The parameter is included in the quick commissioning (start-up)
  • 42. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 42 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Attribute group Attribute Description This attribute is only of importance in conjunction with a BOP. The "Immediate" attribute indicates that this value is already accepted when scrolling (when changing the value with or ). Especially parameters which are used for optimization functions have this property (e.g. constant voltage boost P1310 or filter time constants). On the other hand, for parameters with the attribute "After actuation", the value is only accepted after first actuating the key . These include, for example, parameters where the parameter value can have different settings/meanings (e.g. selecting the frequency setpoint source P1000). Immediately The value becomes valid by either scrolling with or Active After actuation The value is only accepted by pressing The attributes and groups are shown, in the parameter list, in the header line of the parameter. This is shown as an example in Fig. 3-2 using parameter P0305. Rated motor current 0.01 C Float A 3.25 10000.00 1 P0305[3] CStat: P-Group: Datatype: Active: Unit Def: Max: Min: Group Wertebereich BICO (if exist) Access level Index MOTOR first confirm Level: QuickComm. Yes CStat Active Datatype QuickComm. Unit Parameter number Parameter text Fig. 3-2 Header line for parameter P0305
  • 43. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 43 The interrelationship between access level P0003 and the grouping P0004 is schematically shown in Fig. 3-3. P0004 = 2 P0004 = 3 P0004 = 7 P0004 = 8P0004 = 10 P0004 = 12 P0004 = 13 P0004 = 20 P0004 = 21 P0004 = 22 P0004 = 0 P0004 = 2 P0004 = 2, P0003 = 1 P0004 = 2, P0003 = 2 P0004 = 2, P0003 = 4 P0004 = 2, P0003 = 3(no filter function) allows direct access to the parameters. For BOP and AOP depending on the selected access level Parameters level 1 concerning the inverter unit Parameters level 1, 2 and 3 concerning the inverter unit Inverter Unit Parameters level 1 and 2 concerning the inverter unit Parameters level 1, 2, 3 and 4 concerning the inverter unit Inverter Unit Motor Data PID Controller Alarms, Warnings & Monitoring Motor Control P1300 ... P1799 Drive Features P1200 ... P1299 Setpoint Channel & Ramp Generator P1000 ... P1199 Commands and Digital I/O P0700 ... P0749 P0800 ... P0899 Communication P2000 ... P2099 Analogue I/O P0750 ... P0799 P0200 ... P0299 P0300 ... P0399 P0600 ... P0699 P0003 = 1 P0003 = 2 P0003 = 3 P0003 = 4 P0003 = 1 2 3 4 Standard Extended Expert Service User access level Fig. 3-3 Parameter grouping / access
  • 44. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 44 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.1.2 Interconnecting signals (BICO technology) A state-of-the-art drive unit must be able to interconnect internal and external signals (setpoint / actual values and control / status signal). This interconnection functionality must have a high degree of flexibility in order to be able to adapt the drive to new applications. Further, a high degree of usability is required, which also fulfills standard applications. This is the reason that within the MICROMASTER series of drive units, BICO technology (→ flexibility) and fast parameterization using parameters P0700 / P1000 (→ usability) or P0719 (→ combination P0700/P1000) have been introduced to be able to fulfill both of these requirements. 3.1.2.1 Selecting the command source P0700 / selecting the setpoint source P1000 The following parameters can be used to quickly interconnect setpoints and control signals: P0700 "Selection of command source" P1000 "Selection of setpoint source" These parameters are used to define via which interface the drive inverter receives the setpoint or the power-on/power-off command. The interfaces, listed in Table 3-2 can be selected for the command source P0700. Table 3-2 Parameter P0700 Parameter values Significance / command source 0 Factory default 1 BOP (operator panel, refer to Section 3.2.1) 2 Terminal strip 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link The following internal or external sources / interfaces can be selected for the frequency setpoint source P1000. In addition to the main setpoint (1st position), a supplementary setpoint (2nd position) can be selected (refer to Table 3-3).
  • 45. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 45 Table 3-3 Parameter P1000 Significance Parameter values Main setpoint source Supplementary setpoint source 0 No main setpoint - 1 MOP setpoint (motorized potentiometer) - 2 Analog setpoint - 3 Fixed frequency - 4 USS on BOP link - 5 USS on COM link - 6 CB on COM link - 10 No main setpoint MOP setpoint 11 MOP setpoint MOP setpoint 12 Analog setpoint MOP setpoint .. .. .. .. .. .. 66 CB on COM link CB on COM link NOTE Communications between the AOP and MICROMASTER are established using the USS protocol. The AOP can be connected to both the BOP link (RS 232) as well as at the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter. If the AOP is to be used as command source or setpoint source then for parameter P0700 or P1000, either "USS on BOP link" or "USS on COM link" should be selected. The complete list of all of the setting possibilities can be taken from the parameter list (refer to parameter list P1000). Parameters P0700 and P1000 have the following default settings: a) P0700 = 2 (terminal strip) b) P1000 = 2 (analog setpoint) In this case, the selection of the command source is made independently of the selection of the frequency setpoint source. This means that the source to enter the setpoint does not have to match the source to enter the power-on/power-off command (command source). This means, for example, that the setpoint (P1000 = 4) can be connected via an external device which is connected to the BOP link interface via USS and the control ON/OFF command, etc. is entered via digital inputs (terminals, P0700 = 2). CAUTION When modifying P0700 or P1000, then the drive inverter also changes the subordinate BICO parameters (refer to the parameter list for P0700 or P1000 and the appropriate tables) No priority has assigned between the direct BICO parameterization and P0700/P1000. The last modification is valid.
  • 46. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 46 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.1.2.2 Selection of command/frequency setpoint P0719 Parameter P0719 represents a combination of the functionalities of the two parameters P0700 and P1000. Here, it is possible to changeover the command source as well as also the frequency setpoint source via a parameter change. Contrary to P0700 and P1000, for parameter P0719, the subordinate (lower-level) BICO parameters are not changed. This characteristic/feature is especially used by PC tools in order to briefly retrieve the control authority for the drive without having to change the existing BICO parameterization. Parameter P0719 "Selection of command/frequency setpoint" comprises the command source (Cmd) and the frequency setpoint (setpoint). Table 3-4 Parameter P0719 Significance Parameter values Command source Setpoint source (frequency source) 0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter 1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS BOP link 5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS COM link 6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB COM link 10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter 11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint .. .. .. .. .. .. 64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link 66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link NOTE The complete list of all of the possible settings can be taken from the parameter list (refer to the parameter list, P0719). Contrary to parameter P0700 and P1000, subordinate BICO parameters are not changed for parameter P0719. This characteristic/feature can be used during service if the control authority must be briefly and quickly re-assigned (e.g. selecting and executing the motor data identification routine using a PC-based tool).
  • 47. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 47 3.1.2.3 BICO technology Using BICO technology (English: Binector Connector Technology), process data can be freely interconnected using the "standard" drive parameterization. In this case, all values which can be freely interconnected (e.g. frequency setpoint, frequency actual value, current actual value, etc.) can be defined as "Connectors" and all digital signals which can be freely interconnected (e.g. status of a digital input, ON/OFF, message function when a limit is violated etc.) can be defined as "Binectors". There are many input and output quantities as well as quantities within the control which can be interconnected in a drive unit. It is possible to adapt the drive to the various requirements using BICO technology. A binector is a digital (binary) signal without any units and which can either have the value 0 or 1. Binectors always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided into binector inputs and binector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-4). In this case, the binector input is always designated using a "P" parameter plus attribute "BI" (e.g.: P1035 BI: Enable MOP (UP-command)), while the binector output is always represented using an "r" parameter plus attribute "BO" (e.g.: r2032 BO: CtrlWrd1 from BOP link (USS)). As can be seen from the examples above, the binector parameters have the following abbreviations in front of the parameter names: BI Binector Input, signal receiver ("P" parameters) → The BI parameter can be interconnected with a binector output as source, by entering the parameter number of the binector output (BO parameter) as value in the BI parameter. BO Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) → The BO parameter can be used as source for BI parameters. For the particular interconnection the BO parameter number must be entered into the BI parameter. Example: Wiring BO parameter r2032 to BI parameter P1035 → P1035 = 2032. If the BO parameter contains several bits, the bit number must be entered in the BI parameter in addition to the parameter number when wiring a single digital signal (here for example: P1035 = 2032.13). Abbreviation and symbol Name Function BI Binector input (signal receiver) Data flow Pxxxx BI: ... Function BO Binector output (signal source) Data flow Function rxxxx BO: ... Fig. 3-4 Binectors
  • 48. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 48 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 A connector is a value (16 or 32 bit), which can include a normalized quantity (without dimension) as well as also a quantity with associated units. Connectors always refer to functions whereby they are sub-divided into connector inputs and connector outputs (refer to Fig. 3-5). Essentially the same as the binectors, the connector inputs are characterized by a "P" parameter plus attribute "CI" (e.g.: P0771 CI: DAC); while the connector outputs are always represented using an "r" parameter plus attribute "CO" (e.g.: r0021 CO: Smoothed output frequency). As can be seen from the examples above, connector parameters have the following abbreviations in front of the parameter names: CI Connector Input, signal sink ("P" parameters) → The CI parameter can be interconnected with a connector output as source, by entering the parameter number of the connector output (CO parameter) as value in the CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21). CO Connector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) → The CO parameter can be used as source for CI parameters. For the particular interconnection, the CO parameter number must be entered in the CI parameter (e.g.: P0771 = 21). Further, MICROMASTER has "r" parameters where several binector outputs are combined in a word (e.g.: r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1). This feature reduces, on one hand, the number of parameters and simplifies parameterization via the serial interface (data transfer). This parameter is further characterized by the fact that it does not have any units and each bit represents a digital (binary) signal. As can be seen from the examples of parameters, these combined parameters have the following abbreviation in front of the parameter names: CO/BO Connector Output / Binector Output, signal source ("r" parameters) → CO/BO parameters can be used as source for CI parameters and BI parameters: a) In order to interconnect all of the CO/BO parameters, the parameter number must be entered into the appropriate CI parameter (e.g.: P2016[0] = 52). b) When interconnecting a single digital signal, in addition to the CO/BO parameter number, the bit number must also be entered into the BI parameter (e.g.: P0731 = 52.3) Abbreviation and symbol Name Function CI Connector input (signal receiver) Data flow Pxxxx CI: ... Function CO Connector output (signal source) Data flow Function rxxxx CO: ... CO BO Binector/connector output (signal source) Data flow Functions rxxxx CO/BO: ... Fig. 3-5 Connectors
  • 49. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 49 In order to interconnect two signals, a BICO setting parameter (signal receiver) must be assigned the required BICO monitoring parameter (signal source). A typical BICO interconnection is shown using the following examples (refer to Fig. 3-6). Connector output (CO) ===> Connector input (CI) CO/BO: Act. status word 1 FB r0755 P1070 = 755 (755) P1070 FB P0840 = 2032.0 r2032 FB (2032.0) P0840 P0731 = 52.3 P2051 = 52 FB (52:3) P0731 FBP2051 (52) r0052 r0052 Binector output (BO) ===> Binector input (BI) Connector output / Binector output (CO/BO) BO: CtrlWrd1 from BOP link (USS) CO: Act. ADC after scal. [4000h] CI: Main setpoint BI: ON/OFF1 CI: PZD to CB BI: Function of digital output 1 Function Function Function Function Function Function Function Fig. 3-6 BICO connections (examples) NOTE BICO parameters with the CO, BO or CO/BO attributes can be used a multiple number of times.
  • 50. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 50 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.1.3 Reference quantities Parameter range: P2000 - P2002 When being output or read-in by the drive inverter, physical quantities are normalized or de-normalized. This conversion is made directly by the particular interface using the reference quantities. The normalization / de-normalization is carried-out for the following interfaces: Table 3-5 Normalized interfaces Interface 100 % Analog input (voltage input) 10 V Analog output (current output) 20 mA USS 4000 h CB 4000 h Further, a normalization is carried-out for a BICO connection if the connector output (CO) represents a physical quantity and the connector input (CI) a normalized (percentage) quantity (e.g. PID controller). A de-normalization is carried-out if the inverse applies. Reference quantities (normalization quantities) are intended to allow setpoints and actual signals to be represented in a uniform, standard way (normalization / de- normalization of physical quantities such as setpoint and actual frequency). This also applies to permanently set parameters that are assigned the "percentage" units. A value of 100 % corresponds in this case to a process data value PZD of 4000 h (USS or CB) or a current value of 20 mA (analog output) or a voltage value of 10 V (analog input). The following reference parameters and permanently saved reference values are available: Table 3-6 Normalization functions Parameter Designation Value (100 % / 4000 h) Units P2000 Reference frequency P2000 Hz P2001 Reference voltage P2001 V P2002 Reference current P2002 A - Reference speed P2000 * 60 / r0313 RPM - Reference temperature 100 °C °C - Reference energy 100 kWh kWh
  • 51. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 51 Example The normalization / de-normalization via the "USS to BOP link" serial interface is shown using the reference frequency P2000. If the connection between two BICO parameters is closed (directly using BICO parameters or indirectly using P0719 or P1000), that have a different representation/notation (normalized representation (hex) or physical representation (Hz)), then the following normalization is made in the drive inverter to the target value: P1070 y[Hz] 2000P 4000[Hex] r2015[1] y[Hz] ⋅= r2015 [0] [1] [2] [3] P2016 [0] [1] [2] [3] r0021 x[Hz] y[Hex] x[Hex] ]Hex[4000 P2000[Hz] r0021[Hz] y[Hex] ⋅= USS-PZD BOP-Link USS-PZD BOP-Link Fig. 3-7 Normalization / de-normalization Note Analog values are limited to 10 V or 20 mA. A maximum of 100 % can be output / read-in referred to the appropriate reference values as long as no DAC/ADC scaling (factory setting) was made. Setpoints and actual value signals via the serial interface: ♦ When transferring this data via the PZD part, it is limited to the value 7FFF h. This is the reason that the max. value 200 % is referred to the reference value. ♦ When transferring this data via the PKW part, it is transferred as a function of the data type and units. Parameter P1082 (max. frequency) limits, in the drive inverter, the frequency independently of the reference frequency. This is the reason that when P1082 is changed (factory setting: 50 Hz), then the P2000 (factory setting: 50 Hz) should always be adapted. For instance, if for a NEMA motor the parameter is set to 60 Hz and P2000 is not changed, then the analog setpoint / actual value at 100 % or a setpoint/actual value signal at 4000 h is limited to 50 Hz!
  • 52. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 52 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.2 Operator panels for MICROMASTER MICROMASTER drive units can be optionally equipped with a BOP (Basic Operator Panel) or AOP (Advanced Operator Panel). The AOP distinguishes itself as a result of a plain text display which simplifies operator control, diagnostics as well as also commissioning (start-up). BOP AOP Fig. 3-8 Operator panels 3.2.1 Description of the BOP (Basic Operator Panel) The BOP, available as option, allows drive inverter parameters to be accessed. In this case, the Status Display Panel (SDP) must be removed and the BOP either inserted or connected in the door of a cabinet using a special mounting kit (operator panel - door mounting kit) (refer to the Attachment A). Parameter values can be changed using the BOP. This allows the MICROMASTER drive unit to be set-up for a particular application. In addition to the keys (refer to Section 3.2.3), it includes a 5-digit LCD display on which the parameter numbers rxxxx and Pxxxx, parameter values, parameter units (e.g. [A], [V], [Hz], [s]), alarm Axxxx or fault messages Fxxxx as well as setpoints and actual values. NOTE Contrary to the AOP, for the BOP, parameters do not have to be set or taken into consideration when establishing the communications between the BOP and drive inverter. A BOP does not have a local memory. This means that it is not possible to save a parameter set on the BOP.
  • 53. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 53 3.2.2 Description of the AOP (Advanced Operator Panel) An AOP (this is available as option) has the following additional functions with respect to a BOP: Multi-language and multi-line plain text display Units are additionally displayed, such as [Nm], [°C], etc. Active parameters, fault messages, etc. are explained Diagnostics menu to support troubleshooting The main menu is directly called by simultaneously pressing keys Fn and P Timer with 3 switching operations per entry Up to 10 parameter sets can be downloaded / saved Communications between an AOP and MICROMASTER are realized using the USS protocol. An AOP can be connected to the BOP link (RS 232) as well as to the COM link interface (RS 485) of the drive inverter. Multi-point capable coupling to control (open-loop) and visualize up to 31 MICROMASTER drive inverters. The USS bus must, in this case, be configured and parameterized via the drive inverter terminals of the COM link interface. Please refer to Sections 3.2.3, 3.2.4 and the AOP Manual for additional details. NOTE Contrary to the BOP, for the AOP, the communications parameters of the particular interface must be taken into account. When inserting / connecting to the drive inverter, the AOP automatically changes the parameter P2012 (USS-PZD length) to 4 corresponding to the interface. COM link: P2012[0] BOP link: P2012[1] For DriveMonitor, the default value for the USS-PZD length is set to 2. This results in a conflict if the AOP and the DriveMonitor are operated, alternating, at the same interface. Remedy: Increase the USS-PZD length to 4.
  • 54. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 54 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.2.3 Keys and their functions on the operator panel (BOP / AOP) Operator panel/key Function Effects Indicates Status The LCD displays the settings currently used by the converter. Start converter Pressing the button starts the converter. This button is disabled by default. Activate the button: BOP: P0700 = 1 or P0719 = 10 ... 16 AOP: P0700 = 4 or P0719 = 40 ... 46 on BOP link P0700 = 5 or P0719 = 50 ... 56 on COM link Stop converter OFF1 Pressing the button causes the motor to come to a standstill at the selected ramp down rate. Activate the button: see button "Start converter" OFF2 Pressing the button twice (or once long) causes the motor to coast to a standstill. BOP: This function is always enabled (independent of P0700 or P0719). Change direction Press this button to change the direction of rotation of the motor. Reverse is indicated by a minus (-) sign or a flashing decimal point. Disabled by default. Activate the button: see button "Start converter". Jog motor In the "Ready to power-on" state, when this key is pressed, the motor starts and rotates with the pre-set jog frequency. The motor stops when the button is released. Pressing this button when the motor is running has no effect. Functions This button can be used to view additional information. It works by pressing and holding the button. It shows the following, starting from any parameter during operation: 1. DC link voltage (indicated by d – units V). 2. output current. (A) 3. output frequency (Hz) 4. output voltage (indicated by o – units V). 5. The value selected in P0005 (If P0005 is set to show any of the above (1 - 4) then this will not be shown again). Additional presses will toggle around the above displays. Jump Function From any parameter (rxxxx or Pxxxx) a short press of the Fn button will immediately jump to r0000, you can then change another parameter, if required. Upon returning to r0000, pressing the Fn button will return you to your starting point. Acknowledgement If alarm and fault messages are present, then these can be acknowledged by pressing key Fn. Access parameters Pressing this button allows access to the parameters. Increase value Pressing this button increases the displayed value. Decrease value Pressing this button decreases the displayed value. + AOP menu Calls the AOP menu prompting (this is only available for AOP). Fig. 3-9 Operator panel keys
  • 55. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 55 3.2.4 Changing parameters using the operator panel The way that parameter P0719 can be changed will now be described; please use this description as a basis when setting all of the other parameters using the BOP. Changing P0004 – parameter filter function Step Result on the display 1 Press in order to access the parameter 2 Press until P0004 is displayed 3 Press in order to reach the parameter value level 4 Press or in order to obtain the required value 5 Press to acknowledge the value and to save the value 6 The user can only see the command parameters. Changing an indexed parameter P0719 – selecting the command/frequency setpoint Step Result on the display 1 Press in order to access the parameter 2 Press until P0719 is displayed 3 Press in order to reach the parameter value 4 Press in order to display the currently set value 5 Press or in order to obtain the required value 6 Press to acknowledge the value and to save the value 7 Press until r0000 is displayed 8 Press in order to return to the operating display (the display which the customer has defined) Fig. 3-10 Changing parameters using the BOP NOTE The BOP sometimes display when changing parameter values. This means that the drive inverter is presently handling another higher-priority task.
  • 56. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 56 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.3 Block diagram PE 1/3 AC 200 - 240 V 3 AC 380 - 480 V SI PE L/L1, N/L2 L/L1, N/L2, L3 L1, L2, L3 = 3 ~ PE U,V,W M A/D +10 V 0 V 0 - 20 mA max. 500 Ω CPU RS485 D/A ~ = ADC+ ADC- DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 DAC+ DAC- P+ N- RL1-B RL1-C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 10 11 ≥ 4.7 kΩ Output 0 V max. 100 mA (isolated) 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive) 250 V AC / 2 A (inductive) Relay Output +24 V max. 100 mA (isolated) DC-linkconnection or or CB Option automatic DC+ DC− DIN4 2 3 4 9 24 V -+ The analog input circuit can be alternatively configured to provide an additional digital input (DIN4): 1 2 60 Hz 50 Hz DIP switch Not used BOP link COM link Jog0 I P Fn Hz 150.00 BOP/AOP RS232 DIN1 DIN2 DIN3 5 6 7 9 External 24 V NPN PNP or 24 V + _ Fig. 3-11 MICROMASTER 420 – block diagram
  • 57. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 57 3.4 Factory setting The MICROMASTER drive unit is shipped from the plant with a Status Display Panel (SDP, refer to Fig. 3-12). The SDP has two LEDs on the front panel which display the operating state of the drive inverter (refer to Section 4.1). When MICROMASTER is shipped from the plant with the SDP functioning, it can be operated without any additional parameterization. In this case, the drive inverter default settings (which depend on the drive inverter type / size) match the following data of a 4- pole motor: Rated motor power P0307 Rated motor voltage P0304 Rated motor current P0305 Rated motor frequency P0310 (We recommend a Siemens standard motor.) Further, the following conditions must be fulfilled: Control (ON/OFF command) via digital inputs (refer to Table 3-7) Setpoint input via analog input 1 P1000 = 2 Induction motor P0300 = 1 Self-cooled motor P0335 = 0 Motor overload factor P0640 = 150 % Min. frequency P1080 = 0 Hz Max. frequency P1082 = 50 Hz Ramp-up time P1120 = 10 s Ramp-down time P1121 = 10 s Linear V/f characteristic P1300 = 0 Table 3-7 Pre-assignment of the digital inputs Digital inputs Terminals Parameter Function Active Command source - P0700 = 2 Terminal strip Yes Digital input 1 5 P0701 = 1 ON / OFF1 Yes Digital input 2 6 P0702 = 12 Reversing Yes Digital input 3 7 P0703 = 9 Fault acknowledge Yes Digital input 4 Via ADC P0704 = 0 Digital input disabled No Fig. 3-12 Status Display Panel (SDP)
  • 58. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 58 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 If the various prerequisites are fulfilled and the appropriate conditions present, then after the motor has been connected and the power connected, then the following is possible with the factory setting: The motor can be started and stopped (via DIN1 with external switch) The direction of rotation can be reversed (via DIN2 with external switch) Faults reset (via DIN3 with external switch) A frequency setpoint can be entered (via ADC with external potentiometer, default setting of the ADC: unipolar voltage input) The frequency actual value can be output (via DAC, DAC output: current output) The potentiometer and the external switches can be connected through the drive inverter internal power supply, as shown in Fig. 3-13. Digital Inputs I/O Ack < 4.7 k Ω Analog input Pre-assignment of the digital inputs DIN1 to DIN3, refer to Table 3-7. Fig. 3-13 Recommended wiring for the factory setting If settings have to be made which go beyond the factory setting, then depending on the complexity of the application, when commissioning the drive system, the particular function description as well as the parameter list including function charts must be carefully taken into consideration.
  • 59. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 59 3.5 Commissioning A differentiation is made between the following scenarios when commissioning MICROMASTER: 50/60-Hz changeover Quick commissioning Motor data identification Calculating the motor / control data Series commissioning Commissioning the application Carry-out checklist NEMA motor 60 Hz / Hp Commissioning Is there a complete parameter list of a commissioning available? End of commissioning 50/60 Hz setting Section 3.5.1 Quick commissioning Section 3.5.2 Motor weight ? Series commissioning Section 3.5.6 Stator resistance known? A0541 Application commissioning Section 3.5.5 P0344 = ? P0340 = 1 P0350 = ? P0340 = 1 P1910 = 1 ON yesno yesno yesno yesno Fig. 3-14 Procedure when commissioning
  • 60. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 60 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 When commissioning, initially, a quick commissioning should be carried-out. The actual application should only be commissioned if the drive inverter – motor combination provides a satisfactory result. If the drive is to be commissioned from a defined state, then the drive inverter can be reset to the initial state when it left the plant. This is done as follows: Reset parameters to the factory setting (refer to Section 3.5.7) Check list The following check list is intended to help you to simply commission MICROMASTER and to guarantee a high degree of availability: For all activities relating to ESDS measures All of the screws must have been tightened to their specified torque. All connectors / option modules have been correctly inserted and interlocked / screwed into place. The DC link pre-charging must have been completed. All of the components are grounded at the locations provided and all of the shields have been connected. MICROMASTER has been designed for defined mechanical, climatic and electrical ambient conditions. The limit values may neither be exceeded in operation nor during transport. The following must always be carefully observed: ♦ Line supply conditions ♦ Level of pollutants and contaminants ♦ Gases and vapors that can have a negative impact on the function of the drive inverter ♦ Climatic ambient conditions ♦ Storage / transport ♦ Shock stressing ♦ Vibration stressing ♦ Ambient temperature ♦ Installation altitude In order to ensure that the drive inverter is successfully commissioned, in addition to completely carrying-out all of the installation work, it is important to note that the drive inverter may not be disconnected from the line supply while parameterizing the drive unit. If commissioning is interrupted due to a power failure, then parameters could be lost. In this case, commissioning must always be re-started (it may be necessary to restore the parameters to the factory setting (refer to Section 3.5.7). NOTE When using output reactors, the pulse frequency may not be set higher than 4 kHz. The following parameter setting is mandatory when using an output reactor: P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1
  • 61. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 61 3.5.1 50/60 Hz setting The frequency setting made in the factory can be adapted to the North American market, without requiring any parameterization using an operator panel or PC tool using the 50/60 Hz DIP switch (refer to Fig. 3-15). 50/60 Hz DIP switch for frequency setting 60 Hz 50 Hz Fig. 3-15 DIP switch to change-over between 50/60 Hz The switch determines the value of parameter P0100 corresponding to the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-16). Besides P0100 = 2, after the power supply voltage has been switched-in, the 50/60 Hz DIP switch determines the 50/60 Hz setting (value of parameter P0100). P0100 = 2 ? P0100 = 0 P0100 = 2 P0100 = 1 P0100 = 2 ? P0100 = 1 ? yes yes no no yes yes nono Quick commissioning P0010 = 1 Power cycle DIP2 = OFF ? Power in kW Frequency 50 Hz Power in kW Frequency 60 Hz Power in hp Frequency 60 Hz Fig. 3-16 Mode of operation of the 50/60 Hz DIP switch in conjunction with P0100
  • 62. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 62 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 By changing the setting of 50/60 Hz DIP switch, after the drive inverter has been powered-down/powered-up, the parameters for the rated motor frequency P0310, max. frequency P1082 and reference frequency P2000 are automatically pre-set. In addition, the rated motor parameters as well as all of the other parameters which depend on the rated motor parameters, are reset. The units of the power parameters are, depending on P0100, are either interpreted as kW value or hp value. 3.5.2 Quick commissioning If there is still no appropriate parameter set for the drive, then a quick commissioning must be carried-out including a motor data identification routine. The following operator units can be used to carry-out quick commissioning: BOP (option) AOP (option) PC Tools (with commissioning software STARTER, DriveMonitor) When the quick commissioning is carried-out, the motor – drive inverter is basically commissioned; the following data must be obtained, modified or entered before quick commissioning is started: Enter the line supply frequency Enter the rating plate data Command / setpoint sources Min. / max. frequency or ramp-up / ramp-down time Control mode Motor data identification Parameterizing the drive with BOP or AOP The frequency inverter is adapted to the motor using the quick commissioning function and important technological parameters are set. The quick commissioning shouldn't be carried-out if the rated motor data saved in the frequency inverter (4-pole 1LA Siemens motor, star circuit configuration frequency inverter (FU)- specific) match the rating plate data. Parameters, designated with a * offer more setting possibilities than are actually listed here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities. START Factory setting P0003 = 2 User access level * 1 Standard: Allows access into most frequently used parameters 2 Extended: Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions 3 Expert (For expert use only) P0010 = 1 Commissioning parameter * 0 Ready 1 Quick commissioning 30 Factory setting NOTE P0010 should be set to 1 in order to parameterize the data of the motor rating plate. 0 1
  • 63. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 63 P0100 =... P0100 = 1, 2 P0100 = 0 Europe/ North America (enters the line supply frequency) 0 Europe [kW], frequency default 50 Hz 1 North America [hp], frequency default 60 Hz 2 North America [kW], frequency default 60 Hz NOTE For P0100 = 0 or 1, the setting of switch DIP2(2) determines the value of P0100 (refer to the parameter list). 50/60 Hz DIP switch for frequency setting 60 Hz 50 Hz P0304 =... P0304 =... Rated motor voltage (Nominal motor voltage [V] from rating plate) The rated motor voltage on the rating plate must be checked, regarding the star/delta circuit configuration to ensure that it matches with the circuit connection configured at the motor terminal board P0305 =... P0305 =... Rated motor current (Nominal motor current [A] from rating plate) P0307 =... P0307 =... Rated motor power (Nominal motor power [kW/hp] from rating plate) If P0100 = 0 or 2, value will be in kW. If P0100 = 1, value will be in in hp. P0304 P0305P0307 P0308 P0311 P0310 P0308 =...P0308 =... Rated motor cosPhi (Nominal motor power factor (cos ϕ) from rating plate) If the setting is 0, the value is automatically calculated P0100 = 1,2: P0308 no significance, no entry required. P0309 =... P0309 =... Rated motor efficiency (Nominal motor efficiency in [%] from rating plate) Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. P0100 = 0: P0309 no significance, no entry required. P0310 =... Rated motor frequency (Nominal motor frequency in [Hz] from rating plate) Pole pair number recalculated automatically if parameter is changed. P0311 =... Rated motor speed (Nominal motor speed in [rpm] from rating plate) Setting 0 causes internal calculation of value. NOTE For slip compensation, the input is absolutely necessary. P0335 =... Motor cooling (Selects motor cooling system used) 0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor 1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan P0640 =... Motor overload factor (Motor overload factor in [%] relative to P0305) This defines the limit of the maximum output current as a % of the rated motor current (P0305). 0 FU-spec. FU-spec. FU-spec. FU-spec. FU-spec. 50.00 Hz FU-spec. 0 150 %
  • 64. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 64 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 P0700 =... Selection of command source 0 Factory default setting 1 BOP (keypad) 2 Terminal 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link P1000 =... Selection of frequency setpoint 1 MOP setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 3 Fixed frequency 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link P1080 =... Min. frequency (enters the minimum motor frequency in Hz) Sets minimum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. P1082 =... Max. frequency (enters the maximum motor frequency in Hz) Sets maximum motor frequency at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. P1120 =... Ramp-up time (enters the ramp-up time in s) Time taken for motor to accelerate from standstill up to maximum motor frequency (P1082) when no rounding is used. P1121 =... Ramp-down time (enters the deceleration time in s) Time taken for motor to decelerate from maximum motor frequency (P1082) down to standstill when no rounding is used P1135 =... OFF3 ramp-down time (enters the fast stop ramp-down time in s) Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command. P1300 =... Control mode (enters the required control mode) 0 V/f with linear characteristic 1 V/f with FCC 2 V/f with parabolic characteristic 3 V/f with programmable characteristic 2 0.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 10.00 s 10.00 s 5.00 s 0 2
  • 65. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 65 P3900 = 1 End of quick commissioning (start of the motor calculation) 0 No quick commissioning (no motor calculations) 1 Start quick commissioning with factory reset 2 Start quick commissioning 3 Start quick commissioning only for motor data NOTE For P3900 = 1,2,3 → P0340 is internally set to 1 and the appropriate data calculated (refer to the parameter list P0340). ENDE End of quick commissioning/ drive setting If additional functions must be implemented at the drive inverter, please use the instructions in Section 3.5.5 "Commissioning the application". We recommend this procedure for drives with a high dynamic response.. WARNING The motor data identification routine (refer to Section 3.5.4) may not be used for loads which are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before the motor data identification run is started, the potentially hazardous load must be carefully secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or by clamping the load using the motor holding brake). NOTE The precise equivalent circuit diagram data are extremely important for the voltage boost of the V/f characteristic. The equivalent diagram data can only be estimated from the rating plate data. This is the reason that the equivalent circuit diagram data are, either - determined using the motor data identification routine (refer to Section 3.5.4), or - entered from the motor data sheet (refer to Section 3.5.3). Parameter P0308 or P0309 are only visible using the BOP or AOP if P0003 ≥ 2. Depending on the setting of parameter P0100, either P0308 or P0309 is displayed. The input value of P0307 and all other power data are either interpreted as kW or hp value depending on P0100. The possible rating plate / power plate data is shown in Fig. 3-17. The precise definition and explanation of this data is defined in DIN EN 60 034-1. Fig. 3-17 Example of a typical motor rating plate 0
  • 66. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 66 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 In order to ensure a straightforward, successful commissioning, it is important that the circuit connection in the motor terminal box (refer to Fig. 3-18) matches the rated motor voltage entered in P0304 or the rated motor current P0305. IEC Motor e.g.: Volts 230 V (Delta connection) / 400 V (Star connection) U1 V1 W1 Star connection W2 U1 U2 V1 V2 W1 Delta connection U1 V1 W1 W2 U1 U2 V1 V2 W1 NEMA Motor T1 T4 T7 T3 T6 T9 T8 T5 T2 Volts U V W T1 -T7 T2 -T8 T3 -T9low T4 -T5 -T6 T1 T2 T3high Connected together Connection T1-T7 T2-T8 T3-T9 Y Y Y U V W T1 -T6 -T7 T2 -T4 -T8 T3 -T5 -T9 - T1 T2 T3 T4 -T7 T5 -T8 T6 -T9 ∆ ∆ ∆ T1 T4 T7 T2T5T8 T3 T9 T6 Volts low high Connected together Connection e.g.: Volts 230 V YY (low) / 460 V Y (high) Fig. 3-18 Motor terminal box The following must be noted when entering the rating plate data or the ESB data: The rated motor voltage P0304, the rated motor current P0305 and the stator resistance P0350 must always be entered in accordance with the motor circuit configuration (either delta or star). If the rated motor data that is available (P0304, P0305, P0350) does not match the motor circuit configuration, then the appropriate conversion (refer to Fig. 3-19) must be made and then entered. NOTE The outer conductor voltage/phase-to-phase voltage (voltage U12 between outer conductors L1, L2) and the outer conductor current (phase current) I1 are always specified on the rating plate.
  • 67. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 67 I11 2 U12 3 U1N I1N Z N Z Z III 321 == U3UUU 1Ν312312 ⋅=== Z2 I U 1 12 ⋅= 3 Z Z Y12, ∆12, = U 3 U Y12, 1 ∆12, = I11 2 U12 3 I12 Z Z Z I 3 1 III 1312312 ⋅=== UUU 312312 == I 3 1 I Y1,∆1, = Z 3 2 I U 1 12 ⋅= Fig. 3-19 Star / delta circuit configurations 87 Hz characteristic When a motor with a delta circuit configuration (e. g. VN∆, motor = 230 V) is fed from a frequency inverter, where the rated voltage corresponds to the star circuit configuration (e.g. 400 V frequency inverter), then it is important to proceed as follows and observe the following: The motor must have the appropriate voltage strength. Above the rated motor frequency, the iron losses in the motor increase over- proportionally. This is the reason that above this frequency, the thermal motor torque should be reduced. For the quick commissioning, the rating plate data for the delta circuit configuration should be entered or the rating plate must be appropriately converted. The drive inverter must be designed for the higher current (delta circuit configuration). The 87 Hz characteristic is independent of the control type. When using the 87 Hz characteristic, the mechanical motor limits must be taken into account (refer to Catalog M11). For the 87 Hz characteristic, the ratio between the voltage and frequency (V/f characteristic) remain constant. This is the reason that the following relationships apply: P = powerP U U P N∆ N∆ N1 N1 ⋅= f U U f N∆ N∆ N1 N1 ⋅= ( ) nffn ∆N∆N1N1 p min s 60 +− ⎥ ⎦ ⎤ ⎢ ⎣ ⎡ = f fN1fN∆ U UN∆ UN1 f = frequency n = speed p = pole pair No. (400 V) (230 V) (50 Hz) (87 Hz) Fig. 3-20 V/f characteristic
  • 68. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 68 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-8 Example 1LA7060-4AB10 Delta circuit configuration 87 Hz characteristic Star circuit configuration P0304 Rated motor voltage 230 V 400 V 400 V P0305 Rated motor current 0.73 A 0.73 A 0.42 A P0307 Rated motor power 120 W 207 W 120 W P0308 Cos ϕ 0.75 0.75 0.75 P0310 Rated motor frequency 50 Hz 87 Hz 50 Hz P0311 Rated motor speed 1350 RPM 2460 RPM 1350 RPM P0314 Motor pole pairs 2 2 2 Contrary to the BOP, AOP operator panels or commissioning tool program DriveMonitor, the STARTER commissioning (start-up) program offers a mask- orientated quick commissioning, which is especially advantageous for users who are using MICROMASTER for the first time. On the other hand, BOP, AOP and DriveMonitor offer, in conjunction with the drive inverter, parameter-orientated quick commissioning where the user is navigated through the menu tree mentioned above. NOTE The MICROMASTER series of drive units is not available for 3-ph. 690 V AC.
  • 69. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 69 3.5.3 Calculating the motor / control data Internal motor / control data is calculated using parameter P0340 or, indirectly using parameter P3900 (refer to Section 3.5.2) or P1910 (refer to Section 3.5.4). The functionality of parameter P0340 can, for example, if the motor weight or the stator resistance is known. The following settings are possible for P0340: 0 No calculation 1 Complete parameterization For the complete parameterization (P0340 = 1), in addition to the motor / control parameters, parameters are also pre-assigned which refer to the motor rated data (e.g. torque limits and reference quantities for interface signals). Table 3-9 Parameter for motor/control data P0344 Motor weight P2002 Reference current P2000 Reference frequency P0350 Stator resistance (line-to-line) P0611 Motor I2t time constant P0346 Magnetization time P1253 Vdc-controller output limitation P0347 Demagnetization time P1316 Boost end frequency x x x x x x x x x P0340 = 1 NOTE When exiting the quick commissioning with P3900 > 0 (refer to Section 3.5.2), internally P0340 is set to 1 (complete parameterization). For the motor data identification (refer to Section 3.5.4), after the measurement has been completed, internally P0340 is set to 3.
  • 70. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 70 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.4 Motor data identification (stator resistance) MICROMASTER has a measuring technique which is used to determine the stator resistance: We urgently recommend that the identification routine is carried-out for control- related reasons. For example, the stator resistance is extremely important for the voltage boost for the V/f characteristic. The motor data identification routine should be executed, especially if long feeder cables or if third-party motors are being used. After selecting the motor data identification using parameter P1910, alarm A0541 is immediately generated. The motor identification routine is started by the ON command and different excitation signals are impressed in the motor (DC and AC voltages). This measurement is carried-out with the motor at a standstill and it takes, including the data calculation per selection (P1910 = 1) between 20 s ... 4 min. The identification time depends on the motor and increases with its size. The motor data identification routine must be carried-out with the motor in the cold condition so that the motor resistance values saved can be assigned to the parameter of the ambient temperature. Only then is correct temperature adaptation of the resistances possible during operation. The motor data identification routine operates with the results of the "Complete parameterization" P0340 = 1 or the motor equivalent diagram data which was last saved. The results become increasingly better the more times that the identification routine is executed (up to 3 times). WARNING It is not permissible to carry-out the motor identification routine for loads which are potentially hazardous (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications). Before starting the motor data identification routine, the potentially hazardous load must be secured (e.g. by lowering the load to the floor or clamping the load using the motor holding brake). When starting the motor data identification routine, the rotor can move into a preferred position. This is more significant for larger motors. NOTE It is not necessary to lock the motor rotor for the motor data identification routine. However, if it is possible to lock the motor rotor during the identification routine (e.g. by closing the motor holding brake), then this should be used to determine the equivalent circuit diagram data. The following formula can be applied to check the correctness of the motor rating plate data: PN = √3 ∗ VN Υ∗ INΥ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η ≈ √3 ∗ VN ∆∗ IN∆ ∗ cosϕ ∗ η with PN rated motor power VN Υ, VN ∆ rated motor voltage (star / delta) IN Υ, IN ∆ rated motor current (star / delta) cosϕ power factor η efficiency
  • 71. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 71 Motor data identification routine START Factory setting: Bold Motortemp. - P0625 @€ ± 5 °C ? yes no ⏐Ambient Motor temp.⏐ ≤ 5 °C ? Allow the motor to cool down Ambient motor temperature (entered in °C) The motor ambient temperature is entered at the instant that motor data is being determined (factory setting: 20 °C). The difference between the motor temperature and the motor ambient temperature must lie in the tolerance range of approx. ± 5 °C. If this is not the case, then the motor data identification routine can only be carried-out after the motor has cooled down. P1910 = 1 Select motor data identification 0 Disabled 1 Identification of all parameters with parameter change NOTE: For P1910 = 1 → P0340 is internally set to P0340 = 1 and the appropriate data calculated (refer to parameter list P0340) ON Power-up the motor The ON command initiates the measuring operation. In so doing the motor aligns itself and conducts current. Alarm message A0541 (motor data identification routine active) is output. A0541 After the motor data identification routine has been completed: 1. P1910 is reset (P1910 = 0) 2. A0541 is withdrawn
  • 72. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 72 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5 Commissioning the application After the motor – drive inverter combination was commissioned using the quick or series commissioning, in the following step parameters should be adapted and set according to the technological requirements. As an example, the following points should be considered: Functional requirements of the drive inverter (e.g. process control with PID controller) Limit values Dynamic requirements Starting torques Load surge requirement Overload Diagnostics If the application includes a function, which is not covered by the quick or series commissioning, then the following sections of the function description or the parameter list should be considered. Adapting the drive inverter to the application The parameters designated with * offer more setting possibilities than are listed here. Refer to the parameter list for additional setting possibilities. START Factory setting P0003 = 3 User access level * 1 Standard (Allows access into most frequently used parameters) 2 Extended (Allows extended access e.g. to inverter I/O functions) 3 Expert (for expert use only) 3.5.5.1 Serial Interface (USS) P2010 =... USS baud rate Sets baud rate for USS communication. P2011 =... USS address Sets unique address for inverter. P2012 =... USS PZD length Defines the number of 16-bit words in PZD part of USS telegram. P2013 =... USS PKW length Defines the number of 16-bit words in PKW part of USS telegram. Possible Settings: 3 1200 baud 4 2400 baud 5 4800 baud 6 9600 baud 7 19200 baud 8 38400 baud 9 57600 baud 1 6 0 2 127
  • 73. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 73 3.5.5.2 Selection of command source P0700 =... Selection of command source Selects digital command source. 0 Factory fault setting 1 BOP (keypad) 2 Terminal 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link P0700 = 2 Sequence control Setpoint channel Motor control BOP USS BOP link USS COM link Terminals CB COM link 3.5.5.3 Digital input (DIN) P0701=... Function of digital input 1 Terminal 5 1 ON / OFF1 P0702 =... Function digital input 2 Terminal 6 12 Reverse P0703 =... Function digital input 3 Terminal 7 9 Fault acknowledge P0704 = 0 Function digital input 4 Via analog input Terminals 3, 4 0 Digital input disabled P0724 =... Debounce time for digital inputs Defines debounce time (filtering time) used for digital inputs. 0 No debounce time 1 2.5 ms debounce time 2 8.2 ms debounce time 3 12.3 ms debounce time Possible Settings: 0 Digital input disabled 1 ON / OFF1 2 ON + Reverse / OFF1 3 OFF2 – coast to standstill 4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down 9 Fault acknowledge 10 JOG right 11 JOG left 12 Reverse 13 MOP up (increase frequency) 14 MOP down (decrease frequency) 15 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection) 16 Fixed setpoint (Direct selection + ON) 17 Fixed setpoint (Binary coded selection + ON) 21 Local/remote 25 DC brake enable 29 External trip 33 Disable additional freq setpoint 99 Enable BICO parameterization 24 V T 0 & 0 V Debounce time: DIN 0 ... 3 P0724 (3) CO/BO: Bin.inp.val r0722 r0722 Kl.8 P24 Kl.9 0 V DIN channel Function of DIN 1 0 ... 99 P0701 (1) 0 99 ... Function 2 1 12 9 0 3
  • 74. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 74 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.4 Digital output (DOUT) P0731 =... BI: Function of digital output 1* Defines source of digital output 1. P0748 = 0 Invert digital output Defines high and low states of relay for a given function. Common Settings: 52.0 Drive ready 0 Closed 52.1 Drive ready to run 0 Closed 52.2 Drive running 0 Closed 52.3 Drive fault active 0 Closed 52.4 OFF2 active 1 Closed 52.5 OFF3 active 1 Closed 52.6 Switch on inhibit active 0 Closed 52.7 Drive warning active 0 Closed -1 0 1 Invert DOUTs 0 ... 1 P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747 Kl.10 Kl.11 .0 DOUT channel NO COM(52:3) BI: Fct. of DOUT 1 P0731 3.5.5.5 Selection of frequency setpoint P1000 =... Selection of frequency setpoint 0 No main setpoint 1 MOP setpoint 2 Analog setpoint 3 Fixed frequency 4 USS on BOP link 5 USS on COM link 6 CB on COM link MOP ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link P1000 = 12 P1000 = 12 Sequence control Additonal setpoint Main setpoint Setpoint channel Motor control 52.3 0 2
  • 75. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 75 3.5.5.6 Analog input (ADC) P0757 =... Value x1 of ADC scaling P0758 =... Value y1 of ADC scaling This parameter represents the value of x1 as a % of P2000 (reference frequency). P0759 =... Value x2 of ADC scaling P0760 =... Value y2 of ADC scaling This parameter represents the value of x2 as a % of P2000 (reference frequency). P0761 =... Width of ADC deadband Defines width of deadband on analog input. max 100 % 10 V V x100% % P0760 P0758 P0759 P0761 > 0 0 < P0758 < P0760 || 0 > P0758 > P0760 min P0757 P0761 P0757 = P0761 4000 h KL KL A D ADC type ADC scaling ADC dead zone r0755 Pxxxx r0752 P1000 ADC ADC+ r0754 P0761P0753P0756 Setpoint r0722 r0722.3 0 1 1.7 V 3.9 V F0080 P0704 Pxxxx Function Wire breakage sensing P0756 P0761 T 0 P0762 r0751 r0751 0 V 0.0 % 10 V 100.0 % 0 V
  • 76. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 76 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.7 Analog output (DAC) P0771 =... CI: DAC Defines function of the 0 - 20 mA analog output. P0773 =... Smooth time DAC Defines smoothing time [ms] for analog output signal. This parameter enables smoothing for DAC using a PT1 filter. P0777 =... Value x1 of DAC scaling P0778 =... Value y1 of DAC scaling P0779 =... Value x2 of DAC scaling P0780 =... Value y2 of DAC scaling P0781 =... Width of DAC deadband Sets width of deadband in [mA] for analog output. 20 P0780 y2 P0778 y1 P0777 x1 P0779 x2 100 % mA P0781 % 21 2 ms 0.0 % 0 100.0 % 20 0
  • 77. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 77 3.5.5.8 Motor potentiometer (MOP) P1031 =... Setpoint memory of the MOP Saves last motor potentiometer setpoint (MOP) that was active before OFF command or power down. 0 MOP setpoint will not be stored 1 MOP setpoint will be stored (P1040 is updated) P1032 =... Inhibit negative MOP setpoints 0 Neg. MOP setpoint is allowed 1 Neg. MOP setpoint inhibited P1040 =... Setpoint of the MOP Determines setpoint for motor potentiometer control. MOP ramp-up and ramp-down times are defined by the parameters P1120 and P1121. Selection DIN BOP UP button USS control word r2032 Bit13 USS control word r2032 Bit14 or P0702 = 13 (DIN2) P0703 = 14 (DIN3) P0719 = 0, P0700 = 1, P1000 = 1 MOP up MOP down P0719 = 1, P0700 = 2 or P0719 = 0, P0700 = 2, P1000 = 1 P0719 = 11 or P0719 = 0, P0700 = 4, P1000 = 1 P0719 = 41 DOWN button Possible parameter settings for the selection of MOP: USS on BOP link USS control word r2036 Bit13 USS control word r2036 Bit14 or P0719 = 0, P0700 = 5, P1000 = 1 P0719 = 51 USS on COM link CB control word r2090 Bit13 r2090 Bit14 or P0719 = 0, P0700 = 6, P1000 = 1 P0719 = 61 CB CB control word 0 1 5.00 Hz
  • 78. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 78 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.9 Fixed frequency (FF) P1001 =... Fixed frequency 1 Can be directly selected via DIN1 (P0701 = 15, 16) P1002 =... Fixed frequency 2 Can be directly selected via DIN2 (P0702 = 15, 16) P1003 =... Fixed frequency 3 Can be directly selected via DIN3 (P0703 = 15, 16) P1004 =... Fixed frequency 4 P1005 =... Fixed frequency 5 P1006 =... Fixed frequency 6 P1007 =... Fixed frequency 7 When defining the function of the digital inputs (P0701 to P0703), three different types can be selected for fixed frequencies: 15 = Direct selection (binary-coded) In this particular mode, the appropriate digital input always selects the associated fixed frequency, e.g.: Digital input 3 = selects fixed frequency 3. If several inputs are simultaneously active, then these are summed. An ON command is additionally required. 16 = Direct selection + ON command (binary-coded + On / Off1) In this mode, the fixed frequencies are selected as for 15, however these are combined with an ON command. 17 = Binary coded selection + ON command (BCD-coded + On/ Off1) The BCD-coded operating mode is effective for digital inputs 1 to 3. P1016 =... Fixed frequency code – Bit 0 Defines the selection method for fixed frequencies. P1017 =... Fixed frequency code – Bit 1 P1018 =... Fixed frequency code – Bit 2 1 Direct selection 2 Direct selection + ON command 3 Binary coded selection + ON command NOTE For settings 2 and 3, all parameters P1016 to P1019 must be set to the selected value so that the drive inverter accepts the ON command. 3.5.5.10 JOG P1058 =... JOG frequency right Frequency in Hz when the motor is being jogged in the clockwise direction of rotation. P1059 =... JOG frequency left Frequency in Hz when the motor is being jogged in the counter-clockwise direction of rotation. P1060 =... JOG ramp-up time Ramp-up time in s from 0 to the maximum frequency (P1082). The JOG ramp-up is limited by P1058 or P1059. P1061 =... JOG ramp-down time Ramp-down time in s from the maximum frequency (P1082) to 0. P1082 (fmax ) P1058 t P1060 P1061 f JOG 5.00 Hz 10.00 Hz 15.00 Hz 20.00 Hz 25.00 Hz 30.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 1 1 1 10.00 s 10.00 s 5.00 Hz 5.00 Hz
  • 79. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 79 3.5.5.11 Ramp-function generator (HLG) P1091 =... Skip frequency 1 (entered in Hz) Defines skip frequency 1 which avoids effects of mechanical resonance and suppresses frequencies within +/- P1101 (skip frequency bandwidth). P1091 =... Skip frequency 2 P1091 =... Skip frequency 3 P1091 =... Skip frequency 4 P1101 =... Skip frequency bandwidth (entered in Hz) P1101 P1091 fin fout Skip frequency bandwidth Skip frequency P1120 =... Ramp-up time (enters the accelerating time in s) P1121 =... Ramp-down time (enters the deceleration time in s) f P1082 (fmax ) f1 t P1120 P1121 P1130 =... Rump-up initial rounding time (entered in s) P1131 =... Ramp-up final rounding time (entered in s) P1132 =... Rump-down initial rounding time (entered in s) P1133 =... Ramp-down final rounding time (entered in s) P1134 =... Rounding type 0 Continuous smoothing 1 Discontinuous smoothing The rounding times are recommended as abrupt responses can be avoided therefore reducing stress and damage to the mechanical system. The ramp-up and ramp-down times are extended by the component of the rounding ramps. P1135 =... OFF3 ramp-down time Defines ramp-down time from maximum frequency to standstill for OFF3 command. 2.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 0.00 Hz 10.00 s 10.00 s 5.00 s 0.00 s 0 0.00 s 0.00 s 0.00 s
  • 80. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 80 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.12 Reference/limit frequencies P1080 =... Min. frequency (entered in Hz) Sets minimum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of frequency setpoint. If the setpoint falls below the value of P1080, then the output frequency is set to P1080 taking into account the sign. P1082 =... Max. frequency (entered in Hz) Sets maximum motor frequency [Hz] at which motor will run irrespective of the frequency setpoint. If the setpoint exceeds the value P1082, then the output frequency is limited. The value set here is valid for both clockwise and anticlockwise rotation. P2000 =... Reference frequency (entered in Hz) The reference frequency in Hertz corresponds to a value of 100 %. This setting should be changed if a maximum frequency of higher than 50 Hz is required. It is automatically changed to 60 Hz if the standard 60 Hz frequency was selected using the DIP50/60 switch or P0100. NOTE This reference frequency effects the setpoint frequency as both the analog setpoints (100 % P2000) as well as the frequency setpoints via USS (4000H P2000) refer to this value. 3.5.5.13 Motor control P1300 =... Control mode The control type is selected using this parameter. For the "V/f characteristic" control type, the ratio between the frequency inverter output voltage and the frequency inverter output frequency is defined. 0 V/f with linear 1 V/f with FCC 2 V/f with parabolic characteristic 3 V/f with programmable characteristic (→ P1320 – P1325) P1310 =... Continuous boost (entered in %) Voltage boost as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) and P0350 (stator resistance). P1310 is valid for all V/f versions (refer to P1300). At low output frequencies, the effective resistance values of the winding can no longer be neglected in order to maintain the motor flux. f Linear V/f OFF ON t t ⏐f⏐ P1310 active t0 1 Validity range Vmax Vn (P0304) VConBoost,100 0 fn (P0310) f max (P1082) V fBoost,end (P1316) Boost Output voltage actual V N orm al V/f (P1300 = 0) VConBoost,50 Boost voltage 0.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 50.00 Hz 0 50.00 %
  • 81. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 81 P1311 =... Acceleration boost (entered in %) Voltage boost for accelerating/braking as a % relative to P0305 and P0350. P1311 only results in a voltage boost when ramping-up/ramp-down and generates an additional torque for accelerating/braking. Contrary to parameter P1312, that is only active for the 1st acceleration operation after the ON command, P1311 is effective each time that the drive accelerates or brakes. P1312 =... Starting boost (entered in %) Voltage boost when starting (after an ON command) when using the linear or square-law V/f characteristic as a % relative to P0305 (rated motor current) or P0350 (stator resistance). The voltage boost remains active until 1) the setpoint is reached for the first time and 2) the setpoint is reduced to a value that is less than the instantaneous ramp-function generator output. P1320 =... Programmable V/f freq. coord. 1 Sets V/f coordinates (P1320/1321 to P1324/1325) to define V/f characteristic. P1321 =... Programmable. V/f volt. coord. 1 P1322 =... Programmable V/f freq. coord. 2 P1323 =... Programmable V/f volt. coord. 2 P1324 =... Programmable U/f Freq. coord. 3 P1325 =... Programmable V/f volt. coord. 3 ]P0304[V 100[%] r0395[%] 100[%] P1310[%] P1310[V] ⋅⋅= V P1325 f1 P1320 fmax P1082 Vmax r0071 Vn P0304 P1323 P1321 P1310 f0 0 Hz f2 P1322 f3 P1324 fn P0310 f Vmax = f(Vdc , Mmax ) P1335 =... Slip compensation (entered in %) Dynamically adjusts output frequency of inverter so that motor speed is kept constant independent of motor load. P1338 =... Resonance damping gain V/f Defines resonance damping gain for V/f. 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 % 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.0 Hz 0.00
  • 82. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 82 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.5.14 Inverter/motor protection P0290 =... Inverter overload reaction Selects reaction of inverter to an internal over-temperature. 0 Reduce output frequency 1 Trip (F0004) 2 Reduce pulse frequency and output frequency 3 Reduce pulse frequency then trip (F0004) P0292 =... Inverter temperature warning Defines the temperature difference (in ºC) between the Overtemperature trip threshold and the warning threshold of the inverter. The trip threshold is stored internally by the inverter and cannot be changed by the user. P0335 =... Motor cooling (enters the motor cooling system) 0 Self-cooled: Using shaft mounted fan attached to motor 1 Force-cooled: Using separately powered cooling fan P0610 =... Motor I 2 t reaction Defines reaction when motor I2 t reaches warning threshold. 0 Warning, no reaction, no trip 1 Warning, Imax reduction, trip F0011 2 Warning, no reaction, trip (F0011) P0611 =... Motor I 2 t time constant (entered in s) The time until the thermal limit of a motor is reached, is calculated via the thermal time constant. A higher value increases the time at which the motor thermal limit is reached. The value of P0611 is estimated according to the motor data during quick commissioning or is calculated using P0340 (Calculating of the motor parameters). When the calculation of motor parameters during quick commission is complete the stored value can be replaced by the value given by the motor manufacturer Motor I 2 t warning level (entered in %) Defines the value at which alarm A0511 (motor overtemperature) is generated. P0614 =... ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ P0305 r0027 2 P0310 r0021 Motor i2t temp. reaction P0610 P0611 P0335 P0614 P06141.1⋅ Trip threshold Warning threshold I_max reduction A0511 F0011 t r0034 )ti( 2 P0640 =... Motor overload factor [%] Defines motor overload current limit in [%] relative to P0305 (rated motor current). Limited to maximum inverter current or to 400 % of rated motor current (P0305), whichever is the lower. 0 15 °C 0 2 100 s 100.0 % 150.0 %
  • 83. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 83 3.5.5.15 Inverter-specific Functions Flying start P1200 =... Flying start Starts inverter onto a spinning motor by rapidly changing the output frequency of the inverter until the actual motor speed has been found. 0 Flying start disabled 1 Flying start is always active, start in direction of setpoint 2 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint 3 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, start in direction of setpoint 4 Flying start is always active, only in direction of setpoint 5 Flying start is active if power on, fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint 6 Flying start is active if fault, OFF2, only in direction of setpoint P1202 =... Motor-current: Flying start (entered in %) Defines search current used for flying start. P1203 =... Search rate: Flying start (entered in %) Sets factor by which the output frequency changes during flying start to synchronize with turning motor. Automatic restart P1210 =... Automatic restart Configures automatic restart function. 0 Disabled 1 Trip reset after power on 2 Restart after mains blackout 3 Restart after mains brownout or fault 4 Restart after mains brownout 5 Restart after mains blackout and fault 6 Restart after mains brown/blackout or fault Holding brake P1215 =... Holding brake enable Enables/disables holding brake function (MHB). 0 Motor holding brake disabled 1 Motor holding brake enabled NOTE The following must apply when controlling the brake relay via a digital output: P0731 = 14 (refer to Section 3.5.5.4 "Digital "). P1216 =... Holding brake release delay (entered in s) Defines the time interval during which the frequency inverter runs with the min. frequency P1080 after magnetizing, before the ramp-up starts. P1217 =... Holding time after ramp-down (entered in s) Defines time for which inverter runs at minimum frequency (P1080) after ramping down. 0 100 % 100 % 0 1.0 s 1.0 s 0
  • 84. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 84 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 DC braking P1232 =... DC braking current (entered in %) Defines level of DC current in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). P1233 =... Duration of DC braking (entered in s) Defines duration for which DC injection braking is to be active following an OFF1 or OFF3 command. Compound braking P1236 =... Compound braking current (entered in %) Defines DC level superimposed on AC waveform after exceeding DC-link voltage threshold of compound braking. The value is entered in [%] relative to rated motor current (P0305). (see also "Vdc controller"). Compound braking switch-on level P0210213.1V21.13U mains DC_Comp ⋅⋅=⋅⋅= If P1254 = 0 : 1242r0.98U DC_Comp ⋅=Compound braking switch-on level otherwise : Vdc controller P1240 =... Configuration of Vdc controller Enables / disables Vdc controller. 0 Vdc controller disabled 1 Vdc-max controller enabled P1254 =... Auto detect Vdc switch-on levels Enables/disables auto-detection of switch-on levels for Vdc control functionalities. 0 Disabled 1 Enabled t t ⏐f⏐ 1 -controller activeVDC_max t VDC 0 r0056 Bit14 r1242 A0911 f fact set PID controller P2200 =... BI: Enable PID controller PID mode Allows user to enable/disable the PID controller. Setting to 1 enables the PID controller. Setting 1 automatically disables normal ramp times set in P1120 and P1121 and the normal frequency setpoints. P2253 =... CI: PID setpoint Defines setpoint source for PID setpoint input. P2254 =... CI: PID trim source Selects trim source for PID setpoint. This signal is multiplied by the trim gain and added to the PID setpoint. P2257 =... Ramp-up time for PID setpoint Sets the ramp-up time for the PID setpoint. P2258 =... Ramp-down time for PID setpoint Sets ramp-down time for PID setpoint. P2264 =... CI: PID feedback Selects the source of the PID feedback signal. 100 % 0 s 0 % 1 1 0.0 0.0 0.0 1.00 s 1.00 s 755.0
  • 85. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 85 P2267 =... Max. value for PID feedback Sets the upper limit for the value of the feedback signal in [%].. P2268 =... Min. value for PID feedback Sets lower limit for value of feedback signal in [%].. P2280 =... PID proportional gain Allows user to set proportional gain for PID controller. P2285 =... PID integral time Sets integral time constant for PID controller. P2291 =... PID output upper limit Sets upper limit for PID controller output in [%]. P2292 =... PID output lower limit Sets lower limit for the PID controller output in [%]. PID MOP ADC PID SUM PID PID FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link P2254 P2253 PID RFG PID PT1 − ∆PID P2200 P2264 PID PT1 PID SCL OutputPID 0 1 Motor control P2257 P2258 P2261 P2271 P2269 P2270 P2265 P2280 P2285P2268 P2267 P2292 P2291 r2273 r2294 Example: Parameter Parameter text Example P2200 BI: Enable PID controller P2200 = 1.0 PID controller active P2253 CI: PID setpoint P2253 = 2224 PID-FF1 P2264 CI: PID feedback P2264 = 755 ADC P2267 Max. PID feedback P2267 Adapt to the application P2268 Min. PID feedback P2268 Adapt to the application P2280 PID proportional gain P2280 Determined by optimizing P2285 PID integral time P2285 Determined by optimizing P2291 PID output upper limit P2291 Adapt to the application P2292 PID output lower limit P2292 Adapt to the application NOTE If P0971 is used to start data save from the RAM to EEPROM, then after the data has been transferred, the communications memory is re-initialized. This means that communications via USS as well as also via the CB board are interrupted for the time it takes to reset: The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is displayed. The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and DriveMonitor and the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically re- established. 100.00 % 0.00 % 3.000 0.000 s 100.00 % 0.00 %
  • 86. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 86 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.6 Series commissioning The parameter set can be read-out (upread) from the drive converter via the serial interface and saved on the hard disk / floppy disk or in a non-volatile memory (e.g. EEPROM) using the following PC Tools (e.g. STARTER, DriveMonitor) or the Operator panel AOP (please refer to Fig. 3-21). The interfaces of the drive inverter with USS protocol and the fieldbus interfaces (e.g. PROFIBUS) which can be used to transfer parameters, can be used as serial interface. DriveMonitor AOP STARTER CB on COM link USS on COM link USS on BOP link (PROFIBUS) (RS485) (RS232) Parameter transmission from different sources via download MM4 * Option is absolutely required for the connection 1) 1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit for single inverter control 5)* 2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit 3) Option: AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control (USS) 4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter 3)* 2)* 2)* 4)* 4)* CB 5) With PROFIBUS: SIMATIC NET With CANopen or DeviceNet: see user organisation Fig. 3-21 Upread / download using AOP and PC Tools If there is already an appropriate parameter set for the drive, which, for example, was created by either upreading or by programming offline, then this can be downloaded into the drive inverter. This means that it is possible to transfer the parameter set from drive inverter A to drive inverter B which, for identical applications (e.g. series machines, group drives) allows data to be copied and therefore in turn fast commissioning.
  • 87. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 87 WARNING For series commissioning, all of the communication interfaces as well as also the digital and analog interfaces are re-initialized. This results in a brief communications failure or causes the digital output to switch. Potentially hazardous loads must be carefully secured before starting a series commissioning. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows before starting series commissioning: ♦ Lower the load to the floor, or ♦ Clamp the load using the motor holding brake (Caution: During series commissioning, MICROMASTER must be prevented from controlling the motor holding brake). If the motor holding brake (refer to Section 3.13) is controlled by the MICROMASTER, then series commissioning may not be carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications).
  • 88. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 88 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.5.7 Parameter reset to the factory setting The factory setting is a defined initial state of all of the drive inverter parameters. The drive inverters are shipped from the factory in this state. The drive inverters have the following default settings: Control via the digital inputs a) ON/OFF via DIN1 b) Direction of rotation reversal via DIN2 c) Fault acknowledgement via DIN3 Setpoint input via analog input Signal output via the digital output a) Fault active via DOUT 1 Actual frequency via the analog output The basic V/f characteristic is the control mode (P1300 = 0) Induction motor (P0300 = 1) When appropriately connected-up and with the appropriate motor – drive inverter combination, MICROMASTER drive inverters are ready to run when shipped from the factory without requiring any additional parameterization. You can re-establish the initial state at any time by carrying-out a parameter reset to the factory setting. This undoes all of the parameter changes which were made since the drive inverter was supplied. This value is designated as "Def" in the parameter list. Reset to the factory setting START P0010=30 Commissioning parameter 30 Factory setting P0970 = 1 Factory reset 0 disabled 1 Parameter reset END The drive inverter carries-out a parameter reset (duration, approx. 10 s) and then automatically exits the reset menu and sets: P0970 = 0 : disabled P0010 = 0 : ready NOTE When resetting the parameters to the factory setting, the communications memory is re-initialized. This means that communications via USS as well as also via the CB board are interrupted for the time it takes to make the reset: The connected PLC (e.g. SIMATIC S7) goes into stop The STARTER start-up program buffers the communications failure For the DriveMonitor start-up program, "NC" (not connected) or "drive busy" is displayed. The "busy" text is displayed at the BOP operator panel After reset has been completed, for the start-up programs STARTER and DriveMonitor or the BOP operator panel, communications are automatically re- established. 0 0
  • 89. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 89 3.6 Inputs / outputs 3.6.1 Digital inputs (DIN) Number: 3 + 1 Parameter range: r0722 – P0725 Function chart number: FP2000, FP2200 Features: - cycle time: 2 ms - switch-on threshold: 10.6 V - switch-out threshold: 10.6 V - electrical features: electrically isolated, short-circuit proof External control signals are required for a drive converter to be able to operate autonomously. These signals can be entered via a serial interface as well as also via digital inputs (refer to Fig. 3-22). MICROMASTER has 3 digital inputs which can be expanded to a total of 4 by using the 2 analog inputs. The digital inputs, as far as their assignment, can be freely programmed to create a function. Whereby, regarding the program, it is possible to directly assign the function via parameters P0701 - P0704 or to freely program the function using BICO technology. DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - PNP (P0725 = 1)) 24 V T 0 & 0 1 PNP/NPN DIN 0 ... 1 P0725 (1) 0 V 24 V Debounce time: DIN 0 ... 3 P0724 (3) CO/BO: Bin.inp.val r0722 r0722 .0 Kl.8 P24 (PNP) Kl.9 0 V (NPN) Pxxxx BI: ... P0701 Function 0 1 DIN channel (e.g. DIN1 - NPN (P0725 = 0)) 24 V T 0 & 0 1 PNP/NPN DIN 0 ... 1 P0725 (1) 0 V 24 V Debounce time: DIN 0 ... 3 P0724 (3) CO/BO: Bin.inp.val r0722 r0722 .0 Kl.8 P24 (PNP) Kl.9 0 V (NPN) Pxxxx BI: ... P0701 Function 0 1 Fig. 3-22 Digital inputs
  • 90. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 90 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Parameter P0725 is used to define as to whether digital inputs DIN1 – DIN3 are logical "1" when appropriately connected to 0 V or 24 V. The logical states of the digital inputs can be de-bounced using P0724 and read-out using parameter r0722 (BICO monitoring parameter). Further, this parameter is used to parameterize BICO for the digital inputs (refer to BICO parameterization in the following Section). P0701 – P0703 (digital inputs 1–3) or P0707 – P0703 (analog input) The possible settings of the individual inputs are listed in Table 3-10. Table 3-10 Parameters P0701 – P0706 Parameter value Significance 0 Digital input disabled 1 ON / OFF1 2 ON+reverse / OFF1 3 OFF2 – coast to standstill 4 OFF3 – quick ramp-down 9 Fault acknowledge 10 JOG right 11 JOG left 12 Reverse 13 MOP up (increase frequency) 14 MOP down (decrease frequency) 15 Fixed setpoint (direct selection) 16 Fixed setpoint (direct selection + ON) 17 Fixed setpoint (binary-coded selection + ON) 25 Enable DC braking 29 External trip 33 Disable additional frequency setpoint 99 Enable BICO parameterization Example: An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1. P0700 = 2 Control enabled via terminal strip (digital inputs) P0701 = 1 ON/OFF1 via digital input 1 (DIN1)
  • 91. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 91 BICO parameterization If the setting 99 (BICO) is entered into parameters P0701 – P0704, then the BICO wiring is enabled for the appropriate digital input. The output parameter number of the function (parameter, included in the parameter text BO) should be entered into the command source (parameter which contains the code BI in the parameter text). Example: An ON/OFF1 command should be realized using digital input DIN1. P0700 = 2 Control enabled via digital inputs P0701 = 99 BICO enabled for DIN1 P0840 = 722.0 ON/OFF1 via DIN1 NOTE Only experienced users should use the BICO parameterization and for applications where the possibilities provided by P0701 – P0704 are no longer adequate.
  • 92. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 92 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.6.2 Digital output (DOUT) Number: 1 Parameter range: r0730 – P0748 Function chart number: FP2100 Features: - cycle time: 1 ms Binary states in the drive can be output via the digital output. As result of the fast cycle time, it is possible to control external devices and to display the state in real time. In order that higher powers can also be output, the internal signal (TTL level) is amplified using a relay (refer to Fig. 3-23). Relay: - max. opening / closing time: 5 / 10 ms - voltage / current 30 V DC / 5 A 250 V AC / 2 A (52:3) BI: Fct. of DOUT 1 P0731 -1 0 1 Invert DOUTs 0 ... 1 P0748 (0) CO/BO: State DOUTs r0747 r0747 NO Kl.11 Kl.10 .0 Fig. 3-23 Digital output The states, which are to be output, are defined using the "BI" parameter P0731 (digital output). For the definition, the "BO" parameter number or "CO/BO" parameter number and the bit number of the particular state should be entered into P0731. Frequently used states including the parameter number and bit are shown in the following Table (refer to Table 3-11).
  • 93. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 93 Table 3-11 Parameter P0731 (frequently used functions / states) Parameter value Significance 52.0 Drive ready 52.1 Drive ready to run 52.2 Drive running 52.3 Drive fault active 52.4 OFF2 active 52.5 OFF3 active 52.6 Switch-on inhibit active 52.7 Drive warning active 52.8 Deviation, setpoint / actual value 52.9 PZD control (Process Data Control) 52.A Maximum frequency reached 52.B Warning: Motor current limit 52.C Motor holding brake (MHB) active 52.D Motor overload 52.E Motor running direction right 52.F Inverter overload 53.0 DC brake active 53.1 Act. frequency f_act >= P2167 (f_off) 53.2 Act. frequency f_act > P1080 (f_min) 53.3 Act. current r0027 >= P2170 53.6 Act. frequency f_act >= setpoint NOTE A complete list of all of the binary status parameters (refer to "CO/BO" parameters) can be taken from the parameter list.
  • 94. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 94 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.6.3 Analog input (ADC) Number: 1 Parameter range: P0750 – P0762 Function chart number: FP2200 Features: - cycle time: 4 ms - resolution: 10 bits - accuracy: 1 % referred to 10 V / 20 mA - electrical features: incorrect polarity protection, short-circuit proof Analog setpoints, actual values and control signals are read-into the drive inverter using the appropriate analog input and are converted into digital signals / values using the ADC converter. The analog input represents a voltage input that can be additionally configured via parameter P0756. Depending on the source, the appropriate connection must be made. Using, as an example, the internal 10 V voltage source, a connection is shown as an example in the following diagram (refer to Fig. 3-24). Voltage input A D KL1 10 V KL2 0 V KL4 ADC− KL3 ADC+ > 4.7 kΩ Fig. 3-24 Connection example for ADC voltage input The ADC channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone) (refer to Fig. 3-25). KL KL A D ADC type ADC scaling ADC dead zone r0755 Pxxxx r0752 P1000 ADC ADC+ r0754 P0761P0753P0756 Setpoint r0722 r0722.3 0 1 1.7 V 3.9 V F0080 P0704 Pxxxx Function Wire breakage sensing P0756 P0761 T 0 P0762 r0751 r0751 Fig. 3-25 ADC channel
  • 95. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 95 NOTE When the filter time constant P0753 (ADC-PT1) is increased, this smoothes the ADC input signal therefore reducing the ripple. When this function is used within a control loop, this smoothing has a negative impact on the control behavior and immunity to noise (the dynamic performance deteriorates). Wire breakage monitoring The wire breakage monitoring (refer to Fig. 3-25) is set using parameters P0756 and P0761. If the input signal of the analog input falls below the wire breakage threshold (0.5 * P0761), then after the time in P0762 expires, fault F0080 is output and the status bit is set in parameter r0751. t0 Signal loss t0 P0761 V 1 P07610,5 ⋅ 10 P0762 r0751 t0 1 F0080 Fault acknowl. Analog input t0 Act. ADC after scaling r0755 Fig. 3-26 Wire breakage monitoring The following secondary conditions/limitations apply to the wire breakage monitoring: The monitoring function must be activated using parameter P0756 Width of the ADC dead zone P0761 > 0 Wire breakage monitoring if the ADC input quantity ≤ 0.5 * P0761 Note The wire-breakage monitoring function is only possible for unipolar analog inputs. Input range 0 to 0.5 * P0761 of the analog input must be excluded when activating the wire breakage monitoring for normal operation.
  • 96. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 96 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.6.4 Analog output (DAC) Number: 1 Parameter range: r0770 – P0785 Function chart number: FP2300 Features: - cycle time: 4 ms - resolution: 10 bit - accuracy: 1 % referred to 20 mA Setpoints, actual values and control signals inside the drive inverter are read-out via the D/A converter using these analog input. The digital signal is converted into an analog signal. All of the signals can be output via the D/A which contain the "CO" abbreviation in the parameter text (refer to list of all of the BICO parameters in the parameter list). Parameter P0771 defines, by assigning the parameter number, the quantity which is output as analog signal through the DAC channel (refer to Fig. 3-27). The smoothed output frequency is output, e.g. via the analog output, if P0771 = 21. D/A conv. channel D A KL KL D/A conv.− D/A conv.+r0755 Pxxxxrxxxx P0771 ... Function r0020 CO: Freq. setpoint before RFG r0021 CO: Act. filtered frequency r0024 CO: Act. filtered output freq. r0025 CO: Act. filtered output voltage r0026 CO: Act. filtered DC-link volt. r0027 CO: Act. filtered output current r0052 CO/BO: Act. status word 1 r0053 CO/BO: Act. status word 2 r0054 CO/BO: Act. control word 1 ... 0...20mA Fig. 3-27 Signal output through the DAC channel In order to adapt the signal, the DAC channel has several function units (filter, scaling, dead zone) which can be used to modify the digital signal before conversion (refer to Fig. 3-28). P0777 P0778 P0779 P0780 Fig. 3-28 DAC channel
  • 97. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 97 NOTE The analog output only provides the current output (0 ... 20 mA). A 0 ... 10 V voltage signal can be generated by connecting a 500 Ohm resistor across the output. With parameter P0775 = 1, negative values can be avoided on the input side of the DAC channel. If this parameter is activated, the absolute value is always entered in the input of the DAC scaling (the DAC characteristic is mirrored on the Y axis). If the value was originally a negative one, the corresponding bit in r0785 is set for detection.
  • 98. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 98 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.7 Communications Parameter range: P2009 – r2091 Function chart number: CB at COM link FP2700, FP2710 USS at COM link FP2600, FP2610 USS at BOP link FP2500, FP2510 MICROMASTER 420 has 2 serial communication interfaces which can be simultaneously used. These interfaces are designated as follows in the following text: BOP link COM link Different units, such as the BOP and AOP operator panels, PCs with the start-up software DriveMonitor and STARTER, interface modules for PROFIBUS DP, DeviceNet and CAN as well as programmable controls with communication processors can be connected at this interface (refer to Fig. 3-21). 1) Option: BOP/AOP door mounting kit for single inverter control BOP USS RS232 USS RS232 BOP DriveMonitor/ STARTER AOP CB BOP link PROFIBUS board DeviceNet board CAN board COM link CB CB USS RS485 AOP USS RS485 DriveMonitor/ STARTER 14 15 1) 1) 3)* 1) Option: Operator panel door mounting kit for single inverter control 2)* 2) Option: PC to inverter connection kit 3) Option: AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control (USS) 4)* 4) Option: RS232-RS485 Converter Fig. 3-29 Serial communication interfaces - BOP link and COM link
  • 99. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 99 The BOP, a programming / operator unit (e.g. AOP, PC with DriveMonitor / STARTER) or a programmable control with communications processor can be connected via this BOP link. Data transfer between MICROMASTER and the programming / operator units is realized using the USS protocol via the RS232 interface (point-to-point data coupling). Communications between the BOP and MICROMASTER uses an optimized interface which takes into consideration the somewhat limited resources of the BOP. If the BOP is replaced by an USS unit (PC, AOP), then MICROMASTER automatically identifies the interface of the new unit. This is also true for the inverse replacement sequence. The BOP link interface can be adapted to the particular unit using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-12). Table 3-12 BOP link BOP link – interface BOP on BOP link USS on BOP link No parameter P2009[1] P2010[1] P2011[1] P2012[1] P2013[1] P2014[1] r2015 P2016 r2024[1] r2025[1] r2026[1] r2027[1] r2028[1] r2029[1] r2030[1] r2031[1] r2032 r2033 Communication modules (CB) such as PROFIBUS, DeviceNet, CANopen and also programming / operator units (e.g. PCs with the DriveMonitor / STARTER start-up software and AOP) as well as programmable controls with communication processor can be connected to the COM link. The plug connector allows the communication modules to be connected to MICROMASTER. On the other hand, the programming / operator units must be connected to the MICROMASTER through terminals 14/15. As for the BOP link, data is transferred between MICROMASTER and the programming / operator unit using the USS protocol. In so doing, for the COM link, the USS protocol is transferred via the bus-capable RS485 interface. Essentially the same as the BOP link, the COM link also automatically defines if a communications module is replaced with a USS unit (PC, AOP). The COM link can be adapted to the particular unit using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-13). Table 3-13 COM link COM link – interface CB on COM link USS on COM link P2040 P2041 r2050 P2051 r2053 r2054 r2090 r2091 P2009[0] P2010[0] P2011[0] P2012[0] P2013[0] P2014[0] r2018 P2019 r2024[0] r2025[0] r2026[0] r2027[0] r2028[0] r2029[0] r2030[0] r2031[0] r2036 r2037
  • 100. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 100 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 NOTE A communications (CB) module as well as a programming / operator unit can be simultaneously connected to the COM link interface via terminals 14/15 (USS). This is the reason that the communications module has priority over USS. In this case, the USS node (USS station) via the COM link is de-activated. Contrary to PROFIBUS, the RS485 port (terminals 14/15) is not optically isolated (not floating). When installing the system, it must be ensured that EMC faults do not result in communication failures or damage to the RS485 drivers. 3.7.1 Universal serial interface (USS) Parameter range: P2009 – r2037 Significance COM link BOP link USS basic setting USS baud rate P2010[0] P2010[1] USS address P2011[0] P2011[1] USS-PZD length P2012[0] P2012[1] USS-PKW length P2013[0] P2013[1] PZD data Received data r2018[8] r2015[8] Received control word 1 r2036 r2032 Received control word 2 r2037 r2033 Sent data P2019[8] P2016[8] Sent status word 1 r0052 r0052 Sent status word 2 r0053 r0053 Alarms: --- Faults: F0071, F0072 Function chart number: FP2500, FP2510, FP2600, FP2610 Features: - electrical features: Not electrically isolated USS at the BOP link with PC- converter connecting set Not electrically isolated USS at COM link (terminals 14 / 15) - cycle time (MM420): 8 ms (process data PZD) Background (parameter ID value PKW)
  • 101. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 101 Baud rate + interval time Telegram length Number of nodes (slave) Master cycle,masterT Slave (MICROMASTER) cycle,USST cycle,slave(MM4)T NOTE From the user’s perspective, the total cycle time between the master and slave is of significance. As shown in the diagram above, this time depends on several factors. Fig. 3-30 Cycle times Using the USS protocol, a user can establish a serial point-to-point data link and a serial bus data link between a higher-level master system and several slave systems. Master systems can be, for example, PLCs (e.g. SIMATIC S7-200) or PCs. MICROMASTER drive converters are always the slaves on the bus system. The USS protocol allows the user to implement both automation tasks with cyclical telegram traffic (→ a fixed telegram length is necessary) as well as visualization tasks. In this case, the protocol with variable telegram length is advantageous, as texts and parameter descriptions can be transferred in one telegram without chopping up the information.
  • 102. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 102 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.7.1.1 Protocol specification and bus structure The USS protocol has the following significant features: Supports a multi-point-capable link, e.g. EIA RS 485 hardware or a point-to-point link, e.g. EIA RS 232 Master-slave access technique Single-master system Maximum 32 nodes (max. 31 slaves) Operation with variable or fixed telegram length Simple, reliable telegram frames The same bus mode of operation as with the PROFIBUS (DIN 19245 Part 1) Data interface to the basic unit according to PROFILE variable-speed drives. This means that, when the USS is being used, information is transferred to the drive in the same way as with the PROFIBUS-DP. Can be used for start-up, service and automation PC-based service tools (e.g. STARTER and DriveMonitor) Can be easily implemented in customized systems Protocol specification The USS protocol defines an access technique according to the master-slave principle for communications via a serial bus. The point-to-point link is included as a sub-quantity. One master and a maximum of 31 slaves can be connected to the bus. The individual slaves are selected by the master using an address character in the telegram. A slave can never transmit without first being initiated by the master so that direct information transfer between individual slaves is not possible. The master function cannot be transferred (single-master system). The following illustration shows a bus configuration using drive technology as an example. MICROMASTER Higher-level computer "Master" MICROMASTER MICROMASTER MICROMASTER "Slave""Slave""Slave""Slave" Fig. 3-31 Serial linking of MICROMASTER (slaves) with a higher-level computer (master)
  • 103. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 103 The telegram has the following structure: Each telegram begins with the start character STX (= 02 hex), followed by the length information (LGE) and the address byte (ADR). The net characters then follow. The telegram is terminated by the BCC (Block Check Character). For single-word data (16 bit) in the net data block (= net character block), the high byte (first character) is always sent and then the low byte (second character). The same applies to double-word data: the high word is sent first followed by the low word. The necessary settings / parameter assignments must be made both at the master as well as at the slave and can no longer be changed in bus operation. The protocol does not identify tasks in the net characters. The contents of the net characters/data for the MICROMASTER drives is discussed in Section 3.7.1.2 "Structure of the net data". n net characters STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC Fig. 3-32 Telegram structure Information is coded as follows: Abbreviation Significance Size Explanation STX Start of text ASCII characters 02 hex LGE Telegram length 1 byte Contains the telegram length ADR Address 1 byte Contains the slave address and the telegram type (binary coded) --- Net characters Each one byte Net data, contents are dependent on the request BCC Block check character 1 byte Data security characters
  • 104. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 104 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 In the address byte, information other than the node number is coded: The individual bits in the address byte are assigned as follows: = 1: Broadcast, address bits (No. 0 to 4) are not evaluated = 0: No broadcast 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 STX LGE ADR 1. 2. n BCC n net characters Bit No. Slave nodes No. 0 to 31 = 1: Mirror telegram = 0: No mirror telegram = 1: Special telegram (for an explanation, see below) = 0: Standard; bits 0 to 6 are valid and must be evaluated Fig. 3-33 Assignment of the address byte (ADR) The master ensures cyclical telegram data transfer. The master addresses all of the slave nodes one after the other with a task telegram. The addressed nodes respond with a reply telegram. In accordance with the master-slave procedure, the slave, after receiving the task telegram, must send the reply telegram to the master before the master can address the next slave node. The sequence of the addressed slave nodes can be specified, for example, by entering the node numbers (ADR) in a circulating list (polling list) in the master. If it is necessary to address several slaves in a faster cycle than the other slaves, their node number can occur several times in the circulating list. A point-to-point link can be implemented by means of the circulating list, in which case only one node is entered into the circulating list.
  • 105. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 105 Example of configuration 1 3 57 21 0 0 1 3 5 0 7 21 1 3 5 0 1 0 1 7 21 Master Circulating list in the master MICROMASTER with the addresses 0, 1, 3, 5, 7 and 21 Nodes 0 and 1 are signalled twice as often as others Fig. 3-34 Circulating list (Example of configuration) The length of a cycle time is determined by the time needed for the sequential occurrence of data exchange with the individual nodes. Cycle time 0 0 1 1 0 0 t Telegram run time for reply from node 1 Reply delay time from node 1 Telegram run time for task for node 1 Processing time in the master Fig. 3-35 Cycle time Due to inconstant reply delay and processing times, the cycle time is not fixed. The STX start character (= 02 hexadecimal) by itself is not sufficient for the slaves to clearly identify the start of a telegram because the bit combination 02/hexadecimal can also occur in the net characters. For this reason, a no- character start interval of at least 2 character run-times before the STX is specified for the master. The start interval is part of the task telegram.
  • 106. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 106 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-14 Minimum start intervals for various baud rates Baud rate in bit/s Start interval in ms 2400 9,20 ms 4800 4,60 ms 9600 2,30 ms 19200 1,15 ms 38400 0,57 ms 57600 0,38 ms 76800 0,29 ms 93750 0,24 ms 115200 0,19 ms Only an STX with a preceding start interval identifies the valid start of a telegram. Data is always transferred in accordance with the diagram illustrated below (half- duplex mode): Master transmits Start pause STX LGE ADR 1. n BCC STX LGE ADR 1. BCCBCC STX Slave transmits Reply delay time Start pause Fig. 3-36 Transmit sequence The time interval between the last character of the task telegram (BCC) and the start of the reply telegram (STX) is known as the reply delay time. The maximum permissible reply delay time is 20 ms, but it must not be less than the start interval. If node x does not respond within the maximum permissible reply delay time, an error message is deposited in the master. The master than sends the telegram for the next slave node. Bus structure The data transfer medium and the physical bus interface are essentially determined by what the bus system is used for. The physical interface of the USS protocol is based on the "Recommended Standard RS-485". For point-to-point links, a sub-quantity of EIA RS-232 (CCITT V.24) or TTY (20 mA current loop) can be used as the physical interface. The USS bus is based on a linear topology without branches. Both ends of the line terminate at a node. The maximum cable length (50 m) and therefore the maximum distance between the master and the last slave is limited by the characteristics of the cable, the ambient conditions and the data transfer rate [EIA Standard RS-422- A Dezember 1978, Appendix, Page 14] The number of nodes is limited to a maximum of 33 (1 master, 32 slaves).
  • 107. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 107 Master SlaveMaximum 32 slaves First node Last node SlaveSlave Fig. 3-37 USS bus topology The two ends of a bus line (first node and last node) must be terminated with bus terminating networks. (refer to Section 3.7.1.3). Point-to-point connections are handled just like bus connections. One node has the master function and the other has the slave function. Data is transferred in accordance with Standard EIA 485. RS 232 can be used for point-to-point links. Data transfer is always half-duplex − i.e. alternating between transmitting and receiving − and it must be controlled by the software. The half- duplex technique allows the same cables to be used for both data-transfer directions. This permits simple and inexpensive bus cabling, operation in environments subject to interference and a high data transfer rate. A shielded, twisted two-wire cable is used as the bus cable. Table 3-15 Structural data Conductor diameter 2 x ≈ 0,5 mm 2 Conductor ≥ 16 x ≤ 0,2 mm Lay ratio ≥ 20 twists / m Overall shield Braided, tin-plated copper wire, diameter ∅ ≥ 1,1 mm 2 85 % optical coverage Overall diameter -∅ 5 mm External sheath Depending on the requirements regarding flame retardation, deposits after burning etc. NOTE All information should only be considered as a recommendation. Deviations or different measures may be required depending on the particular requirements, the specific application and the conditions on site.
  • 108. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 108 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-16 Thermal and electrical characteristics Cable resistance (20°C) ≤ 40 Ω/km Insulation resistance (20°C) ≥ 200 MΩ/km Operating voltage (20°C) ≥ 300 V Test voltage (20°C) ≥ 1500 V Temperature range -40 °C ≤ T ≥ 80 °C Load capability ≥ 5 A Capacitance ≤ 120 pF/m Mechanical characteristics Single bending: ≤ 5 x outer diameter Repeated bending: ≤ 20 x outer diameter Recommendations Standard cable, without any special requirements: Two-core, flexible, shielded conductor in accordance with VDE 0812, with colored PVC sheath. PVC insulation resistant to oil, resistant to cold and petroleum products. Type: LiYCY 2 x 0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin Halogen-free cable (no hydrochloric acid is generated when the cable burns): Halogen-free, highly flexible, resistant to extreme heat and cold. Sheath manufactured from a special ASS silicon-based composite. Type: ASS 1 x 2 x 0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Metrofunk Kabel-Union GmbH, www.metrofunk.de Postfach 41 01 09, 12111 Berlin Recommended if halogen-free and silicon-free cables are required: Type: BETAflam 145 C-flex. 2x0,5 mm2 e.g. Fa. Studer-Kabel-AG, http://www.studer-kabel.ch/ Herrenmattstrasse 20, CH 4658 Däniken The total cable length of the USS connection may not exceed 50 m (max. cable length). The max. data transfer rate depends on the number of connected nodes (devices) as well as on the closed-loop control technique / function selection (processor utilization). Nominal values can be taken from the following table: Table 3-17 Max. number of nodes (devices) depending on the max. data transfer rate Max. data transfer rate Max. number of nodes (devices) V/f control Closed-loop vector control 9.6 kbit/s 32 32 19.2 kbit/s 32 32 38.4 kbit/s 32 7 93.7 kbit/s 32 - 115.2 kbit/s 32 -
  • 109. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 109 NOTE If a higher baud rate or higher number of nodes is required, then the CB option boards (e.g. PROFIBUS, CAN) should be used to ensure disturbance-free operation. 3.7.1.2 The structure of net data Information which, for example, a SIMATIC S7 control unit (= master) sends to a drive (= slave) or the drive sends to the control unit is placed in the net-data area of each telegram. General structure of the net-data block The net-data block is divided into two areas: the PKW (parameter ID value) range the PZD (process data) range The structure of the net data in the USS-protocol telegram is shown below. Protocol frame Parameter ID value (parameter area) STX LGE ADR (PKW) (PZD) BCC PKW: PZD: Process data (process-data area) Process dataParameter Net data Fig. 3-38 Telegram structure The PKW area relates to the handling of the parameter ID value (PKW) interface. The PKW interface is not a physical interface but a mechanism which handles parameter transfer between two communication partners (e.g. control unit and drive). This involves, for example, reading and writing parameter values and reading parameter descriptions and associated texts. All tasks which are performed via the PKW interface essentially involve operator control and visualization, service and diagnosis. The PZD area contains the signals required for the automation system: • Control word(s) and setpoint(s) from the master to the slave • Status word(s) and actual value(s) from the slave to the master. PKW area PKE IND PZD1 • • • PZD16 PZD area PKW elements variable length variable length Fig. 3-39 Structure of the PKW and PZD areas The two areas together make up the net data block. This structure applies to telegrams from the master to the slave and vice versa.
  • 110. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 110 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 PKW area With the help of the PKW mechanism, the following tasks can be performed via any serial interface with the USS protocol: Reading and writing parameters Reading the description of a parameter The PKW area can be varied. Depending on the requirements, the following lengths can be parameterized using parameter P2013: 3 words P2013 = 3 4 words P2013 = 4 variable word length P2013 = 127 The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to single-word (16 bit) parameter values. The PKW area must be permanently set to 3 words at the master and the slave. This setting is made during start-up and should not be altered any more during bus operation. 1st word 2nd word 3rd word PKE IND PWE1 Parameter ID Index Parameter value 1 The following is an example of a structure when access (write/read) is made to double-word (32 bit) parameter values. Parameterization to a fixed length of 4 words applies to telegrams from the master to the slave and from the slave to the master. 1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 Parameter ID Index Parameter value (double word) Telegram data transfer with variable telegram length (refer to the following example) means that the slave responds to a telegram from the master with a telegram whose length does not have to be the same length as the telegram from the master to the slave. 1st word 2nd word 3rd word 4th word (m+2). word PKE IND PWE1 PWE2 . . . . . With: 1 word ≤ m ≤ 118 words (maximum) when 8 PZD words (maximum) are contained in the net data block. 1 word ≤ m ≤ 126 words (maximum) when there is no PZD. The length of elements PEW1 to PWEm in the reply telegram and what is contained in them depends on the task issued by the master. Variable length means that only the number of words necessary to pass on the appropriate information is transferred. The minimum length, however. is always 3 words. If a slave, for example, transfers a parameter value which is a 16-bit quantity (e.g. the status word in parameter r0052; data format: U16), then only 3 words of the PKW area are sent in the telegram from the slave to the master. If, for example, for MICROMASTER the actual frequency is to be read (parameter r0021), then the PKW area in the telegram from the slave to the master is 4 words large; the reason for this is that the speed is represented as 32-bit quantity (data format: Float). It is
  • 111. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 111 mandatory to parameterize for a variable word length, if e.g. all values are to be read at once from an “indexed” parameter (refer to "Index", special setting, index = 255). This setting to variable word-length is made during start-up. (refer to parameter P2013). Parameter ID (PKE) 1st word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.: AK SP M PNU1 Parameter index (IND) 2nd word 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.: PNU2 RES TXT Index Parameter value (PWE) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit No.: Parameter value, high (PWE1) 3rd word Parameter value, low (PWE2) 4th word The following applies: AK Task or reply ID SPM Toggle bit for processing of parameter-change reports (MICROMASTER does not support this, SPM = 0) PNU Parameter number RES Reserved TXT Read / write from parameter text (MICROMASTER does not support this, TXT = 0) CAUTION Do not use a variable word length if SIMATIC S5 or SIMATIC S7 is the master. This setting must be made both at the master as well as at the slave – and cannot be changed while the bus is operational. NOTE The PKW area is transferred in increasing order, always starting with the 1st word. Reserved fields or functions that are not supported should be specifically pre- assigned zero in the master implementation. The bit 11 (SPM) is the toggle bit for parameter change reports. Parameter change reports when reading/writing parameter texts are not supported by MICROMASTER.
  • 112. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 112 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Task or reply ID (AK): Bits 12 to 15 (AK) contain the task or reply ID. The task IDs are sent in the telegram from the master to the slave. The meaning of the IDs is listed in the following table. Table 3-18 Task IDs (master -> drive converter) Reply ID Task ID Meaning positive negative 0 No task 0 - 1 Request parameter value 1 or 2 7 2 Change parameter value (word) and save only in RAM 1 7 or 8 3 Change parameter value (double word) and save only in RAM 2 7 or 8 4 Request descriptive element 1 3 7 5 Changing the descriptive element 1 MICROMASTER does not support this 3 7 or 8 6 Request parameter value (array) 1 4 or 5 7 7 Change parameter value (array, word) 2 and save only in RAM 4 7 or 8 8 Change parameter value (array, double word) 2 and save only in RAM 5 7 or 8 9 Request the number of array elements 6 7 10 Reserved - - 11 Change parameter value (array, double word) and save in RAM and EEPROM 2 5 7 or 8 12 Change parameter value (array, word) and save in RAM and EEPROM 2 4 7 or 8 13 Change parameter value (double word) and save in RAM and EEPROM 2 7 or 8 14 Change parameter value (word) and save in RAM and EEPROM 1 7 or 8 15 Read or change text MICROMASTER does not support this 15 7 or 8 1 The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word) 2 The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
  • 113. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 113 Correspondingly, the Response IDs are transferred in the telegram from the slave to the master at this position. Depending on the request ID, only specific response IDs are possible. Table 3-19 Response ID (converter -> master) Response ID Significance Request ID 0 No response 0 1 Transfer parameter value (word) 1, 2 or 14 2 Transfer parameter value (double word) 1, 3 or 13 3 Transfer descriptive element 1 4 or 5 4 Transfer parameter value (array, word) 2 6, 7 or 12 5 Transfer parameter value (array, double word) 2 6, 8 or 11 6 Transfer the number of array elements 9 7 Request cannot be executed (with fault number) 1 or 15 8 The PKW interface does not have master authority 2, 3, 5, 7, 8, 11- 14 or 15 9 Parameter change report (word) MICROMASTER does not support this - 10 Parameter change report (double word) MICROMASTER does not support this - 11 Parameter change report (array, word) 2 MICROMASTER does not support this - 12 Parameter change report (array, double word) 2 MICROMASTER does not support this - 13 Reserved - 14 Reserved - 15 Transfer text MICROMASTER does not support this 15 1 The required element of the parameter description is specified in IND (2nd word) 2 The required element of the indexed parameter is specified in IND (2nd word)
  • 114. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 114 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 If the response ID has the value 7 (request cannot be executed), then a fault number is saved in parameter value 2 (PWE2). The fault numbers are documented in the following table. Table 3-20 Fault numbers for the response ID "Request cannot be executed" Fault No. Significance 0 Inadmissible legal parameter number (PNU); if PNU is not available 1 Parameter value cannot be changed; if the parameter is a visualization parameter 2 Lower or upper limit exceeded 3 Erroneous sub-index 4 No array 5 Incorrect type of data 6 Setting not permitted (can only be reset) 7 Descriptive element cannot be changed; not possible 11 No operator control rights 12 Key word missing, device parameter: ‘access keyl’ and/or ‘special parameter access’ not appropriately set 15 No text array available 17 Request cannot be executed due to operating states; The frequency inverter state presently does not allow the request that was issued 101 Parameter number presently de-activated; In the present frequency inverter state, the parameter has no function (e.g. closed-loop control type) 102 Channel width too small: Only for short channels; the parameterized length of the PKW area has been selected too large due to the restrictions in the device. This fault message can only occur for the USS protocol on the technology module T 100 if basic device parameters are accessed from this interface 103 Incorrect PKW number; only for G-SST 1/2 and SCB interface (USS). The fault number is transferred in the following two cases: If the request involves all indices of an indexed parameter (request index equal to 255) or the complete parameter description is requested and a variable telegram length was not parameterized. If, for the request issue, the parameterized number of PKW data in the telegram is too low (e.g.: Changing from a double word and PKW number equal to 3 (words). 104 Parameter value not permissible; This fault number is transferred if the parameter value – that is to be transferred – is not assigned any function in the device or at the time of the change it is not able to be transferred for internal reasons (although it lies within the limits). 105 The parameter is indexed e.g. request: ‘PWE, change word’ for indexed parameters 106 Request not implemented 200 New minimum value 201 New maximum value 203 No BOP/AOP display, Parameter cannot be displayed on the BOP or AOP. 204 The ‘BOP/AOP key word’ does not match the parameter access stage.
  • 115. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 115 Parameter number (PNU) The complete parameter number (refer to the parameter list) is formed from the "basis parameter number” PNU1 and the "page parameter number” PNU2. The following applies: PNU = PNU1 + 2000 • PNU2 With PNU2 definition: PNU2 2nd word 15 14 13 12 Bit No.: 2 0 2 3 2 2 2 1 Weighting The parameter areas are mapped using PNU1 and PNU2 as follows: Basis parameter number PNU1 bits 0 – 10 (PKE) Page parameter number PNU2 bits 12 – 15 (IND) Parameter number (area) 0 ... 1999 0 0 ... 1999 0 ... 1999 1 2000 ... 3999 0 ... 1999 2 4000 ... 5999 0 ... 1999 3 6000 ... 7999 0 ... 1999 4 8000 ... 9999 ... ... ... 0 ... 1999 15 30000 ... 31999 Index The index (bit 0 to 7), depending on the task, describes a definite element: desired array element in the case of indexed parameters, desired element of the parameter description, Special significance of index value 255 For the following requests, the index value 255 has a special significance: "request parameter descriptive element", or. for the requests to read/write indexed parameters (= arrays) Here, the following applies: Task ID Meaning 4 The complete parameter description is requested 6 All values of the indexed parameters are requested This request can generate fault message 102. 7, 8, 11 or 12 All values of the indexed parameters should be changed. These requests can generate fault message 102.
  • 116. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 116 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Parameter value (PWE) The parameter value (PWE) is transferred, depending on the parameterization of the word length (refer to parameter "USS-PKW length" P2013) of the PKW area as word or double word (32 bit). Only one parameter value can be transferred in a telegram. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with 3 words (P2013 = 3), then only 16-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements, that are greater than 16 bit cannot be transferred. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized to be 4 words (P2013 = 4), then 16 and 32-bit parameters can be transferred. Parameter descriptive elements that exceed 32 bits cannot be transferred. If the word length of the PKW area is parameterized with "variable length" (P2013 = 127), then 16, 32-bit parameter and parameter descriptive elements can be transferred. Further, all elements of an indexed parameter can be read or changed with a single request, as well as the complete parameter description requested if the index corresponds to the value 255 (index = 255). Transferring one 16-bit parameter value: 1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words: The value is in PWE1 2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words: The value is in PWE2 (least significant word, 4th word); PWE1 is set to 0. 3. Variable PKW area: The value is in PWE1. PWE2 and higher not available! Transferring one 32-bit parameter value: 1. Fixed PKW area, 3 words: Request is rejected with fault message 103. 2. Fixed PKW area, 4 words: PWE1 (most significant word; 3rd word) contains the high word of the double word, PWE2 (least significant word; 4th word) contains the low word of the double word. 3. Variable PKW area: As for 2.; PWE3 and higher not available! Process data area (PZD) Process data is continually exchanged between the master and slaves in this area. At the start of communications it is configured as to which process data is to be exchanged with a slave. For instance, for slave x, the current setpoint is to be transferred in the second PZD (= PZD2). This setting remains for the complete data transfer. 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word 1 word PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8 PZD1 – PZD8 = process data = control / status word(s) and setpoint / actual value(s)); The control / status word(s), setpoints and actual values required for the automation are transferred in this area. The length of the PZD area is defined by the number of PZD elements (P2012). Contrary to the PKW area, that can be variable, the length of this area between the
  • 117. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 117 communication partners (master and slave) must always be permanently declared. The maximum number of PZD words per telegram is, for MICROMASTER, limited to 8 words (USS-PZD length in MICROMASTER is set using parameter P2012). If only PKW data are to be transferred in the net data block, then the number of the PZD can also be 0! Depending on the data transfer direction, always control word 1 or status word 1 are to be transferred in the PZD1. Depending on the data transfer direction, the main setpoint or the main actual value is always transferred in PZD 2. Additional setpoints or actual values are set in the following process data PZD3 to PZDn. For MICROMASTER, if required, control word 2 or status word 2 should be transferred in PZD4. Request telegram, master ⇒ slave PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8 Control word 1 Setpoint 1 Control word 2 Setpoint 2 . . . . . Setpoint 6 Response telegram, slave ⇒ master PZD1 PZD2 PZD3 PZD4 . . . . . PZD8 Status word 1 Main actual value 1 Actual value 2 status word 2 Actual value 3 . . . . . Actual value 7 NOTE A maximum of 8 PZD words A minimum of 0 PZD words - i.e. no PZD area in the net data area On the USS bus, PZD n is always transferred before PZD n+1. For MICROMASTER, double words cannot be transferred in the PZD section. Data received from MICROMASTER is always interpreted as 16-bit words. The appropriate de-normalization is implemented by assigning the appropriate parameters. If MICROMASTER sends data to the master via the PZD area, then for physical quantities, a normalization is made to a 16-bit value (4000 hex notation). The setpoint can be freely assigned to the actual value; This means for example that the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request telegram in PZD2 so the actual frequency value can be signaled back in PZD2 in the response telegram (this also makes sense from a technological/process perspective); or however, also another actual value – such as the actual torque value, actual voltage actual value or actual current value. The setpoint can be freely assigned to the actual value; for example the frequency setpoint is transferred in the request telegram in PZD2, which means that the actual frequency value can be signaled back in the response telegram in PZD2 (this also makes sense from a technological/process perspective) – or also another actual value – such as actual torque value, actual voltage value or actual current value.
  • 118. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 118 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.7.1.3 USS bus configuration via COM link (RS485) In order to ensure disturbance-free USS operation, the bus cable must be terminated at both ends using bus terminating resistors. In this case, the bus cable from the first node up to the last node should be considered as one bus cable – so that the USS bus should be terminated twice. For the first bus node [device] (e.g. master) and last bus node [device] (e.g. drive converter), th bus terminating resistor must be switched-in. NOTE ♦ When supplied, the bus terminating resistors are not switched-in! ♦ Please note that you only switch-in the bus terminating at the first bus node [device] and last bus note! The bus terminating resistors should be always set when the system is powered-down! ♦ Data transfer errors on the bus are possible! In active bus operation, nodes where the terminating resistor is switched-in, must always be powered-up. The terminating resistor draws the voltage from the connected device. This is the reason that the terminating resistor is no longer effective when the node is powered down . The following diagram shows the structure of a bus connection through terminals 14, 15: Screening Screening Screening Potential equilization cable RS485terminator RS485terminator Master 0 V (M) • a terminating resistor must be connected at the first and last node on the bus cable • no bus termination for other nodes Fig. 3-40 Connecting the USS bus cable
  • 119. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 119 When the MICROMASTER is used in an RS485 bus communications network the following is required: 1. A power supply 2. A terminating resistor between P+ and N- at both bus ends (refer to Fig. 3-41) Control terminals RS485 terminator 14 P+ 15 N- 1 +10 V 2 0 V to terminal 2 of the next slave Fig. 3-41 Connecting the RS485 terminator If the frequency inverter is the last slave on the bus (refer to Fig. 3-40), then the P+ and N- of the RS485 terminator provided must be connected there to the RS485 terminals (refer to Fig. 3-41). P10 and 0 V can be connected to terminals 1 and 2 for the power supply. If the first or last node is not a MICROMASTER 4 the bus should be terminated between P+ and N- with a resistor (with a value between 120 Ω and 220 Ω ). The bus must be biassed (pull-up resistor from P+ to P5 or P10, pull-down from N- to 0 V) at one or both ends. If the first and/or the last node is not a MICROMASTER 4 (e.g. a S7-200 series PLC), the bus can be biassed by connecting a 390 Ω resistor from P+ to P5 and a 390 Ω pull-down resistor from N- to 0 V. SIMATIC PROFIBUS connectors, e.g. 6ES7972-0BA41-0XA0, can be used for biassing and termination when the first or last node is an S7-200 series PLC.
  • 120. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 120 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 NOTE When making the installation it must be ensured that EMC disturbances/noise cannot result in communication failures/errors or damage to the RS485 drivers. As a minimum, the following measures must be taken: 1) Shield the motor cable and correctly ground the shield at both ends. If at all possible, avoid interruptions in the cables. If this cannot be avoided, then it must be ensured that the shield continues in an EMC-correct fashion at the connecting locations. 2) All node points must be well grounded (EMC ground). 3) All relay coils must be provided with noise suppression elements. 4) The cables should be routed - as far as possible - separately from other cables. For RS485 cables it is especially important that they are kept well away from motor cables. 5) The shields of RS485 cables must be correctly grounded. If the AOP communicates via the USS protocol, then contrary to the BOP, the appropriate USS parameters (Table 3-12 and Table 3-13) should be set. For error-free communications, the appropriate communication parameters must be harmonized with one another and correctly set - in the frequency inverter, the connected device and/or in the connected option board. Please refer to the corresponding Operating Instructions for the AOP and for the communications modules. While RS485 communications is operational the power supply must always be available using pull-up/pull-down resistors.
  • 121. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 121 3.8 Fixed frequencies (FF) Number: 8 Parameter range: P1001 – r1024 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP3200, FP3310 A setpoint can be entered via the analog input, the serial communication interfaces, the JOG function, the motorized potentiometer as well as also using fixed frequencies. The fixed frequencies are defined using parameters P1001 – P1007 and selected via binector inputs P1020 – P1022. The effective fixed frequency setpoint is available via connector output r1024 which means that it can be connected further. If this is to be used as setpoint source, then either parameter P1000 or P0719 should be modified or BICO parameter r1024 should be connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075. Contrary to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly changes BICO parameters P1070, P1075. Example: Fixed frequencies as setpoint source a) Standard method → P1000 = 3 b) BICO method → P1070 = 1024, P1075 = 0 3 methods are available when selecting the fixed frequencies. Direct selection In this particular mode, the control signal directly selects the fixed frequency. This control signal is entered via the binector inputs. If several fixed frequencies are simultaneously active, then the selected frequencies are added. Table 3-21 Example for direct coding via digital inputs FF1 P1001 0 0 1 FF2 P1002 0 1 0 FF3 P1003 1 0 0 FF1+FF2 0 1 1 … … FF1+FF2+FF3 1 1 1 DIN3 DIN2 DIN1 FF0 0 Hz 0 0 0
  • 122. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 122 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 The fixed frequencies can be selected via the digital inputs as well as also via serial communication interfaces. The fixed frequency is selected, when using digital inputs, using 2 techniques. This will be shown in the following example using the fixed frequency P1001 and digital input 1 (refer to Fig. 3-42). a) Standard methods → P0701 = 15 b) BICO methods → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1 P1016 P0701 = 15 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 1 DIN1 r1024 r0722.0 P1020 1 2,3 P1001 0 0 P0702 = 15 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 1 P1017 DIN2 r0722.1 P1021 1 2,3 P1002 0 0 .... + ... + Fig. 3-42 Example for directly selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 Direct selection + ON command When this fixed frequency is selected, the fixed frequencies are also directly selected whereby the selection is combined with the ON command. When this technique is used, a separate ON command is not required. The following is obtained essentially analog to the example shown above: a) Standard method → P0701 = 16 b) BICO method → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 2
  • 123. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 123 Binary-coded selection + ON command Using this technique up to 8 fixed frequencies can be selected using 3 control signals. These control signals are either entered via digital inputs or a serial communications interface. The fixed frequencies are indirectly selected using the binary coding (refer to Table 3-22, → e.g. selected using the digital DIN inputs), whereby the selection is combined with the ON command. Table 3-22 Example for binary coding via digital inputs DIN3 DIN2 DIN1 0 Hz FF0 0 0 0 P1001 FF1 0 0 1 P1002 FF2 0 1 0 … … … … … … … … … … P1006 FF6 1 1 0 P1007 FF7 1 1 1 Contrary to "Direct selection + ON command", the ON command is only active if the setting for the first 3 binary inputs is set to "Binary-coded selection + ON command" or P0701 = P0702 = P0703 = 17. The following is obtained analog to the above example: a) Standard method → P0701 = 17 b) BICO method → P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3 P1016 P0701 = 17 or P0701 = 99, P1020 = 722.0, P1016 = 3 DIN1 r0722.0 P1020 1 2,30 P0702 = 17 or P0702 = 99, P1021 = 722.1, P1017 = 3 P1017 DIN2 r0722.1 P1021 1 2,30 .... 0 0 1 1 1 1 Fixed frequency 7 -650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P1007.D (30.00) r1024 CO: Act. FF Fixed frequency 1 -650.00 ... 650.00 [Hz] P1001.D (0.00) . . . . . . ... Fig. 3-43 Example for selecting FF1 via DIN1 and FF2 via DIN2 using the binary-coded method
  • 124. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 124 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.9 Motorized potentiometer (MOP) Parameter range: P1031 – r1050 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP3100 This function emulates an electromechanical potentiometer to enter setpoints. The motorized potentiometer value is adjusted using the "Raise" and "Lower control signal" which is selected using BICO parameters P1035 and P1036 (refer to Fig. 3-44). The value which has been set is available through connector output r1050 so that it can be further connected and used. Fig. 3-44 Motorized potentiometer Selecting via serial interfaces The MOP functionality can be selected via the operator panels (refer to Section 3.1.3), digital inputs as well as via serial interfaces (refer to the example). Parameterization is also possible directly using BICO parameters P1035 and P1036 as well as also parameters P0700 and P0719. In this case, for a value assigned to P0700, the BICO parameter is appropriately modified. Example: Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface a) Standard method → P0700 = 4 b) BICO method → P1035 = 2032.13 P1036 = 2032.14 :::: (refer to P0700 for a complete list)
  • 125. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 125 If the motorized potentiometer is to be used as setpoint source, then either parameter P1000 or P0719 should be modified or the BICO parameter r1050 should be connected to the main setpoint P1070 or supplementary setpoint P1075. Contrary to parameter P0719, when parameter P1000 is modified, this implicitly changes BICO parameters P1070, P1075. Example: Setpoint via the motorized potentiometer (MOP) a) Standard method → P1000 = 1 b) BICO method → P1070 = 1050 P1075 = 0 The MOP is configured using the following parameters and has the mode of operation as shown in Table 3-23: Limits using the minimum frequency P1080 or maximum frequency P1082 Ramp-up/ramp-down time P1120 or P1121 Inhibits MOP reversing function P1032 Saves the MOP setpoint P1031 MOP setpoint P1040 Table 3-23 Mode of operation of the MOP Motorized potentiometer Lower Raise Function 0 0 Setpoint is frozen 0 1 Raise setpoint 1 0 Lower setpoint 1 1 Setpoint is frozen Selecting via BOP or AOP The following settings / operator actions should be made when selecting the motorized potentiometer using the BOP or AOP: Table 3-24 Selecting the motorized potentiometer Parameters / keys BOP AOP (at the BOP link) Command source P0700 1 4 P1000 1 P1035 - 2032.13 (2032.D) P1036 - 2032.14 (2032.E) Raise MOP output frequency Setpoint source Lower MOP output frequency
  • 126. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 126 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.10 JOG Parameter range: P1055 – P1061 Warnings A0923 Faults - Function chart number: FP5000 The JOG function is used as follows: To check the functionality of the motor and drive inverter after commissioning has been completed (the first traversing motion, checking the direction of rotation, etc.) Positioning a drive / a driven load into a specific position Traversing a drive, e.g. after a program has been interrupted The drive is traversed using this function by entering fixed frequencies P1058, P1059. The JOG mode can be selected either using the operator panel (refer to Section 3.1.3), digital inputs or also via the serial interfaces (refer to the example). An ON/OFF command is not used to move the drive, but when the "JOG keys" are pressed. These "JOG keys" are selected using the BICO parameters P1055 and P1056. JOG right f P1058 P1059 A0923 A0923 P1060 P1060 (0) P1055 (0) P1056 "1" "0" "1" "0" t t t P1061 DIN BOP USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link JOG left P1082 -P1082 P1061 Fig. 3-45 JOG counter-clockwise and JOG clockwise
  • 127. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 127 If both JOG keys are simultaneously pressed, then the instantaneous frequency is kept (constant velocity phase) and alarm A0923 is output. When a key is pressed, the drive inverter accelerates the motor to the fixed frequency in the time entered in P1060. This frequency is only exited after the key has been cancelled and the drive then brakes down to 0 Hz in the time entered in P1061. In addition to the explicit parameterization (P1055 and P1056), the JOG functionality is also enabled via parameter P0700 or P0719 (implicit parameterization). In this case, if a value is assigned to P0700, the BICO parameter is appropriately modified. Example: Command source via "USS on BOP link" interface a) Standard method → P0700 = 4 b) BICO method → P1055 = 2032.8 P1056 = 2032.9 :::: (refer to P0700 for a complete list)
  • 128. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 128 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.11 PID controller (technological controller) Parameter range: P2200 P2201 – r2294 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310, FP3400, FP5100 Features: - cycle time: 8 ms MICROMASTER has an integrated technological controller (PID controller, enabled via P2200). This can be used to process basic higher-level control functions. These typically include: Pressure control for extruders Water level control for pump drives Temperature control for fan drives And similar control tasks The technological setpoints and actual values can be entered via the PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP), PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF), analog input (ADC) or via serial interfaces (USS on BOP link, USS on COM link, CB on COM link) (refer to the example). The appropriate parameterization of the BICO parameter defines which setpoints or actual values are to be used (refer to Fig. 3-46). PID MOP ADC PID SUM PID PID FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link P2254 P2253 PID RFG PID PT1 − ∆PID P2200 P2264 PID PT1 PID SCL OutputPID 0 1 Motor control P2257 P2258 P2261 P2271 P2269 P2270 P2265 P2280 P2285 Fig. 3-46 Structure of the technological controller (PID controller) NOTICE Changes in parameter P2200 take effect only after a fresh ON command.
  • 129. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 129 Example: The permanent PID controller should fulfill the following secondary conditions/limitations: PID controller enable and PID setpoint input via PID fixed frequencies and PID actual value via the analog input. Parameterizations: a. Permanent PID controller enable: P2200 = 1.0 b. Setpoint input via PID-FF: P2253 = 2224 c. Actual value input via analog input ADC: P2264 = 755 The supplementary (additional) setpoint is added to the main setpoint (PID-SUM) and the sum is fed to the setpoint filter (PID-PT1) at the setpoint-actual value summation point via the PID ramp-function generator (PID-RFG). The source of the supplementary setpoint (BICO parameter P2254), the ramp-up / ramp-down times of the PID ramp-function generator (P2257, P2258) as well as also the filter time (P2261) can be adapted to the particular application by appropriately parameterizing the corresponding parameters. Similar to the PID setpoint branch, the actual value branch of the technological controller has a filter (PID-PT1) which can be set using parameter P2265. In addition to the smoothing, the actual value can be modified using a scaling unit (PID-SCL). The technological controller can be parameterized as either P, I or PI controller using parameters P2280 and P2285. Kp Tn + - P2285P2280 r2273r2262 PID feedback Motor control x y P2291 P2293 P2293 P2292 r2294 PID setpoint r2272x y P2267 P2268 Fig. 3-47 PID controller For specific applications, the PID output quantity can be limited to defined values. This can be achieved using the fixed limits - P2291 and P2292. In order to prevent the PID controller output exercising large steps at power-on, these PID output limits are ramped-up with ramp time P2293 from 0 to the corresponding value P2291 (upper limit for the PID output) and P2292 (lower limit for the PID output). As soon as these limits have been reached, the dynamic response of the PID controller is no longer limited by this ramp-up/ramp-down time (P2293).
  • 130. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 130 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.11.1 PID motorized potentiometer (PID-MOP) Parameter range: P2231 – r2250 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP3400 The PID controller has a PID motorized potentiometer which can be separately adjusted. The functionality is identical with the motorized potentiometer (refer to Section 3.9), whereby the PID parameters are emulated in the range from P2231 – r2250 (refer to the comparison → Table 3-25). Table 3-25 Correspondence between the parameters PID motorized potentiometer Motorized potentiometer P2231[3] Setpoint memory of PID-MOP P1031[3] Setpoint memory of the MOP P2232 Inhibit rev. direct. of PID-MOP P1032 Inhibit reverse direction of MOP P2235[3] BI: Enable PID-MOP (UP-cmd) P1035[3] BI: Enable MOP (UP-command) P2236[3] BI: Enable PID-MOP (DOWN-cmd) P1036[3] BI: Enable MOP (DOWN-command) P2240[3] Setpoint of PID-MOP P1040[3] Setpoint of the MOP r2250 CO: Output setpoint of PID-MOP r1050 CO: Act. output freq. of the MOP
  • 131. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 131 3.11.2 PID fixed setpoint (PID-FF) Number: 7 Parameter range: P2201 – r2224 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP3300, FP3310 Analog to the fixed frequencies (refer to Section 3.8), the PID controller has separate programmable PID fixed setpoints. The values are defined using parameters P2201 – P2207 and are selected using binector inputs P2220 – P2222. The selected PID fixed setpoint is available via connector output r2224 where it can be further processed (e.g. as PID main setpoint → P2253 = 2224). 3 methods are available to select the PID fixed setpoints, analog to the fixed frequencies (Section 3.8): Direct selection Direct selection + ON command Binary-coded selection + ON command The methods are selected using parameters P2216 – P2218. P2216 P0701 = 15 or P0701 = 99, P2220 = 722.0, P2216 = 1 DIN1 r2224 r0722.0 P2220 1 2,3 P2201 0 . . . . 0 .... . . . . Fig. 3-48 Example to directly select the PID fixed frequency of fixed frequency 1 via DIN1
  • 132. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 132 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.12 Setpoint channel The setpoint channel (refer to Fig. 3-49) forms the coupling element between the setpoint source and the motor control. MICROMASTER has a special characteristic which allows the setpoint to be entered simultaneously from two setpoint sources. The generation and subsequent modification (influencing the direction, suppression frequency, up/down ramp) of the complete setpoint is carried-out in the setpoint channel. MOP ADC FF USS BOP link USS COM link CB COM link Setpoint source Main setpoint Additonal setpoint SUM AFM Limit RFG Setpoint channel Motor control Motor control Fig. 3-49 Setpoint channel 3.12.1 Summation and modification of the frequency setpoint (AFM) Parameter range: P1070 – r1114 Warnings - Fault - Function chart number: FP5000, FP5200 For applications where the control quantities are generated from central control systems, fine tuning is often required locally on-site (correction quantity). For MICROMASTER, this can be very elegantly realized using the summation point where the main and supplementary (additional) setpoint are added in the setpoint channel. In this case, both quantities are simultaneously read-in via two separate or one setpoint source and summed in the setpoint channel. Depending on external circumstances, the supplementary setpoint can be dynamically disconnected or switched-in to the summation point (refer to Fig. 3-50). This functionality can be used to advantage, especially for discontinuous processes.
  • 133. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 133 AFM Limit RFG r1078 0 1 CI: Add. setp.scal (1:0) P1076.C CI: Add. setpoint (0:0) P1075.C (0:0) BI: Disab.add.setp P1074.C CI: Main setp scal (1:0) P1071.C CI: Main setpoint (755:0) P1070.C + + Motor control Fig. 3-50 Summation MICROMASTER has the following possibilities to select the setpoint source: 1. P1000 – selecting the frequency setpoint source 2. P0719 – selecting the command / setpoint source 3. BICO parameterization - P1070 CI: Main setpoint - P1075 CI: Additional setpoint Further, the main setpoint as well as the supplementary (additional) setpoint can be scaled independently of one another. In this case, for example, a user can simply implement an override function using the appropriate parameterization. A scan sequence is generally associated with a forwards and a backwards motion. When selecting the reversing functionality, after reaching the end position, a direction of rotation reversal can be initiated in the setpoint channel (refer to Fig. 3-51). On the other hand, if it is to be prevented that a direction of rotation reversal or a negative frequency setpoint is to be entered via the setpoint channel, then this can be inhibited using BICO parameter P1110. SUM -1 0 1 0 1 P1113r1078 P1110 P1091 P1094 P1101 ... Skip Limit P1080 P1082 RFG Fig. 3-51 Modifying the frequency setpoint Driven machines can have one or several resonance points in the range from 0 Hz up to the reference frequency. These resonance points result in oscillations which, under worst case conditions, can damage the driven load. Using suppression frequencies, MICROMASTER allows these resonant frequencies to be passed through as quickly as possible. This means that the suppression frequencies increase the availability of the driven load over the long term.
  • 134. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 134 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.12.2 Ramp-function generator (RFG) Parameter range: P1120, P1121 r1119, r1170 P1130 – P1142 Function chart number: FP5000, FP5300 The ramp-function generator is used to limit the acceleration when the setpoint changes according to a step function. This therefore helps to reduce the stressing on the mechanical system of the machine. An acceleration ramp and a braking ramp can be set independently of one another using the ramp-up time P1120 and the ramp-down time P1121. This allows a controlled transition when the setpoint is changed (refer to Fig. 3-52). Withoutrounding t f fmax P1120 P1121 f2 f1 f fmax P1133P1132P1131P1130 t f2 f1 tup tdown Withrounding for P1131)P1130( 2 1 P1120 P1082 f-f 12 +≥⋅ P1120 P1082 f-fP1131)P1130( 2 1 t 12 up ⋅++= for P1133)P1132( 2 1 P1121 P1082 f-f 12 +≥⋅ P1121 P1082 f-f P1133)P1132( 2 1 t 12 down ⋅++= Where the rounding times are increased to be greater than the ramp period then the ramp period is determined by the following equations: ( ) ( ) ( ) ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅ ⋅⋅−⋅ = 1130P 1131P 1 1131P1130Pf 1130P1120Pff2 t max 2 12 up ( ) ( ) ( ) ⎟⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅ ⎟ ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ +⋅ ⋅⋅−⋅ = 1132P 1133P 1 1133P1132Pf 1132P1120Pff2 t max 2 12 down Fig. 3-52 Ramp-function generator
  • 135. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 135 In order to avoid torque surges at the transitions (constant velocity phase ←→ accelerating / braking phase), additional rounding-off times P1130 – P1133 can be programmed. This is especially important for applications (e.g. transporting/pumping liquids or for cranes) which require an especially "soft", jerk- free acceleration and braking. If the OFF1 command is initiated while the drive is accelerating, then rounding-off can be activated or de-activated using parameter P1134 (refer to Fig. 3-53). These rounding-off times are defined using parameters P1132 and P1133. f OFF1 ON t Setpoint reached fSet t f P1132 > 0 P1133 > 0 P1132 Setpoint reached Setpoint not reached fSet t Setpoint not reached P1134 = 0 P1134 = 1 P1133 P1133P1132 P1132 P1133 P1133 Fig. 3-53 Rounding off after an OFF1 command In addition to the rounding-off times, the ramp-function generator can be influenced using external signals. The ramp-function generator provides the following functionality using BICO parameters P1140, P1141 and P1142.
  • 136. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 136 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-26 BICO parameters for ramp-function generator Parameter Description P1140 BI: RFG enable The ramp-function generator output is set to 0 if the binary signal = 0. P1141 BI: RFG start The ramp-function generator output keeps its actual value if the binary signal = 0. P1142 BI: RFG enable setpoint If the binary signal = 0, then the ramp-function generator input is set to 0 and the output is reduced to 0 via the ramp-function generator ramp. The ramp-function generator itself is enabled after the pulses have been enabled (inverter enable) and after the excitation time has expired (P0346). After limiting to the maximum speeds for the positive and negative directions of rotation (P1082, -P1082 or 0 Hz for the direction of rotation inhibit) the setpoint speed for the control is obtained (r1170). NOTE The maximum drive inverter frequency is defined in the setpoint channel using parameter P1080. The maximum possible frequency is 650 Hz.
  • 137. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 137 3.12.3 OFF/braking functions Parameter range: P1121, P1135, P2167, P2168 P0840 – P0849 r0052 bit 02 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - The drive inverter and the user must respond to an extremely wide range of situations and stop the drive. In this case, both requirements relating to operations as well as drive inverter protective functions (e.g. electrical and thermal overload) and man-machine protective functions have to be taken into account. As a result of the different OFF/braking functions (OFF1, OFF2, OFF3) MICROMASTER can flexibly respond to the requirements mentioned above. OFF1 The OFF1 command is closely coupled to the ON command. When the ON command is withdrawn, then OFF1 is directly activated. The drive is braked by OFF1 with the ramp-down time P1121. If the output frequency falls below the parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled. t P2168 t P2167 Operation actf OFF1 P1082 fmax r0052 Bit02 P1121 P1082 f P1121t 2 1OFF,down ⋅= tdown,OFF1 Pulse cancellation Fig. 3-54 OFF1 NOTE OFF1 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameter P0840 (BI: ON/OFF1) and P0842 (BI: ON/OFF1 with reversing). BICO parameter P0840 is pre-assigned by defining the command source using P0700. The ON and the following OFF1 command must have the same source. If the ON/OFF1 command is set for more than one digital input, then only the digital input that was last set, is valid, e.g. DIN3 is active. OFF1 can be combined with DC current braking or compound braking. When the motor holding brake MHB (P1215) is activated, for an OFF1, P2167 and P2168 are not taken into account.
  • 138. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 138 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 OFF2 The inverter pulses are immediately cancelled by the OFF2 command. This means that the motor coasts-down and it is not possible to brake in a controlled fashion. t t Pulse cancellation Operation actf OFF2 P1082 fmax r0052 Bit02 Fig. 3-55 OFF2 NOTE The OFF2 command can have one or several sources. The command sources are defined using BICO parameters P0844 (BI: 1. OFF2) and P0845 (BI: 2. OFF2). As a result of the pre-assignment (default setting), the OFF2 command is set to the BOP. This source is still available even if another command source is defined (e.g. terminal as command source → P0700 = 2 and OFF2 is selected using DIN2 → P0702 = 3). OFF3 The braking characteristics of OFF3 are identical with those of OFF1 with the exception of the autonomous OFF3 ramp-down time P1135. If the output frequency falls below parameter value P2167 and if the time in P2168 has expired, then the inverter pulses are cancelled as for the OFF1 command. t P2168 t P2167 Operation actf OFF3 P1082 fmax r0052 Bit02 P1135 P1082 f P1135t 2 3OFF,down ⋅= tdown,OFF3 Pulse cancellation Fig. 3-56 OFF3 NOTE OFF3 can be entered using a wide range of command sources via BICO parameters P0848 (BI: 1. OFF3) and P0849 (BI: 2. OFF3).
  • 139. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 139 3.12.4 Manual / automatic operation Parameter range: P0719, P0810 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - It is necessary to change-over from the automatic mode into the manual mode to load and unload production machines and to feed new materials (e.g. batch processing). The machine operator carries-out the preparatory activities for subsequent automatic operation in the manual mode. In the manual mode, the machine operator locally controls the machine (enters the ON/OFF command as well as also the setpoint). A changeover is only made into the automatic mode after the set-up has been completed. In the automatic mode, the control (open-loop) of the machines and production processes are handled by a higher-level control system (e.g. PLC). This operation is maintained until it is necessary to again load and unload the machine or feed new material into the machine or production process. For MICROMASTER 420, indexed parameter P0719 and BICO parameter P0810 are used to change over between the manual and automatic mode. The command and setpoint sources are defined using P0719 (refer to Table 3-28), whereby P0719 index 0 (P0719[0]) defines the automatic mode and P0719 index 1 (P0719[1]) the manual mode. BICO parameter P0810 is used to change-over between the automatic and manual modes. P0810 can be controlled from any control sources (refer to Table 3-27). BOP BOP Setpoint channel Motor control Sequence control MOP ADC FF 0 1 P0700 Terminals P1000 USS CB CommandsourceSetpointsource P0719[0] = 00 P0719[1] = 11 Cmd Remote Cmd Local 0 1 P0719[0] = 00 P0719[1] = 11 Setpoint Remote Setpoint Local P0810P0810 Fig. 3-57 Changing-over using the BICO parameter P0810 Table 3-27 Examples for the parameter settings of P0810 Parameter setting Command source P0810 = 722.2 requires P0703 = 99 Digital input 3 P0810 = 2032.15 USS at the BOP link P0810 = 2036.15 USS at the COM link P0810 = 2090.15 CB at the COM link
  • 140. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 140 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 3-28 Possible parameter settings for P0719 Value Command source Setpoint source 0 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = BICO parameter 1 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = MOP setpoint 2 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Analog setpoint 3 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = Fixed frequency 4 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on BOP link 5 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = USS on COM link 6 Cmd = BICO parameter Setpoint = CB on COM link 10 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = BICO parameter 11 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = MOP setpoint 12 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Analog setpoint 13 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = Fixed frequency 15 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on BOP link 16 Cmd = BOP Setpoint = USS on COM link 40 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = BICO parameter 41 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = MOP setpoint 42 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Analog setpoint 43 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = Fixed frequency. 44 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on BOP link 45 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = USS on COM link 46 Cmd = USS on BOP link Setpoint = CB on COM link 50 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter 51 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint 52 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint 53 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency 54 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link 55 Cmd = USS on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link 60 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = BICO parameter 61 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = MOP setpoint 62 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Analog setpoint 63 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = Fixed frequency 64 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on BOP link 66 Cmd = CB on COM link Setpoint = USS on COM link
  • 141. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 141 3.13 Motor holding brake (MHB) Parameter range: P1215 P0346, P1216, P1217, P1080 r0052 bit 12 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - For drives which must be secured when powered-down to prevent them undesirably moving, the MICROMASTER brake sequence control (enabled via P1215) can be used to control the motor holding brake. Before opening the brake, the pulse inhibit must be removed and a current impressed which keeps the drive in that particular position. In this case, the impressed current is defined by the min. frequency P1080. A typical value in this case is the rated motor slip r0330. In order to protect the motor holding brake from continuous damage, the motor may only continue to move after the brake has been released (brake release times lie between 35 ms and 500 ms). This delay must be taken into account in parameter P1216 "Holding brake release delay" (refer to Fig. 3-58). Fig. 3-58 Motor holding brake after ON / OFF1
  • 142. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 142 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 The motor holding brake is either closed using OFF1 / OFF3 or OFF2. For OFF1 / OFF3, when the minimum frequency P1080 is reached, the motor is operated at this frequency until the brake has been applied (closing times of brakes lie between 15 ms and 300 ms). The actual time is specified using parameter P1217 "Holding time after ramp down" (refer to Fig. 3-58). If, on the other hand, an OFF2 command has been output, then independent of the drive state, the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" is reset. This means that the brake immediately closes after OFF2 (refer to Fig. 3-59). 0 fmin (p1080) p1216 OFF1/OFF3 ON 1 r0052.C Bit 12 f p0346 Motor excitation finished r0056 Bit04 t t t t t t OFF2 Brake Status Brake Release Time Brake Closing Time open closed Active Inactive Fig. 3-59 Motor holding brake after OFF2 The mechanical brake is controlled using the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" of the brake control. This signal can be output as follows: Via digital outputs The status signal is output via the digital output. In this case, the internal MICROMASTER relay (if the specification is sufficient) or also an external contactor or relay can be used to control the brake. Via status signal using the serial interface (USS or PROFIBUS) The master must process the status signal. The signal must be connected to the digital output of the master to which the contactor / relay for the motor holding brake is connected.
  • 143. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 143 NOTE Motors have optional holding brakes which are not designed to be used as brakes for normal operation. The holding brakes are only designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations / motor revolutions with the brake closed (refer to the Catalog data). When commissioning a drive with integrated holding brake it is therefore absolutely imperative that it is ensured that the holding brake functions perfectly. A "clicking noise" in the motor indicates that the brake has been correctly released. Parameter settings: ♦ To open/close, the digital output controls the motor holding brake at point 1/2 (refer to Fig. 3-58). In this case the prerequisite is that the motor holding brake P1215 has been activated as well as the selection of the motor holding brake at the digital output. ♦ Brake opening time P1216 is greater than/equal to the time to open the holding brake. ♦ Brake delay time P1217 is greater than/equal to the time to close the holding brake. ♦ Select the min. frequency P1080 so that it acts just like a weight equalization function. ♦ A typical value for the min. frequency P1080 for the motor holding brake is the slip frequency of the motor r0330. The rated slip frequency can be calculated using the following formula: n nsy nnsy Slip f n nn P0310 100 r0330 [Hz]f ⋅ − =⋅= ♦ The following control parameters should be noted in conjunction with the motor holding brake: − P1310, P1311, P1333, P1335
  • 144. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 144 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 WARNING It is not sufficient to select the status signal r0052 bit 12 "Motor holding brake active" in P0731 – P0733. In order to activate the motor holding brake, in addition, parameter P1215 must also be set to 1. If the frequency inverter controls the motor holding brake, then a commissioning may not be carried-out for potentially hazardous loads (e.g. suspended loads for crane applications) unless the load has been secured. Potentially hazardous loads can be secured as follows before commissioning is started: ♦ Lower the load to the floor ♦ During the commissioning phase or after the frequency inverter has been replaced, the frequency inverter must be inhibited from controlling the motor holding brake (it is not permissible that the frequency inverter controls the holding brake). Quick commissioning or a parameter download using STARTER etc. may only be carried-out after this has been absolutely ensured. The motor holding brake terminals can then be re-assigned (in this case, it is not permissible that digital output P0748 is inverted for the motor holding brake). ♦ In order to hold the motor against the mechanical brake at a specific frequency, it is important that the min. frequency P1080 approximately corresponds to the slip frequency. If the value is selected to be too high, then the current drawn can be too high so that the frequency inverter shuts- down (trips) due to an overcurrent. If the value selected is too low, then it is possible that not enough torque is produced to hold the load. It is not permissible to use the motor holding brake as operating brake. The reason for this is that generally it is only dimensioned/designed for a limited number of emergency braking operations. Motor with motor holding brake (example) A motor with motor holding brake for a hanging (suspended) axis is connected to the frequency inverter. This holding brake is to be controlled using the 1st digital output. Which settings have to be made? Select the "motor holding brake active" function (52.12) at digital output P0731. Activate the brake sequence control in the frequency inverter (P1215 = 1). Set parameter P1216 to open the holding brake after an ON command. The brake opening time P1216 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than the time required to open the holding brake. The opening time of the brake (refer to the Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay opening time can be used as nominal value for P1216. Set parameter P1217 to close the holding brake after an OFF1/3 command. The brake delay time P1217 must be set so that it is equal to or longer than the time required to close the holding brake. The closing time of the brake (refer to Motor Catalog, e.g. M11) plus the relay closing time can be used as nominal value for P1217.
  • 145. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 145 Set the load holding The opening / closing times of mechanical brakes are subject to certain fluctuations; this is the reason that a weight equalization function must be parameterized in the frequency inverter for the time P1216 and P1217. The following parameters must be defined so that the axis cannot sag (i.e. the axis cannot drop/fall). ♦ In order that the motor can immediately establish a torque after an ON command, the magnetizing time P0346, determined with the quick commissioning, may not be reset. This is the reason that parameter P0346 should be checked for the weight equalization. Typical magnetizing times for 4-pole 1LA7 motors are: 0.12 kW 50 ms 5.50 kW 250 ms 1.50 kW 100 ms 7.50 kW 300 ms ♦ The min. frequency P1080 should approximately correspond to the rated motor slip (P1080 ≈ r0330[Hz]) ♦ In addition, the voltage boost should be adapted: - constant voltage boost P1310 ≈ 90 % (empirical value) - voltage boost when accelerating P1311 ≈ 50 % (empirical value) Connecting-up the motor holding brake control ♦ Directly connected to the relay output COM NO 10 11 CPU MICROMASTER 420 M 3~ = Motor with motor holding brake Fig. 3-60 Direct motor holding brake connection
  • 146. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 146 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 If the frequency inverter directly controls the motor holding brake using the relay integrated in the frequency inverter, then the max. load capability of this relay should be carefully taken into consideration in conjunction with the voltage/current data of the holding brake. The following applies for the relay integrated in the frequency inverter: − 30 V DC / 5 A − 250 V AC / 2 A If this value is exceeded, an additional relay should, for example, be used. ♦ Indirectly connecting relay output via an additional relay 8 9 Output 0 V, max. 100 mA (isolated) Output +24 V, max. 100 mA (isolated) 24 V 0 V Relay M 3~ = COM NO 10 11 CPU MICROMASTER 420 Motor with motor holding brake Free- wheeling diode Caution The relay may not overload the internal 24 V power supply! Fig. 3-61 Indirect motor holding brake connection
  • 147. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 147 3.14 Electronic brakes MICROMASTER 420 has 2 electronic brakes: DC braking (refer to Section 3.14.1) Compound braking (refer to Section 3.14.2) These brakes can actively brake the drive and avoid a possible DC link overvoltage condition. An inter-dependency as shown in Fig. 3-62 is present. DC braking P1233 > 0 ? yes no DC braking enabled Compound braking P1236 > 0 ? Compound braking enabled disabled no yes Fig. 3-62 Inter-dependency of the electronic brakes 3.14.1 DC braking Parameter range: P1230, P1232, P1233 r0053 Bit00 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - The drive decelerates along a parameterized braking ramp if an OFF1 / OFF3 command is output. A "flat" ramp must be selected so that the drive inverter is not tripped (shutdown) due to the high regenerative energy which would cause a DC link overvoltage condition. The DC brake should be activated while the OFF1 / OFF3 command is present if the drive is to be braked faster. For DC braking, instead of continually reducing the output frequency / voltage during the OFF1 / OFF3 phase, a DC voltage / current is input (refer to sequence a). The drive can be brought to a standstill in the shortest time using DC current braking (DC brake). DC braking is selected as follows: After OFF1 or OFF3 (the DC brake is released via P1233) Sequence 1 Directly selected using BICO parameter P1230 Sequence 2 For DC braking, a DC current is impressed in the stator winding which results in a significant braking torque for an induction motor. The magnitude, duration and frequency at which braking starts can be set for the braking current and therefore braking torque by setting the appropriate parameters.
  • 148. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 148 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 The DC brake can therefore support a braking operation from approx. < 10 Hz or prevents / minimizes the increase in the DC link voltage for regenerative braking. This is realized because energy is directly absorbed in the motor. The essential advantage and the main application of the DC brake is the fact that a holding torque can be generated at standstill (0 Hz). For instance, this is important for applications where after positioning, any motion in the mechanical system / product itself can result in waste. DC braking is especially used for: Centrifuges Saws Grinding machines Conveyor belts Sequence 1 1. Enabled using P1233 2. DC braking is activated with the OFF1 or OFF3 command (refer to Fig. 3-63) 3. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347. 4. The required braking current P1233 is then impressed for the selected braking time P1232. The status is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00. The inverter pulses are inhibited after the braking time has expired. 0 t OFF1/OFF3 ON t 1 t ⏐f⏐ P1233 1 tt P0347 OFF2 DC braking OFF2 DC braking active r0053 Bit00 Fig. 3-63 DC braking after OFF1 / OFF3
  • 149. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 149 Sequence 2 1. Enabled and selected using BICO parameter P1230 (refer to Fig. 3-64) 2. The inverter pulses are inhibited for the duration of the de-magnetizing time P0347. 3. The requested braking current P1232 is impressed for the time selected and the motor is braked. This state is displayed using signal r0053 bit 00. 4. After DC braking has been cancelled, the drive accelerates back to the setpoint frequency until the motor speed matches the drive inverter output frequency. If there is no match, then there is danger that a fault will be output as a result of overcurrent - F0001. This can be avoided by activating the flying restart function. ON/OFF1 ⏐f⏐ P0347 f* i t t t t 1 0 f_act DC braking 0 1 DC braking active r0053 Bit 00 t f_set (0:0) P1230.C BI: Enable DC brk. Fig. 3-64 DC braking after external selection NOTE 1. The "DC braking" function is only practical for induction motors ! 2. DC braking is not suitable to hold suspended loads ! 3. For DC current braking, the motor kinetic energy is converted into thermal energy in the motor. If braking lasts too long, then the drive can overheat ! 4. While DC braking, there is no other way of influencing the drive speed using an external control. When parameterizing and setting the drive system, then as far as possible, it should be tested using real loads ! 5. DC braking is independent of the ON command. This means that it can even be selected in the "Ready" state.
  • 150. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 150 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.14.2 Compound braking Parameter range: P1236 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - For compound braking (this is enabled using P1236) DC braking is superimposed with regenerative braking (where the drive regenerates into the line supply as it brakes along a ramp). If the DC link voltage exceeds the compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp (refer to Fig. 3-65), then a DC current is impressed as a function of P1236. In this case, braking is possible with a controlled motor frequency and minimum regenerative feedback. Effective braking is obtained without having to use additional components by optimizing the ramp-down time (P1121 for OFF1 or when braking from f1 to f2, P1135 for OFF3) and using compound braking P1236. Compound braking is suitable for: Horizontal motion (e.g. traversing drives, conveyor belts) Vertical motion (e.g. hoisting gear) ⏐f⏐ i t t f_act f_set P1236 = 0 Without Compound braking u t ⏐f⏐ i t t f_act f_set P1236 >0 With Compound braking t DC-link u DC-link UDC-Comp P0210213.1U:0=P1254 Comp-DC ⋅⋅= 1242r0.98U:0P1254 Comp-DC ⋅=≠ Fig. 3-65 Compound braking The compound braking switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is calculated as a function of parameter P1254 (Auto detect VDC switch-on levels) either directly using the line supply voltage P0210 or indirectly using the DC link voltage and r1242 (refer to the formula in Fig. 3-65).
  • 151. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 151 WARNING For compound braking, regenerative braking is superimposed on the DC braking (braking along a ramp). This means that components of the kinetic energy of the motor and driven load are converted into thermal energy in the motor. If this power loss is too high or if the braking operation takes too long, then this can cause the drive to overheat ! When using compound braking it must be expected that there is a higher level of noise above the compound braking switch-in threshold. NOTE Compound braking is de-activated, if - flying restart is active, and - DC braking is active is selected. The compound switch-in threshold VDC-Comp is dependent on P1254 VDC-Comp(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC-Comp(P1254 ≠ 0) a) Auto-detect circuit enabled (P1254 = 1): - VDC-Comp (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter runs-up - i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected - Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation location. b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0): - 0210213.1, PV CompDC ⋅⋅= - The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210 - P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location
  • 152. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 152 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.15 Automatic restart Parameter range: P1210 P1211 Warnings A0571 Faults F0035 Function chart number: - After a power failure (F0003 "Undervoltage"), the "Automatic restart" function (enabled using P1210) automatically powers-up the drive inverter again. Any faults are automatically acknowledged by the drive inverter. When it comes to power failures (line supply failure), then a differentiation is made between the following conditions: Line undervoltage (brownout) "Line undervoltage" is a situation where the line supply is interrupted and returns before (if installed) the BOP display has gone dark (this is an extremely short line supply interruption where the DC link hasn't completely collapsed). Line failure (blackout) "Line failure" is a situation where the display has gone dark (this represents a longer line supply interruption where the DC link has completely collapsed) before the line supply returns. The automatic restart function P1210 is shown in the following diagram (refer to Table 3-29) as a function of external states / events. Table 3-29 Automatic restarts 0 − − − − − 1 − − 2 + − − − 3 + + + + 4 + + − − − 5 + − + + 6 + + + + + Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. restart restart restart restart restart Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. restart restart Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. restart restart restart Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. restart restart Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. Fault acknowl. restart restart restart ON always active (permanent)P1210 ON in no-voltage condition Fault F0003 on All other faults on BrownoutBlackout BrownoutBlackout All faults on Blackout − − − Restart No faults on Blackout − + Fault acknowl. restart − − Fault acknowl. Restart Restart
  • 153. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 153 The number of start attempts is specified using parameter P1211. The number is internally decremented after each unsuccessful attempt. After all attempts have been made (as specified in parameter P1211), automatic restart is cancelled with message F0035. After a successful start attempt, the counter is again reset to the initial value. NOTE The "Flying restart" function (refer to Section 3.16) must be additionally activated if, for an automatic restart, the drive inverter is to be connected to a motor which may already be spinning. DANGER For longer line supply failures (blackouts)and when the automatic restart function is activated, over a longer period of time it may be assumed that MICROMASTER is powered-down. However, when the line supply returns, motors can automatically start to run again without any operator intervention. If the operating range of the motors is entered in this status, this can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
  • 154. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 154 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.16 Flying restart Parameter range: P1200 P1202, P1203 r1204, r1205 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - The "Flying restart" function (this is enabled using P1200, refer to Table 3-30) allows the drive inverter to be switched to a motor which is still spinning. If the drive inverter was to be powered-up without using the flying restart function, there would be a high possibility that a fault with overcurrent F0001 would occur. The reason for this is that the flux must first be established in the motor and the V/f control must be set corresponding to the actual motor speed. The drive inverter frequency is synchronized with the motor frequency using the flying restart function. When the drive inverter is normally powered-up it is assumed that the motor is stationary and the drive inverter accelerates the motor from standstill and the speed is ramped-up to the setpoint which has been entered. However, in many cases this condition is not fulfilled. A fan drive is a typical example. When the drive inverter is powered-down the air flowing through the fan can cause it to rotate in any direction. Table 3-30 Settings for parameter P1200 Parameter P1200 Flying restart active Search direction 0 Disabled - 1 Always Start in the direction of the setpoint 2 For line supply on and fault Start in the direction of the setpoint 3 For fault and OFF2 Start in the direction of the setpoint 4 Always Only in the direction of the setpoint 5 For line supply on, fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint 6 For fault and OFF2 Only in the direction of the setpoint Depending on parameter P1200, after the de-magnetizing time has expired P0347, flying restart is started with the maximum search frequency fsearch,max (refer to Fig. 3-66). P0310 100 r0330 2P1802f2ff standardslip,maxmaxsearch, ⋅⋅+=⋅= + This is realized either after the line supply returns when the automatic restart function has been activated or after the last shutdown with the OFF2 command (pulse inhibit). V/f characteristic (P1300 < 20): The search frequency is reduced, as a function of the DC link current with the search rate which is calculated from parameter P1203. In so doing, the parameterizable search current P1202 is impressed. If the search frequency is close to the rotor frequency, the DC link current suddenly changes because the flux in the motor establishes itself. Once this state has been reached, the search frequency is kept constant and the output voltage is changed to the voltage value of the V/f characteristic with the magnetizing time P0346 (refer to Fig. 3-66).
  • 155. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 155 After the magnetizing time P0346 has expired, the ramp-function generator is set to the speed actual value and the motor is operated with the actual reference frequency. Setpoint frequency t f f Ramp upMagnetizing time P0346 Demagnetizing time P0347 Flying restart P1202 P1203 search,max Fig. 3-66 Flying restart NOTE If a higher value is entered for the search velocity P1203 this results in a flatter search curve and therefore to an extended search time. A lower value has the opposite effect. For "Flying restart", a braking torque is generated which can cause drives, with low moments of inertia, to brake. For group drives, "Flying restart" should not be activated due to the different characteristics of the individual motors when coasting down. WARNING When "Flying restart" is activated (P1200 > 0), although the drive is at a stand- still and the setpoint is 0, it is possible that the drive is accelerated as a result of the search current ! If the operating range of the motors is entered when the drive is in this state, this can result in death, severe injury or material damage.
  • 156. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 156 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.17 Closed-loop Vdc control 3.17.1 Vdc_max controller Parameter range: P1240, r0056 bit 14 r1242, P1243 P1250 – P1254 Warnings A0502, A0910 Faults F0002 Function chart number: FP4600 DC link undervoltage Cause: Line supply voltage failure or dip (blackout or brownout) Remedy: A regenerative torque is entered for the operational drive which compensates the existing losses and therefore stabilizes the voltage in the DC link. This technique is carried-out using the Vdc_min controller (refer to Section 3.18) and is known as kinetic buffering. A brief regenerative load can be handled using this function (enabled using P1240) without the drive inverter being shut down (tripped) with fault message F0002 ("DC link overvoltage"). In this case, the frequency is controlled so that the motor doesn't go too far into regenerative operation. If the drive inverter regenerates too much when braking the machine due to a fast ramp-down time P1121, then the braking ramp / ramp time are automatically extended and the drive inverter is operated at the DC link voltage limit r1242 (refer to Fig. 3-67). If the DC link threshold r1242 is again fallen below, then the Vdc_max controller withdraws the extension of the braking ramp. t t ⏐f⏐ 1 -controller activeVDC_max t VDC r1242 0 r0056 Bit 14 f fact set A0911 Fig. 3-67 Vdc_max controller
  • 157. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 157 On the other hand, if the Vdc_max controller increases the output frequency (e.g. for a steady-state regenerative load), then the Vdc_max controller is disabled by an internal drive inverter monitoring function and warning A0910 is output. If the regenerative load continues, the drive inverter is protected using fault F0002. In addition to controlling the DC link, the Vdc_max controller supports the stabilizing processes of the speed at the end of an acceleration phase. This is especially the case if there is an overshoot and the motor therefore briefly goes into regenerative operation (damping effect). NOTE If the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 (switch-on level of Vdc_max.) of the Vdc_max controller in the "Ready" state, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and warning A0910 is output. Cause: The line supply voltage does not match the application situation. Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254 and P0210. If, in the "Run" state, the DC link voltage exceeds the power-on threshold r1242 and if the Vdc_max controller output is limited by parameter P1253 for approx. 200 ms, then the Vdc_max controller is de-activated and warning A0910 and, where relevant, fault F0002 are output. Cause: Line supply voltage P0210 or ramp-down time P1121 too low The moment of inertia of the driven load is too high Remedy: Refer to parameters P1254, P0210, P1121 The Vdc_max switch-in threshold VDC_max depends on P1254 VDC_max(P1254 = 0) ≠ VDC_max(P1254 ≠ 0) a) Auto-detect function enabled (P1254 = 1): - VDC_max (P1254 = 1) is automatically calculated when the drive inverter runs-up, i.e. after the line supply voltage has been connected - Using the auto-detect function, the VDC-Comp threshold automatically adapts itself to the line supply voltage at the particular installation location. b) Auto-detect function disabled (P1254 = 0): - 0210P215.1U max_DC ⋅⋅= - The VDC-Comp threshold is immediately re-calculated after entering P0210 - P0210 must be adapted to the particular installation location.
  • 158. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 158 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.18 Monitoring functions / messages 3.18.1 General monitoring functions / messages Parameter range: P2150 – r2197 r0052, r0053, r2197 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP4100, FP4110 MICROMASTER has an extensive range of monitoring functions / messages which can be used for open-loop process control. The control can either be implemented in the drive inverter or also using an external control (e.g. PLC). The interlocking functions in the drive inverter (refer to Section 3.1.2.3) as well as the output of signals (refer to Section 3.6.2 or 0) for external control are implemented using BICO technology. The status of the individual monitoring functions / messages are emulated in the following CO/BO parameters: r0019 CO/BO: BOP control word r0052 CO/BO: Status word 1 r0053 CO/BO: Status word 2 r0054 CO/BO: Control word 1 r0055 CO/BO: Supplementary (additional) control word r0056 CO/BO: Status word – motor control r0722 CO/BO: Status, digital inputs r0747 CO/BO: Status, digital outputs r2197 CO/BO: Messages 1 Frequently used monitoring functions / messages including parameter number and bit are shown in the following Table.
  • 159. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 159 Table 3-31 Partial excerpt of monitoring functions / messages Functions / states Parameter / bit number Function chart Drive ready 52.0 - Drive ready to run 52.1 - Drive running 52.2 - Drive fault active 52.3 - OFF2 active 52.4 - OFF3 active 52.5 - On inhibit active 52.6 - Drive warning active 52.7 - Deviation setpoint – actual value 52.8 - PZD control 52.9 - Maximum frequency reached 52.A - Warning: Motor current limit 52.B - Motor holding brake active 52.C - Motor overload 52.D - Motor runs right 52.E - Drive inverter overload 52.F - DC brake active 53.0 - Ramping finished 53.9 - PID output R2294 == P2292 (PID_min) 53.A FP5100 PID output R2294 == P2291 (PID_max) 53.B FP5100 Download data set 0 from AOP 53.E - Download data set 0 from AOP 53.F - |f_act| > P1080 (f_min) 53.2 2197.0 FP4100 |f_act| <= P2155 (f_1) 53.5 2197.1 FP4110 |f_act| > P2155 (f_1) 53.4 2197.2 FP4110 f_act > zero 2197.3 FP4110 f_act >= setpoint (f_set) 53.6 2197.4 - |f_act| >= P2167 (f_off) 53.1 2197.5 FP4100 |f_act| > P1082 (f_max) 2197.6 - f_act == setpoint (f_set) 2197.7 FP4110 i_act r0068 >= P2170 53.3 2197.8 FP4100 Approx. Vdc_act < P2172 53.7 2197.9 FP4110 Approx. Vdc_act > P2172 53.8 2197.A FP4110 No-load operation 2197.B -
  • 160. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 160 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.19 Thermal motor protection and overload responses Parameter range: P0610 – P0614 P0345 r 0034 Warnings A0511 Faults F0011 Function chart number: - MICROMASTER 420 has a completely new integrated concept for thermal motor protection. There are numerous possibilities of effectively protecting the motor but at the same time ensuring high motor utilization. The basic philosophy of this innovative concept is to detect critical thermal states, output warnings and initiate the appropriate responses. By responding to critical states it is possible to operate the drive at the thermal power limit and to avoid, under all circumstances, an immediate shutdown (where the drive inverter is tripped). Features The protective concept distinguishes itself as a result of the following individual features: Protection is effective without using any temperature sensor. The temperatures of various locations in the motor are indirectly determined using a temperature model. Selectable responses P0610 which are to be initiated when the warning threshold is exceeded in order to prevent an overload condition. The motor protection has been designed to be completely independent of the drive inverter protection. Warning thresholds and responses for drive inverter protection must be separately parameterized. 3.19.1 Thermal motor model The motor temperature rise increases because of the losses occurring during the energy-conversion process in the motor. These losses can be essentially sub- divided into two groups: No-load losses The no-load losses include the bearing and air friction losses as well as the re- magnetizing losses (eddy current and hysteresis losses). All of these loss components dependent on the speed and electrical frequency. Load losses The load losses are mainly determined by the thermal losses in the windings due to the current flowing through them. An electrical motor represents a multi-material system (iron, copper, insulating material, air) where the heat source is especially concentrated in the windings, the laminated core and the shaft bearings. The following simplifications were made to replicate the thermal processes in the motor: The motor is a homogenous body Heat sources are uniformly distributed in the motor Heat is only dissipated using convection
  • 161. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 161 Using these simplifications, the thermal motor behavior can be defined using a 1st Order filter (PT1 filter). In this case, the square of the normalized motor current (measured motor current r0027 divided by the rated motor current P0305) weighted by the thermal motor time constant P0611 results in the I²t value of the motor r0034. The I²t value represents a parameter for the temperature rise / temperature of the motor. In addition, the output frequency (motor speed) is included in the calculation in order to take into account the cooling effect of the motor fan. If parameter P0335 is changed to a force-ventilated motor, then the calculation is also appropriately modified. If the I²t value of the motor (r0034) reaches the value defined in P0614 (default: 100%), alarm message A0511 is output and depending on P0610, a response is initiated, or, when the shutdown threshold is reached, a fault. The following settings are possible for P0610: 0 No response, only a warning 1 Warning and Imax is reduced (this results in a lower output frequency) 2 Warning and fault (F0011) ⎟ ⎠ ⎞ ⎜ ⎝ ⎛ P0305 r0027 2 P0310 r0021 Motor i2t temp. reaction P0610 P0611 P0335 P0614 P06141.1⋅ Trip threshold Warning threshold I_max reduction A0511 F0011 t r0034 )ti( 2 Fig. 3-68 Drive inverter response The thermal motor time constant P0611 is a measure for the rate at which the motor temperature changes and must be entered depending on the motor. NOTE For motors with a higher weight P0344, the temperature increase characteristic is significantly slower than for small motors. If thermal data of a third-party motor is not entered, then values are used that are based on a Siemens motor. Thermal motor data should be taken from the appropriate motor Catalogs.
  • 162. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 162 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Temperature Classes The permissible temperature rise of electrical machinery (motors) is limited due to the thermal strength of the insulating materials. Different maximum values are permissible depending on the material used. In compliance with regulations for rotating electrical machinery, a differentiation is made between several temperature Classes (refer to the motor rating plate) and these are assigned to the highest permissible continuous temperature. An excerpt from IEC 85 is shown in the "Thermal Classes" table. Table 3-32 Thermal classes Max.perm.temperatureThermal Class Y A E B F 90 °C 105 °C 120 °C 130 °C 155 °C H 180 °C Excerpt from IEC 85 3.19.2 PTC temperature sensor When the motor is operated below the rated speed the cooling effect of the shaft-mounted fan is reduced. As a result, for most motors when continually operated at lower frequencies, the power has to be reduced. Under these particular conditions, the motors are only protected against overheating if either the parameters of the motor temperature model (refer to Section 3.19.1) were precisely determined or a PTC temperature sensor is mounted to the motor and connected to one of the digital inputs of the MICROMASTER 420 (refer to Fig. 3-69). Parameters P0701, P0702 or P0703 = 29 (external fault) should be set to activate the shutdown (tripping) function for a motor overtemperature condition. If the resistance of the PTC temperature sensor exceeds the shutdown (trip) threshold (motor overtemperature condition), then Fault F0085 is output (external fault). Fig. 3-69 PTC characteristic for 1LG / 1LA motors
  • 163. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 163 Term. 5, 6 or 7 1 kΩ 5, 6 or 7 PNP digital input (P0725 = 1) Term. 8 (24 V) Term. 9 (0 V) Term. 5, 6 or 7 12 kΩ 5, 6 or 7 NPN digital input (P0725 = 0) Term. 9 (0 V) Term. 8 (24 V) RPTC ≈ 900 Ω ⇒ DIN switches from "0" → "1" Fig. 3-70 Connecting a temperature sensor to MICROMASTER 420 NOTE The specified circuit examples apply for the PTC temperature sensor from the M11 Motor Catalog (motor protection using PTC thermistors, Code Z = A10 – A16) - that is used for the 1LA and 1LG Siemens motors. NOTE In order to avoid noise from being coupled into the drive inverter electronics - with the associated disturbances - none of the free conductors in the motor cable may be used to connect the temperature sensor to the drive inverter. The temperature sensor must be connected to the drive inverter using a separate cable (if possible, using a shielded cable).
  • 164. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 164 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.20 Power module protection 3.20.1 General overload monitoring Parameter range: P0640, r0067, r1242, P0210 Warnings A0501, A0502, A0503 Faults F0001, F0002, F0003 Function chart number: - Just the same as for motor protection, MICROMASTER provides extensive protection for the power components. This protection concept is also sub-divided into 2 levels: Warning and response Fault and shutdown Using this concept, a high utilization of the power module components can be achieved without the drive inverter being immediately shut down. The power module components are monitored as follows: Table 3-33 General protection of the power components Warning and response Fault and shutdown Overcurrent / short circuit Imax controller for V/f A0501 r0056 bit 09 r0056 bit 13 (refer to Section 3.21.1.2) F0001 DC link overvoltage Vdc_max controller A0502 (refer to Section 3.17.1) F0002 The monitoring thresholds for the right-hand column in the table above are permanently saved in the drive inverter and cannot be changed by the user. On the other hand, the threshold levels for the "Warning and response" column can be modified by the user to optimize the system. These values have default settings so that the "Fault and shutdown" thresholds do not respond.
  • 165. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 165 3.20.2 Thermal monitoring functions and overload responses Parameter range: P0290 – P0294 r0036 – r0037 Warnings A0504, A0505 Faults F0004, F0005, F0012, F0020, F0022 Function chart number: - Similar to motor protection, the main function of the thermal power module monitoring is to detect critical states. Parameterizable responses are provided to the user which allows the drive system to be still operated at the power limit thus avoiding immediate shutdown. However, the possibilities of assigning parameters only involves interventions below the shutdown threshold which cannot be changed by users. MICROMASTER 420 has the following thermal monitoring functions: Heatsink temperature The monitoring of the heatsink temperature r0037[0] of the power semiconductor (IGBT). i2 t monitoring The i2 t monitoring is used to protect components which have a long thermal time constant in comparison to the semiconductors. An overload with reference to i2 t is present if the drive inverter utilization r0036 indicates a value greater than 100 % (utilization as a % referred to rated operation). Normalized output current t 100 % Reaction via P0290 Default: "current reduction" r0207 r0027 P0294 (95 %) t i2 t [%] r0036 1 0 A0505 t Fig. 3-71 Drive inverter response to an overload condition Parameter P0290 defines how the drive inverter responds to an overload condition. The following settings are possible: 0 "Reduce the output frequency" 1 "Shutdown (F0004)" 2 "Reduce the pulse frequency and output frequency" 3 "Reduce the pulse frequency then shutdown (F0004)"
  • 166. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 166 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 When an overload occurs regarding one of these monitoring functions, initially, a warning is output. The warning threshold P0294 (i2 t monitoring) and P0292 (heatsink temperature monitoring) can be parameterized relative to the shutdown values. f_pulse control i_max control A0504 A0505 A0506 F0004 F0005 Inverter overload reaction P0290 r0036 r0037 Heat sink temperature P0292 i2 t P0294 Inverter monitoring Fig. 3-72 Overload response of the drive inverter (P0290) Example The warning threshold P0292 for the temperature monitoring (heatsink temperature) is set to 15 °C in the factory. This means that warning A0504 is output 15 °C below the shutdown threshold. At the same time that the warning is output, the parameterized responses are initiated via P0290. Possible responses include: Reducing the pulse frequency (P0290 = 2, 3) This is an extremely effective method to reduce losses in the power module, as the switching losses represent a very high proportion of the overall losses. In many applications, a temporary reduction of the pulse frequency can be tolerated in favor of maintaining the process. Disadvantage The current ripple is increased when the pulse frequency is reduced. This can result in an increase of the torque ripple at the motor shaft (for low moments of inertia) and an increase in the noise level. Reducing the output frequency (P0290 = 0,2) This is advantageous if it is not desirable to reduce the pulse frequency or if the pulse frequency is already set to the lowest level. Further, the load should have a characteristic similar to that of a fan, i.e. a square-law torque characteristic for decreasing speed. When the output frequency is reduced, this significantly reduces the drive inverter output current and in turn reduces the losses in the power module.
  • 167. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 167 No reduction (P0290 = 1) This option should be selected if neither a reduction in the pulse frequency nor a reduction in the output current is being considered. In this case, the drive inverter does not change its operating point after the warning threshold has been exceeded so that the drive can be further operated until the shutdown values are reached. After the shutdown threshold has been reached, the drive inverter shuts down (trips) with fault F0004. The time which expires up to shutdown is however not defined and depends on the magnitude of the overload. Only the warning threshold can be changed in order to obtain an earlier warning and, if required, externally intervene in the drive process (e.g. by reducing the load, lowering the ambient temperature). NOTE If the drive inverter fan fails, this would be indirectly detected by the measurement of the heatsink temperature. A wire breakage or short circuit of the temperature sensor(s) is also monitored.
  • 168. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 168 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.21 Open-loop/closed-loop control technique There are several open-loop/closed-loop techniques for speed and torque control for drive inverters with induction and synchronous motors. These techniques can be roughly classified as follows: V/f characteristic control (briefly: V/f control) Field-orientated closed-loop control technique (briefly: Vector control) These techniques differ from one another both regarding the control quantity as also in the complexity of the technique, which in turn are obtained as a result of the requirements associated with the particular application. For basic applications (e.g. pumps and fans), to a large extent, V/f control is used. Vector control is mainly used for sophisticated applications (e.g. winders), where a good control and behavior in noisy conditions are required regarding the speed and torque. If these requirements are also present in the range from 0 to approx. 1 Hz, then the speed/torque accuracy without encoder is not sufficient. In this case, Vector control with speed feedback must be used. NOTE Vector control is only available for MICROMASTER 440. 3.21.1 V/f control Parameter range: P1300 P1310 – P1350 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP6100 The V/f characteristic represents the simplest control technique. In this case the stator voltage of the induction motor or synchronous motor is controlled proportionally to the stator frequency. This technique has proven itself for a wide range of "basic" applications, such as Pumps, fans Belt drives and similar processes. The goal of V/f control is to keep the flux Φ constant in the motor. In this case, this is proportional to the magnetizing current Iµ and the ratio between voltage V and frequency f. Φ ~ Iµ ~ V/f The torque M, developed by induction motors, is proportional to the product (precisely the vectorial product Φ x I) of flux and current. M ~ Φ ∗ I In order to generate the highest possible torque from a given current, the motor must operate with a constant flux which is as high as possible. In order to keep the flux Φ constant, when frequency f changes, the voltage V must be changed in proportion so that a constant magnetizing current Iµ flows. The V/f characteristic control is derived from these basic principles.
  • 169. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 169 f U, M, P, Φ Voltage control range Field control range Rated motor operating pointMn, Φn fn fmax M, Φ U, P U, P Fig. 3-73 Operating ranges and characteristics of an induction motor when fed from a drive inverter There are several versions of the V/f characteristic as shown in Table 3-34. Table 3-34 V/f characteristic (parameter P1300) Parameter value Significance Use / property 0 Linear character- istic Standard case Vn 0 fn V f P1300 = 0 1 FCC Characteristic which compensates the voltage losses of the stator resistance for static (steady-state) or dynamic loads (flux current control FCC). This is especially used for small motors which have a relatively high stator resistance. Refer to Section 3.21.1.2. 2 Square-law character- istic This is a characteristic which takes into consideration the torque characteristic of the driven load (e.g. fan / pump) a) Square-law characteristic (f 2 characteristic) b) Energy saving as the lower voltage also results in lower currents and losses. Vn 0 fn V f P1300 = 2 3 Programm- able character- istic Characteristic which takes into consideration the torque characteristic of the motor / driven load (e.g. synchronous motor). V P1325 f1 P1320 fmax P1082 Vmax r0071 Vn P0304 P1323 P1321 f0 0 Hz f2 P1322 f3 P1324 fn P0310 f P1300 = 3 P1310
  • 170. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 170 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.21.1.1 Voltage boost Parameter range: P1310, P1311, P1312 r0056 bit 05 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP6100 For low output frequencies, the V/f characteristics only output a low output voltage. Even at low frequencies, the ohmic resistances of the stator winding play a role, which are neglected when determining the motor flux in Section 3.21.1. This means that the output voltage can be too low in order to implement the magnetization of an induction motor, to hold the load to voltage drops (ohmic losses in the winding resistances) in the system or to provide a breakaway / accelerating / braking torque. The output voltage can be increased (boosted) in MICROMASTER using the following parameters (refer to Table 3-35): Table 3-35 Voltage boost Parameter Voltage boost Explanation P1310 Constant voltage boost The voltage boost is effective over the complete frequency range whereby the value continually decreases at high frequencies. f Linear V/f OFF ON t t ⏐f⏐ P1310 active t0 1 Validity range Vmax Vn (P0304) VConBoost,100 0 fn (P0310) f max (P1082) V fBoost,end (P1316) Boost Output voltage actual V N orm al V/f (P1300 = 0) VConBoost,50 Boost voltage erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1310_linear_MM420.vsd P1311 Voltage boost when accelerating- / braking The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating or braking.
  • 171. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 171 Parameter Voltage boost Explanation Vmax Vn (P0304) VAccBoost,100 0 fn (P0310) fmax (P1082) f V fBoost,end (P1316) VAccBoost,50 Boost Norm al V/f (P1300 = 0) actual V Output voltage OFF ON t t ⏐f⏐ P1311 active t0 1 Boost voltage Validity range erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1311_MM420.vsd P1312 Voltage boost when starting The voltage boost is only effective when accelerating for the first time (standstill) OFF ON t t ⏐f⏐ P1312 active t0 1 Vmax Vn (P0304) VStartBoost,100 0 fn (P0310) fmax (P1082) f V fBoost,end (P1316) VStartBoost,50 Boost Boost voltage Norm al V/f (P1300 = 0) actual V Output voltage Validity range erlf305aGraphics_PLIImagesp1312_MM420.vsd NOTE Especially at low frequencies, the motor temperature is additionally increased as a result of the voltage boost (the motor overheats) ! The voltage value at 0 Hz is determined from the product of rated motor current P0305, stator resistance P0350 and the appropriate parameters P1310 – P1312.
  • 172. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 172 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.21.1.2 V/f open-loop control with flux current control (FCC) Parameter range: P1300, P1333 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - An improved current measurement function has been developed for our MICROMASTER drive inverters. This permits the output current to be precisely determined referred to the motor voltage. This measurement guarantees that the output current is sub-divided into a load component and a flux component. Using this sub-division, the motor flux can be controlled and can be appropriately adapted and optimized in-line with the prevailing conditions. FCC operation is only activated after the FCC starting frequency P1333 has been exceeded. The FCC starting frequency P1333 is entered as a percentage to the rated motor frequency P0310. For a rated motor frequency of 50 Hz and a factory setting of P1333 = 10 %, this results in an FCC starting frequency of 5 Hz. The FCC starting frequency may not be selected too low as this has a negative impact on the control characteristics and can result in oscillation and system instability. The "V/f with FCC" control type (P1300 = 1) has proven itself in many applications. It has the following advantages with respect to the standard V/f control: Higher motor efficiency Improved stabilizing characteristics ♦ → higher dynamic response ♦ → improved behavior to disturbances / control 3.21.1.3 Slip compensation totali fluxi loadi
  • 173. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 173 Parameter range: P1335 – r1337 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: FP6100 In the V/f characteristic operating mode the motor frequency is always lower than the drive inverter output frequency by the slip frequency fs. If the load (the load is increased from M1 to M2) is increased with a constant output frequency, then the slip s when motoring increases and the motor frequency decreases (from f1 to f2). This behavior, typical for an induction motor, can be compensated using slip compensation P1335. This therefore eliminates the speed reduction, caused by the load, by boosting (increasing) the drive inverter output frequency (refer to Fig. 3-74). Without Slip compensation M f ∆f f2 f1 M2 M1 With Slip compensation M f ∆f f2 f1 M2 M1 fout M1 fout M2 Fig. 3-74 Slip compensation
  • 174. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 174 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 3.21.1.4 V/f resonance damping Parameter range: P1338, P1349 Warnings - Faults - Function chart number: - For variable-speed drives, resonance effects can occur in the upper frequency range (> 20 Hz). These resonance effects result in an increased noise level and also can damage / destroy the mechanical system. These resonance effects can occur for: Geared motors Reluctance motors Large motors (low stator resistance → poor electrical damping) Contrary to the "skip frequency" function (refer to Section 3.12.1 and parameters P1091 to P1094), where the resonance frequency is passed through as quickly as possible, for the V/f resonance damping (parameter P1338), the resonance effects are dampened from a control-related perspective. The advantage of this function is that by using this active damping, operation is possible in the resonance range. The V/f resonance damping is activated and adjusted using parameter P1338. This parameter represents a gain factor that is a measure for the damping of the resonance frequency. With parameter P1349 the upper limit is defined for the effectiveness of this parameter. In a range of 5 % below the upper limit, damping is reduced linearly from 100 % to 0 %. The following oscillogram (refer to Fig. 3-75) indicates the effect of the resonance damping function using as an example a reluctance motor with gearbox. The phase output currents are displayed for an output frequency of 45 Hz. Without V/f resonance damping (P1338 = 0) V/f resonance damping active (P1338 = 1) Fig. 3-75 Effect of V/f resonance damping
  • 175. Issue 10/06 3 Functions MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 175 3.21.1.5 Current limiting (Imax controller) Parameter range: P1340 – P1344 r0056 bit 13 Warnings A0501 Faults F0001 Function chart number: FP6100 Our drive inverters have, in the V/f characteristic mode, a current limiting controller (Imax controller, refer to Fig. 3-76). This controller avoids overload conditions. This controller protects the drive inverter and the motor against continuous overload conditions by automatically reducing the drive inverter output frequency by fImax (r1343) or the drive inverter output voltage by VImax (r1344). By either reducing the output frequency or the output voltage, this reduces the load on the drive inverter and protects against continuous damage. Imax controller setpoint +− r1343 CO:Imax ctrl Foutp r1344 CO:Imax ctrl Voutp Current feedback r0067 CO: Outp cur limit [A] r0068 CO: Output current [A] Motor ovl fact [%] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] P0640.D (150.0) Motor temperatur Inverter temperatur i2 t inverter Motor ovl fact [%] 10.0 ... 400.0 [%] P0640.D (150.0) Imax ctrl prp gain 0.000 ... 5.499 P1345.D (0.250) Kp Tn Kp Tn Imax ctrl int time 0.000 ... 50.000 [s] P1346.D (0.300) Imax ctrl prp gain 0.000 ... 0.499 P1340.D (0.000) Imax ctrl int time 0.000 ... 50.000 [s] P1346.D (0.300) UI_max fI_max Fig. 3-76 Imax controller NOTE A reduction in the frequency only reduces the load if the load decreases at lower speeds (e.g. square-law torque-speed characteristic of the driven load).
  • 176. 3 Functions Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 176 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 177. Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 177 4 Troubleshooting This Chapter contains: Operating statuses and messages of the inverter with the SDP Notes on troubleshooting with the BOP A list of the alarms and fault messages 4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP .............................................................................. 178 4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP.............................................................................. 179 4.3 Fault messages..................................................................................................... 180
  • 178. 4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 178 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 WARNING ♦ Repairs on equipment may only be carried out by Siemens Service, by repair centers authorized by Siemens or by qualified personnel who are thoroughly acquainted with all the warnings and operating procedures contained in this manual. ♦ Any defective parts or components must be replaced using parts contained in the relevant spare parts list. ♦ Disconnect the power supply before opening the equipment for access 4.1 Troubleshooting with the SDP Table 4-1 explains the meaning of the various states of the LEDs on the SDP. Table 4-1 Inverter conditions indicated by the LEDs on the SDP Mains not present Fault inverter temperature Ready to run Warning current limit - both LEDs twinkling same time Inverter fault - other than the ones listed below Other warnings - both LEDs twinkling alternatively Inverter running Undervoltage trip / undervoltage warning Fault overcurrent Drive is not in ready state Fault overvoltage ROM failure - Both LEDs flashing same time Fault motor overtemperature RAM failure - Both LEDs flashing alternatively LEDs for indicating the drive state Off On approx. 0,3 s, flashing approx. 1 s, twinkling
  • 179. Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 179 4.2 Troubleshooting with the BOP Warnings and faults are displayed on the BOP with Axxx and Fxxx respectively. The individual messages are shown in the Parameter list. If the motor fails to start when the ON command has been given: Check that P0010 = 0. Check that a valid ON signal is present. Check that P0700 = 2 (for digital input control) or P0700 = 1 (for BOP control). Check that the setpoint is present (0 to 10V on Terminal 3) or the setpoint has been entered into the correct parameter, depending upon the setpoint source (P1000). See the Parameter List for further details. If the motor fails to run after changing the parameters, set P0010 = 30 then P0970 = 1 and press P to reset the inverter to the factory default parameter values. Now use a switch between terminals 5 and 8 on the control board. The drive should now run to the defined setpoint by analogue input. NOTICE Motor data must relate to the inverter data power range and voltage.
  • 180. 4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 180 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 4.3 Fault messages and alarm messages 4.3.1 Fault messages In the event of a failure, the inverter switches off and a fault code appears on the display. NOTE To reset the fault code, one of three methods listed below can be used: 1. Cycle the power to the drive. 2. Press the button on the BOP or AOP. 3. Via Digital Input 3 (default setting) Fault messages are stored in parameter r0947 under their code number (e.g. F0003 = 3). The associated error value is found in parameter r0949. The value 0 is entered if a fault has no error value. It is furthermore possible to read out the point in time that a fault occurred (r0948) and the number of fault messages (P0952) stored in Parameter r0947. A detailed description of the fault messages is provided in the parameter list. 4.3.2 Alarm messages Alarm messages are stored in parameter r2110 under their code number (e.g. A0503 = 503) and can be read out from there. A detailed description of the alarm messages is provided in the parameter list.
  • 181. Issue 10/06 4 Troubleshooting MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 181 4.3.3 Suppressing fault / alarm messages From the perspective of the application and user, fault-free operation is the decisive criterion when it comes to the acceptance of drive systems. For special applications, not only this, but fault-free operation is required even if an overload condition exists or external events cause faults. For applications such as these (e.g. mixer systems), fault-free operation has a higher priority than the protection of the drive system. With MICROMASTER, it is possible to suppress up to 3 fault / alarm messages using the indexed parameters P2100 and P2101. The fault / alarm messages to be suppressed (refer to Section "Fault / alarm messages") are selected using parameter P2100 while the response is entered using parameter P2101. Indices 0 - 2 of the two parameters are used to correlate between suppressing the fault / alarm messages and the response. The following settings are possible for the responses: 0 No response, no display 1 OFF1 stop response 2 OFF2 stop response 3 OFF3 stop response 4 No response, only a warning Example: Alarm A0911 indicates that the drive has extended the ramp run-down time in order to avoid an overvoltage condition. If you wish to suppress this message, then set the following parameters: P2100[0] = 911 (selects Alarm A0911) P2101[0] = 0 (no response, no display) NOTE All of the fault messages are assigned the standard response to OFF2 (refer to the fault/alarm list). The standard responses of several fault messages, caused by the hardware - e.g. overcurrent F0001 - can neither be suppressed nor modified.
  • 182. 4 Troubleshooting Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 182 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 183. Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 183 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications This Chapter contains: Table 5-1 contains the general technical specifications for the MICROMASTER 420 inverter Table 5-2 contains terminal tightening torques Table 5-3 contains information on reducing the current as a function of the pulse frequency Table 5-4 includes various tables of specific technical data for individual MICROMASTER 420 inverters
  • 184. 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 184 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 5-1 MICROMASTER Performance Ratings Feature Specification Mains operating voltage and Power ranges 1 AC 200 V to 240 V ± 10 % 0,12 kW – 3,0 kW (0,16 hp – 4,0 hp) 3 AC 200 V to 240 V ± 10 % 0,12 kW – 5,5 kW (0,16 hp – 7,5 hp) 3 AC 380 V to 480 V ± 10 % 0,37 kW – 11,0 kW (0,50 hp – 15,0 hp) Input frequency 47 Hz to 63 Hz Output frequency 0 Hz to 650 Hz Power factor ≥ 0,7 Inverter efficiency 96 % to 97 % Overload capability 50 % overload capability for 60 s within 5 min period referred to the rated output current Inrush current Less than nominal input current Power-ON-OFF cycle time Every 30 s Control method Linear V/f Control; Linear V/f with Flux Current Control (FCC), Quadratic V/f Control; Multi-point V/f control Pulse frequency 2 kHz to 16 kHz (2 kHz steps) Fixed frequencies 7, programmable Skip frequencies 4, programmable Setpoint resolution 0.01 Hz Digital, 0.01 Hz Serial, 10 bit Analogue (motor potentiometer 0.1 Hz [0.1% (in PID mode)]) Digital inputs 3, programmable (isolated), switchable active high / active low (PNP/NPN) Analogue input 1, (0 to 10 V) used for frequency setpoint or PI feedback signal, scalable or usable as 4 th digital input Relay output 1, programmable 30 V DC / 5 A (resistive), 250 V AC / 2 A (inductive) Analogue output 1, programmable (0 mA to 20 mA) Serial interface RS-485, Option RS-232 Electromagnetic compatibility Optional EMC filters to EN55011 Class A or B, also Internal Class A filters available Braking DC braking, compound braking Protection level IP20 Temperature range -10 °C to +50 °C (14 °F to 122 °F) Storage temperature -40 °C to +70 °C (-40 °F to 158 °F) Humidity < 95 % RH – non-condensing Operational altitudes up to 1000 m above sea level without derating Protection features Undervoltage , Overvoltage, Overload, Ground Faults, Short circuit, Stall Prevention, Motor Blocking Protection, Motor Overtemperature, Inverter Overtemperature, Parameter Interlock Standards UL, cUL, CE, C-tick CE Marked Conformity with EC Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive 89/336/EEC
  • 185. Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 185 Table 5-2 Dimensions, required cooling air flow and tightening torques for power terminals Frame Size Dimensions Required cooling air flow Tightening torque for power connections mm 73 × 173 × 149 l/s 4.8 Nm 1.1 A W x H x D inch 2.87 × 6.81 × 5.87 CFM 10.2 lbf.in 10 mm 149 × 202 × 172 l/s 24 Nm 1.5 B W x H x D inch 5.87 × 7.95 × 6.77 CFM 51 lbf.in 13.3 mm 185 × 245 × 195 l/s 54.9 Nm 2.25 C W x H x D inch 7.28 × 9.65 × 7.68 CFM 116.3 lbf.in 20 Table 5-3 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency Output current in A with a switching frequency of:Mains voltage Power (CT) [kW] 4 kHz 6 kHz 8 kHz 10 kHz 12 kHz 14 kHz 16 kHz 1/3 AC 200 V 0.12 to 5.5 Factory setting 16 kHz – no derating necessary 0.37 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.1 0.55 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.1 0.75 2.1 2.1 2.1 2.1 1.6 1.6 1.1 1.1 3.0 3.0 2.7 2.7 1.6 1.6 1.1 1.5 4.0 4.0 2.7 2.7 1.6 1.6 1.1 2.2 5.9 5.9 5.1 5.1 3.6 3.6 2.6 3.0 7.7 7.7 5.1 5.1 3.6 3.6 2.6 4.0 10.2 10.2 6.7 6.7 4.8 4.8 3.6 5.5 13.2 13.2 13.2 13.2 9.6 9.6 7.5 7.5 19.0 18.4 13.2 13.2 9.6 9.6 7.5 3 AC 400 V 11.0 26.0 26.0 17.9 17.9 13.5 13.5 10.4
  • 186. 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 186 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 5-4 MICROMASTER 420 Specifications In order to have a UL compliant installation fuses from the SITOR range with the appropriate current rating must be used. Input voltage range 1 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 % (with built in Class A Filter) Order No. 6SE6420- 2AB11 -2AA1 2AB12 -5AA1 2AB13 -7AA1 2AB15 -5AA1 2AB17 -5AA1 2AB21 -1BA1 2AB21 -5BA1 2AB22 -2BA1 2AB23 -0CA1 [kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 Output Rating [hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6 6.0 Input Current 1) [A] 1.8 3.2 4.6 6.2 8.2 11.0 14.4 20.2 35.5 Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4 13.6 Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 16 20 20 32 40 Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3807 3807 3812 3817 For UL specified * * * * * * * * * [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 16 16 12 10 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8 [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 Output Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8 [kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.3 1.3 3.3 3.6 3.6 5.2 Weight [lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.9 2.9 7.3 7.9 7.9 11.4 1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 240 V without line commutating reactor. * UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
  • 187. Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 187 Input voltage range 1 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 % (Unfiltered) Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC11 -2AA1 2UC12 -5AA1 2UC13 -7AA1 2UC15 -5AA1 2UC17 -5AA1 2UC21 -1BA1 2UC21 -5BA1 2UC22 -2BA1 2UC23 -0CA1 [kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 Output Rating [hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6 6.0 Input Current 1) [A] 1.8 3.2 4.6 6.2 8.2 11.0 14.4 20.2 35.5 Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4 13.6 Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 16 20 20 32 40 Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3807 3807 3812 3817 For UL specified * * * * * * * * * [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 2.5 Input Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 14 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8 [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 Output Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 8 [kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.9 2.9 3.1 5.2 Weight [lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 6.4 6.4 6.8 11.4 Input voltage range 3 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 % (with built in Class A Filter) Order No. 6SE6420- 2AC23 -0CA1 2AC24 -0CA1 2AC25 -5CA1 [kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5 Output Rating [hp] 4.0 5.0 7.5 Output Power [kVA] 6.0 7.7 9.6 Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 19.7 26.5 Output Current [A] 13.6 17.5 22.0 Fuse [A] 25 32 35 Recommended 3NA 3810 3812 3814 For UL specified * * * [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 4.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 14 14 12 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [mm 2 ] 1.5 2.5 4.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 16 14 12 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [kg] 5.2 5.5 5.5 Weight [lbs] 11.4 12.1 12.1 1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 240 V without line commutating reactor. * UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
  • 188. 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 188 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Input voltage range 3 AC 200 V – 240 V, ± 10 % (Unfiltered) Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC11- 2AA1 2UC12- 5AA1 2UC13- 7AA1 2UC15- 5AA1 2UC17- 5AA1 2UC21- 1BA1 2UC21- 5BA1 2UC22- 2BA1 [kW] 0.12 0.25 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 Output Rating [hp] 0.16 0.33 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 Output Power [kVA] 0.4 0.7 1.0 1.3 1.7 2.4 3.2 4.6 Input Current 1) [A] 1.1 1.9 2.7 3.6 4.7 6.4 8.3 11.7 Output Current [A] 0.9 1.7 2.3 3.0 3.9 5.5 7.4 10.4 Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 20 Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3805 3807 For UL specified * * * * * * * * [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 [kg] 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 1.2 2.9 2.9 3.1 Weight [lbs] 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 2.6 6.4 6.4 6.8 Order No. 6SE6420- 2UC23- 0CA1 2UC24- 0CA1 2UC25- 5CA1 [kW] 3.0 4.0 5.5 Output Rating [hp] 4.0 5.0 7.5 Output Power [kVA] 6.0 7.7 9.6 Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 19.7 26.5 Output Current [A] 13.6 17.5 22.0 Fuse [A] 25 32 35 Recommended 3NA 3810 3812 3814 For UL specified * * * [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 4.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 14 14 12 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [mm 2 ] 1.5 2.5 4.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 16 14 12 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [kg] 5.2 5.5 5.5 Weight [lbs] 11.4 12.1 12.1 1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 240 V without line commutating reactor. * UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
  • 189. Issue 10/06 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 189 Input voltage range 3 AC 380 V – 480 V, ± 10 % (with built in Class A Filter) Order No. 6SE6420- 2AD22- 2BA1 2AD23- 0BA1 2AD24- 0BA1 2AD25- 5CA1 2AD27- 5CA1 2AD31- 1CA1 [kW] 2.2 3.0 4.0 5.5 7.5 11.0 Output Rating [hp] 3.0 4.0 5.0 7.5 10.0 15.0 Output Power [kVA] 4.5 5.9 7.8 10.1 14.0 19.8 Input Current 1) [A] 7.5 10.0 12.8 15.6 22.0 32.3 Output Current [A] 5.9 7.7 10.2 13.2 19.0 26.0 Fuse [A] 16 16 20 20 25 35 Recommended 3NA 3805 3805 3807 3807 3810 3814 For UL specified * * * * * * [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 6.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 16 14 12 10 [mm 2 ] 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 10 10 10 8 8 8 [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 2.5 4.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 16 14 12 [mm 2 ] 6.0 6.0 6.0 10.0 10.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 10 10 10 8 8 8 [kg] 3.1 3.3 3.3 5.4 5.7 5.7 Weight [lbs] 6.8 7.3 7.3 11.9 12.5 12.5 1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 400 V without line commutating reactor. * UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
  • 190. 5 MICROMASTER 420 specifications Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 190 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Input voltage range 3 AC 380 V – 480 V, ± 10 % (Unfiltered) Order No. 6SE6420- 2UD13- 7AA1 2UD15- 5AA1 2UD17- 5AA1 2UD21- 1AA1 2UD21- 5AA1 2UD22- 2BA1 2UD23- 0BA1 2UD24- 0BA1 [kW] 0.37 0.55 0.75 1.1 1.5 2.2 3.0 4.0 Output Rating [hp] 0.5 0.75 1.0 1.5 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 Output Power [kVA] 0.9 1.2 1.6 2.3 3.0 4.5 5.9 7.8 Input Current 1) [A] 2.2 2.8 3.7 4.9 5.9 7.5 10.0 12.8 Output Current [A] 1.2 1.6 2.1 3.0 4.0 5.9 7.7 10.2 Fuse [A] 10 10 10 10 10 16 16 20 Recommended 3NA 3803 3803 3803 3803 3803 3805 3805 3807 For UL specified * * * * * * * * [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.5 Input Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 16 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 [mm 2 ] 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 1.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 18 [mm 2 ] 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 2.5 6.0 6.0 6.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 14 14 14 14 14 10 10 10 [kg] 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 1.3 3.3 3.3 3.3 Weight [lbs] 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 2.9 7.3 7.3 7.3 Order No. 6SE6420- 2UD25- 5CA1 2UD27- 5CA1 2UD31- 1CA1 [kW] 5.5 7.5 11.0 Output Rating [hp] 7.5 10.0 15.0 Output Power [kVA] 10.1 14.0 19.8 Input Current 1) [A] 15.6 22.0 32.3 Output Current [A] 13.2 19.0 26.0 Fuse [A] 20 25 35 Recommended 3NA 3807 3810 3814 For UL specified * * * [mm 2 ] 2.5 4.0 6.0 Input Cable, min. [awg] 14 12 10 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Input Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [mm 2 ] 1.5 2.5 4.0 Output Cable, min. [awg] 16 14 12 [mm 2 ] 10.0 10.0 10.0 Output Cable, max. [awg] 8 8 8 [kg] 5.5 5.5 5.5 Weight [lbs] 12.1 12.1 12.1 1) Secondary conditions: Input current at the rated operating point - applies for the short-circuit voltage of the line supply Vk = 2 % referred to the rated drive converter power and a rated line supply voltage of 400 V without line commutating reactor. * UL listed fuses such as Class NON from Bussmann are required for use in America
  • 191. Issue 10/06 6 Options MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 191 6 Options An overview of the options available for the MICROMASTER 420 is given in this section. For further information about options, please refer to the catalog or the documentation CD. 6.1 Device-independent options Basic Operator Panel (BOP) Advanced Operator Panel (AOP) PROFIBUS module PC to inverter connection kit PC to AOP connection kit BOP/AOP door mounting kit for single inverter control AOP door mounting kit for multiple inverter control "DriveMonitor” and "Starter" commissioning tool 6.2 Device-dependent options EMC filter, Class A EMC filter, Class B Additional EMC filter, Class B Low leakage Class B filter Line commutating choke Output choke LC filter Gland plate CAUTION If using output chokes or LC filters operation is only permissible with a pulse frequency of 4 kHz. Make shure that the automatic pulse frequency reductions are disabled. Coercing required parameter adjusting: P1800 = 4 kHz , P0290 = 0 or 1.
  • 192. 6 Options Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 192 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 193. Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 193 7 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) This Chapter contains: EMC information. 7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC)................................................................... 194
  • 194. Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 194 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 7.1 Electro-magnetic compatibility (EMC) All manufacturers / assemblers of electrical apparatus which "performs a complete intrinsic function and is placed on the market as a single unit intended for the end user” must comply with the EMC directive 89/336/EEC. There are three routes for the manufacturer/assembler to demonstrate compliance: 7.1.1 Self-certification This is a manufacturer's declaration that the European standards applicable to the electrical environment for which the apparatus is intended have been met. Only standards that have been officially published in the Official Journal of the European Community can be cited in the manufacturer's declaration. 7.1.2 Technical construction file A technical construction file can be prepared for the apparatus describing its EMC characteristics. This file must be approved by a ‘Competent Body’ appointed by the appropriate European government organization. This approach allows the use of standards that are still in preparation. 7.1.3 EC type examination certificate This approach is only applicable to radio communication transmitting apparatus. All MICROMASTER units are certified for compliance with the EMC directive, when installed in accordance with the recommendations in Section 2.
  • 195. Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 195 7.1.4 EMC Directive Compliance with Imminent Harmonics Regulations From 1st January 2001 all electrical apparatus covered by the EMC Directive will have to comply with EN 61000-3-2 "Limits for harmonic current emissions (equipment input ≤ 16 A per phase)". All Siemens variable speed drives of the MICROMASTER, MIDIMASTER, MICROMASTER Eco and COMBIMASTER ranges, which are classified as "Professional Equipment" within the terms of the standard, fulfill the requirements of the standard. Special considerations for 250 W to 550 W drives with 230 V 1ac mains supplies when used in non-industrial applications Units in this voltage and power range will be supplied with the following warning: ”This equipment requires supply authority acceptance for connection to the public supply network”. Please refer to EN 61000-3-12 sections 5.3 and 6.4 for further information. Units connected to Industrial Networks1 do not require connection approval (see EN 61800-3, section 6.1.2.2). The harmonic current emissions from these products are described in the table below: Table 7-1 Permissible harmonic current emissions Rating Typical Harmonic Current (A) Typical Harmonic Current (%) Typical Voltage Distortion Distribution Transformer Rating 10 kVA 100 kVA 1 MVA 3 rd 5 th 7 th 9 th 11 th 3 rd 5 th 7 th 9 th 11 th THD (%) THD (%) THD (%) 250 W 1AC 230 V 2.15 1.44 0.72 0.26 0.19 83 56 28 10 7 0.77 0.077 0.008 370 W 1AC 230 V 2.96 2.02 1.05 0.38 0.24 83 56 28 10 7 1.1 0.11 0.011 550 W 1AC 230 V 4.04 2.70 1.36 0.48 0.36 83 56 28 10 7 1.5 0.15 0.015 The allowed harmonic currents for "professional equipment” with an input power > 1 kW are not yet defined. Therefore, any electrical apparatus containing the above drives which has an input power > 1 kW will not require connection approval. Alternatively, the necessity to apply for connection approval can be avoided by fitting the input chokes recommended in the technical catalogues (except 550 W 230 V 1ac units). 1 Industrial Networks are defined as those which do not supply buildings used for domestic purposes.
  • 196. Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 196 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 7.1.5 Classification of EMC performance Three General classes of EMC performance are available as detailed below: Class 1: General Industrial Compliance with the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN 61800-3 for use in Second Environment (Industrial). Table 7-2 Class 1 - General Industrial EMC Phenomenon Standard Level Radiated Emissions EN 55011 Level A1Emissions: Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Limits complying with EN 55011, Class A, Group 2 Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables, 1 kV control Immunity: Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field EN 61000-4-3 26-1000 MHz, 10 V/m Class 2: Filtered Industrial This level of performance will allow the manufacturer/assembler to self-certify their apparatus for compliance with the EMC directive for the industrial environment as regards the EMC performance characteristics of the power drive system. Performance limits are as specified in the Generic Industrial Emissions and Immunity standards EN 61000-6-4 and EN 61000-6-2. Table 7-3 Class 2 - Filtered Industrial EMC Phenomenon Standard Level Radiated Emissions EN 55011 Limit A1Emissions: Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Limits complying with EN 55011, Class A, Group 2 Supply Voltage Distortion EN 61000-2-4 Voltage Fluctuations, Dips, Unbalance, Frequency Variations EN 61000-2-1 Magnetic Fields EN 61000-4-8 50 Hz, 30 A/m Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables, 2 kV control Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field, amplitude modulated EN 61000-4-3 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM, power and signal lines Immunity: Radio-frequency Electromagnetic Field, pulse modulated EN 61000-4-3 900 MHz, 10 V/m 50% duty cycle, 200 Hz repetition rate
  • 197. Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 197 Class 3: Filtered - for residential, commercial and trade applications This level of performance will allow the manufacturer / assembler to self-certify compliance of their apparatus with the EMC directive for the residential, commercial and trade applications environment as regards the EMC performance characteristics of the power drive system. Performance limits are as specified in the generic emission and immunity standards EN 61000-6-3 and EN 61000-6-1 in residential. Table 7-4 Class 3 - Filtered for Residential, Commercial and trade applications EMC Phenomenon Standard Level Emissions: Radiated Emissions* EN 55011 Limit B Conducted Emissions EN 61800-3 Category C1: Limit complying with EN 55011, Class B Category C2: Limit complying with EN 55011, Class A Immunity: Supply Voltage Distortion EN 61000-2-4 Voltage Fluctuations, Dips, Unbalance, Frequency Variations EN 61000-2-1 Magnetic Fields EN 61000-4-8 50 Hz, 30 A/m Electrostatic Discharge EN 61000-4-2 8 kV air discharge Burst Interference EN 61000-4-4 2 kV power cables, 2 kV control Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Field, amplitude modulated EN 61000-4-3 80-1000 MHz, 10 V/m, 80% AM, power and signal lines Radio-frequency Electromagnetic Field, pulse modulated EN 61000-4-3 900 MHz, 10 V/m 50% duty cycle, 200 Hz repetition rate * These limits are dependent on the inverter being correctly installed inside a metallic switchgear enclosure. The limits will not be met if the inverter is not enclosed. NOTICE To achieve these performance levels, you must not exceed the default Pulse frequency nor use cables longer than 25 m. The MICROMASTER inverters are intended exclusively for professional applications. Therefore, they do not fall within the scope of the harmonics emissions specification EN 61000-3-2. Maximum mains supply voltage when filters are fitted is 460 V.
  • 198. Changing the Operator Panel Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 198 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Table 7-5 Compliance Table Model Remarks Class 1 – General Industrial 6SE6420-2U***-**A1 Units without filters, all voltages and performances. The product norm EN 61800-3 +A11 for "Variable-speed electrical drives, Part 3: EMC product standard including specific test methods” specifies limits for conducted emissions which cannot be complied with by unfiltered inverters in the second environment. Filtered inverters (as described under Class 2) must be installed for drive systems in C3 installations. The use of unfiltered inverters in industrial environments is allowed only if they are part of a system which is equipped with line filters on the higher-level supply side. Class 2 – Filtered Industrial 6SE6420-2A***-**A0 All units with integral Class A filters 6SE6420-2A***-**A0 with 6SE6400-2FA00-6AD0 Frame size A units 400-480 V with external Class A footprint filters Class 3 – Filtered for residential, commercial and light industry 6SE6420-2U***-**A0 with 6SE6400-2FB0*-***0 Unfiltered units fitted with external Class B footprint filters. 6SE6420-2A***-**A1 with 6SE6400-2FS0*-***0 or 6SE6400-2FL0*-***0 Units with fitted Class A filters and additional external Class B filters. 6SE6420-2U***-**A1 with 6SE6400-2FA0*-***0 6SE6420-2A***-**A1 Unfiltered units fitted with external Class B filters All units with fitted Class A filters. For drive systems in category C2 installations, the following warning notice is necessary: In residential environments, this product may cause radio-frequency disturbances which may necessitate interference suppression measures. * denotes any value is allowed. Category C3: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V. For use in second environment. Category C2: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V. For use in first environment. Installation and commissioning by EMC expert only. Category C1: Drive system (PDS) with rated voltage < 1000 V. For use in first environment.
  • 199. Issue 10/06 Changing the Operator Panel MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 199 Appendices A Changing the Operator Panel P Fn 0 1 P Fn 0 1 P Fn 0 1 1 3 4 2
  • 200. Removing Covers Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 200 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 B Removing Covers B.1 Removing Covers Frame Size A 3 1 2 4
  • 201. Issue 10/06 Removing Covers MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 201 B.2 Removing Covers Frame Size B and C ! # $
  • 202. Removing ‘Y’ Cap Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 202 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 C Removing ‘Y’ Cap C.1 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A 21 LK 700
  • 203. Issue 10/06 Removing ‘Y’ Cap MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 203 C.2 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C !
  • 204. Removing fan Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 204 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 D Removing fan D.1 Removing fan, Frame Size A
  • 205. Issue 10/06 Removing fan MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 205 D.2 Removing fan, Frame Sizes B and C
  • 206. Applicable Standards Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 206 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 E Applicable Standards European Low Voltage Directive The MICROMASTER product range complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC as amended by Directive 98/68/EEC. The units are certified for compliance with the following standards: EN 61800-5-1 Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems, Part 5-1: Safety requirements – Electrical, thermal and energy EN 60204-1 Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines European Machinery Directive The MICROMASTER inverter series does not fall under the scope of the Machinery Directive. However, the products have been fully evaluated for compliance with the essential Health Safety requirements of the directive when used in a typical machine application. A Declaration of Incorporation is available on request. European EMC Directive When installed according to the recommendations described in this manual, the MICROMASTER fulfils all requirements of the EMC Directive as defined by the EMC Product Standard for Power Drive Systems EN61800-3. Underwriters Laboratories UL and CUL LISTED POWER CONVERSION EQUIPMENT ISO 9001 Siemens plc operates a quality management system, which complies with the requirements of ISO 9001.
  • 207. Issue 10/06 Short circuit current rating (SCCR) MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 207 F Short circuit current rating (SCCR) Frame Size C The equipment has a standard SCCR value of 10 kA, which complies with the requirements of UL508C. In addition to the standard SCCR a high SCCR is available which can be used for industrial control panel installations in line with the National Electrical Code (NEC) article 409 (edition 2005) and Underwriters Laboratories UL508A (effective April 2006). The uL certification of MICROMASTER 420 allows the drives to adopt a high SCCR equal to the interupt current rating of the branch-circuit protection (BCP) device protecting the drive. Hence by selection of the correct uL listed BCP device with appropriate interrupt rating for the application, any high SCCR rating can be achieved for MICROMASTER 420, including SCCR values above 10 kA. The above statements are valid for the respective maximum voltage of the drive when protected by a UL recognised/listed H, J or K type fuse, a circuit breaker or self-protected combination motor controller.
  • 208. List of Abbreviations Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 208 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 G List of Abbreviations AC Alternating current AD Analog digital converter ADC Analog digital converter ADR Address AFM Additional frequency modification AG Automation unit AIN Analog input AOP Advanced operator panel AOUT Analog output ASP Analog setpoint ASVM Asymmetric space vector modulation BCC Block check character BCD Binary-coded decimal code BI Binector input BICO Binector / connector BO Binector output BOP Basic operator panel C Commissioning CB Communication board CCW Counter-clockwise CDS Command data set CFM Cubic feet per minute (1 l/s ≅ 2,1 CFM) CI Connector input CM Configuration management CMD Commando CMM Combimaster CO Connector output CO/BO Connector output / Binector output COM Common (terminal that is connected to NO or NC) COM-Link Communication link CT Commissioning, ready to run CT Constant torque CUT Commissioning, run, ready to run CW Clockwise DA Digital analog converter DAC Digital analog converter DC Direct current DDS Drive data set
  • 209. Issue 10/06 List of Abbreviations MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 209 DIN Digital input DIP DIP switch DOUT Digital output DS Drive state EEC European Economic Community EEPROM Electrical erasable programmable read-only memory ELCB Earth leakage circuit breaker EMC Electro-magnetic compatibility EMF Electromotive force EMI Electro-magnetic interference ESB Equivalent circuit FAQ Frequently asked questions FB Function block FCC Flux current control FCL Fast current limit FF Fixed frequency FFB Free function block FOC Field orientated control FSA Frame size A GSG Getting started guide GUI ID Global unique identifier HIW Main actual value HSW Main setpoint HTL High-threshold logic I/O Input and output IBN Commissioning IGBT Insulated gate bipolar transistor IND Sub-index JOG Jog KIB Kinetic buffering LCD Liquid crystal display LED Light emitting diode LGE Length MHB Motor holding brake MM4 MICROMASTER 4th. Generation MOP Motor potentiometer NC Normally closed NO Normally open OPI Operating instructions PDS Power drive system PID PID controller (proportional, integral, derivative) PKE Parameter ID PKW Parameter ID value PLC Programmable logic controller
  • 210. List of Abbreviations Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 210 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 PLI Parameter list PPO Parameter process data object PTC Positive temperature coefficient PWE Parameter value PWM Pulse-width modulation PX Power extension PZD Process data QC Quick commissioning RAM Random-access memory RCCB Residual current circuit breaker RCD Residual current device RFG Ramp function generator RFI Radio-frequency interference RPM Revolutions per minute SCL Scaling SDP Status display panel SLVC Sensorless vector control STW Control word STX Start of text SVM Space vector modulation TTL Transistor-transistor logic USS Universal serial interface VC Vector control VT Variable torque ZSW Status word ZUSW Additional setpoint
  • 211. Issue 10/06 Index MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 211 Index A Altitude......................................................24 Ambient operating conditions...................23 Altitude..................................................24 Atmospheric Pollution...........................24 Electromagnetic Radiation....................24 Humidity................................................24 Installation and cooling .........................24 Shock....................................................24 Temperature .........................................23 Vibration................................................24 Water hazard ........................................24 Applicable standards European EMC Directive ....................206 European Low Voltage Directive ........206 European Machinery Directive............206 ISO 9001.............................................206 Underwriters Laboratories ..................206 Atmospheric Pollution...............................24 Automatic restart ....................................152 B BICO technology ......................................44 Block diagram...........................................56 C Changing the Operator Panel.................199 Closed-loop Vdc control .........................156 Vdc_max controller.............................156 Commissioning.........................................59 50 / 60 Hz setting..................................61 Commissioning the application.............72 Fast commissioning ..............................62 Motor / control data...............................69 Motor data identification........................70 Reset to the factory setting...................88 Series commissioning...........................86 With BOP or AOP .................................62 Communications.......................................98 Compound braking.................................150 Contact address .........................................5 Current reduction depending on pulse frequency ............................................185 D DC braking............................................. 147 Dimensions and Torques......................... 25 Drill pattern for MICROMASTER 420 ..... 25 E Electrical Installation ................................ 27 Electro-Magnetic Compatibility EC type-examination certificate ......... 194 general ............................................... 194 self-certification .................................. 194 technical construction file................... 194 Electro-Magnetic Interference.................. 32 avoiding EMI......................................... 32 Electromagnetic Radiation....................... 24 Electronic brakes ................................... 147 Compound braking............................. 150 DC braking ......................................... 147 EMC ....................................................... 194 EMC Directive Compliance.................... 195 EMC performance filtered for residential, commercial and trade applications ............................... 197 filtered industrial class........................ 196 general industrial class....................... 196 EMI........................................................... 32 F Fault messages with the BOP fitted.............................. 179 with the SDP fitted.............................. 178 Features................................................... 19 Fixed frequencies................................... 121 Flying restart .......................................... 154 Foreword.................................................... 5 Functions ................................................. 35 H Humidity................................................... 24
  • 212. Index Issue 10/06 MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 212 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 I Inputs / outputs.........................................89 Analog inputs ........................................94 Analog outputs......................................96 Digital inputs .........................................89 Digital outputs .......................................92 Installation ................................................21 after a period of storage........................23 Installation and cooling.............................24 J Jog..........................................................126 JOG ........................................................126 L Long cables operation with........................................29 M Main Characteristics.................................19 Mechanical Installation.............................25 MICROMASTER 420 fault messages....................................180 general..................................................18 Main Characteristics .............................19 Performance Characteristics ................19 Protection characteristics......................20 specifications ......................................183 MICROMASTER 420 Specifications ......186 MICROMASTER Performance Ratings .184 Monitoring functions / messages............158 Motor connections....................................29 Motor control...........................................168 V/f control............................................168 Motor holding brake................................141 Motorized potentiometer.........................124 Mounting on standard rail.........................26 O Online Service Support...........................5 Operation with long cables............................................29 Residual Current Device.......................28 ungrounded IT supplies ........................28 Operator panels for MM4 .........................52 AOP ......................................................53 BOP ......................................................52 SDP.......................................................57 Options Device-dependent options ................. 191 Device-independent options............... 191 Overload responses............................... 160 Overview.................................................. 17 P Parameters .............................................. 38 Attributes .............................................. 40 Changing with BOP.............................. 55 Grouping and access ........................... 43 Monitoring parameters ......................... 39 Setting parameters............................... 38 Performance Characteristics ................... 19 PID controller ......................................... 128 PID fixed setpoint ............................... 131 PID motorized potentiometer ............. 130 Power and motor connections ................. 29 Power connections................................... 29 Power module protection....................... 164 Protection characteristics......................... 20 Q Qualified personnel.................................... 6 R Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size A ........... 202 Removing ‘Y’ Cap Frame Size B and C. 203 Removing Covers Frame Size A ........... 200 Removing Covers Frame Size B and C. 201 Removing fan Frame Size A...................................... 204 Frame Sizes B and C ......................... 205 Residual Current Device operation with....................................... 28 S Safety instructions...................................... 7 Screening Methods.................................. 33 Setpoint channel .................................... 132 AFM.................................................... 132 Ramp-function generator ................... 134 Shock....................................................... 24
  • 213. Issue 10/06 Index MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 213 T Technical Support ......................................5 Technological controller .........................128 Temperature.............................................23 Thermal motor protection .......................160 Troubleshooting......................................177 U Ungrounded (IT) supplies operation with........................................28 V V/f control ...............................................168 Current limiting....................................175 Vibration ...................................................24 W Warnings, cautions notes commissioning........................................ 8 dismantling disposal.......................... 10 general ................................................... 7 operation ................................................ 9 repair .................................................... 10 transport storage................................. 8 Water hazard ........................................... 24 Wiring Guidelines EMI ............................. 33
  • 215. MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 215 Suggestions and/or Corrections Suggestions Corrections To: Siemens AG Automation Drives Group SD SPA PM4 Postfach 3269 D-91050 Erlangen Bundesrepublik Deutschland For Publication/Manual: MICROMASTER 420 Email: documentation.sd@siemens.com User Documentation From Name: Operating Instructions Order Number: 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Date of Issue: 10/06 Company/Service Department Address: Telephone: __________ / Telefax: __________ / Should you come across any printing errors when reading this publication, please notify us on this sheet. Suggestions for improvement are also welcome.
  • 216. MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 216 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0
  • 217. Issue 10/06 View of Unit MICROMASTER 420 Operating Instructions 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 217 View of Unit Frame Size A Frame Size B C SDP fitted Power Terminal Connections Control Terminal Connections Access to Y Cap
  • 218. Siemens AG Bereich Automation and Drives (AD) Geschäftsgebiet Standard Drives (SD) Postfach 3269, D-91050 Erlangen Federal Republic of Germany © Siemens AG, 2001, 2002, 2004, 2005, 2006 Object to change without prior notice Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Order No.: 6SE6400-5AA00-0BP0 Date: 10/06